UC-NRLF B 4 507 SOM 00 GERMAN GRAMMAR A Conversational Granvmar of the German Language WITH COMPREHENSIVE REFERENCE-PAGES FOR USE IN TRANSLATION AND COMPOSITION AND NOTES ON THE HISTORY AND ETYMOLOGY OF GERMAN EY OTTO CHRISTIAN NÄF B.A. LOND. Ux\IV. LATE GERMAN MASTER AT GIGGLESWICK SCHOOL RIVINGTONS WATERLOO PLACE, LONDON MDCCCLXXXVII ? p 6 \ 1 1 A/l PREFACE During a long experience in teaching German in English schools and preparing pupils for various Examinations, I have often felt the want of a sufficiently complete Grammar of small hulk, and especially of comprehensive Reference-Pages, for constant use in Translation and Composition. I have here tried to supply this want, and I hope this effort will meet with some favour, and be granted a trial. I wish to draw special attention to the " Reference- Pages " interspersed throughout the book. I have used them with success for some years in my own classes, and have found them much appreciated by the more thoughtful students. They ought first to be gone through in portions in the Grammar lessons, and the Examples attached to each portion learnt, and the Exercises written out and learnt after correction by the teacher. Then, in the Translation and Composition lessons, these Reference-Pages should be constantly by the side of the student, to be again and again referred to until thoroughly familiar ; for it is only thus that they will become of real advantage. The whole Grammar will be found divided into Six Terms, every one complete in itself. Each of the first four has appended to it Additional Exercises, to be written out when revising the work of the Term, and a Dictionary of the words to be used in the Exercises for writing during the Term, besides a page of Conversational Sentences, and a Poem or two for Repetition. I have found it a good plan to set a few sentences, words, and verses for every lesson, to be heard by the teacher viva voce, before beginning the regular work of the lesson. The same sentences or words, repeated over and over again, must at last become fixed in the memory, and accustom the pupil to the sound and genius of a lano;uau;e. vi Preface. In the Exercises for writing during the first two Terms, I have purposely confined myself to very few words, so as not to hamper the ready understanding of the grammatical rules and their application, and also because it is important that some common words, though they may be few, should be firmly fixed in the memory during the first few months of learning a new language. After the Second Term an easy translation-book should be at once begun, and every new w^ord should be shortly parsed in writing. I have, at the com- mencement of the Third Term, inserted a page containing a short easy piece for translation, and shown how the words ought to be parsed. The number of words to be parsed will of course very rapidly decrease. It is now that the Reference-Pages will become specially useful, and indeed necessary, and they should always be at hand. A German Dictionary may at this stage be put with advantage into the hands of the student. The First TJiree Terms treat of the Simple Principal Sentence, and the rules as to the sequence of words in it will be found to go hand in haud with the treatment of the Parts of Speech per se. The Fourth Term treats of the Accessory Sentences, and finally the Com- pound Sentence, with some hints on the Complex Sentence. The Fifth Term introduces the student, now practically acquainted with all rules in Accidence and Syntax, to the idiomatic peculiarities of the various parts of speech, and many difi'erences between the English and German idioms. The Sixth Term contains hints on the Formation of Words, the meaning of Prefixes and Aftixes, and the Etymology of many German words ; for the more advanced examinations now-a-days require some little knowledge of all these. This little work does not claim to be a complete guide to all the intricacies of the German language ; indeed, any one attempting to write a Grammar of a rich living language must soon become convinced that he has undertaken a task practically interminable, and necessarily incomplete ; for though he pile Preface. vil rule upon rule, and Nota hene upon Nota bene, until the fear arises that the very multiplicity of instructions and hints may hopelessly confuse and discourage the average student, yet there will loom behind, in the recesses of a living, and therefore progressing, language, whole hosts of idiomatic uses of words or phrases which nothing but a long life in the country itself can teach. The following pages are, then, only compiled with the modest aim of introducing the pupil, in a rational manner, to the broad facts of the German idiom, and thus to lay a safe foundation, upon which an ultimate sound knowledge may be built up by means of diligent study of the German authors, and, if possible, actual inter- course with the people itself, I shall be thankful for any friendly suggestions as to shortcomings in this work, and I hope that, combining, as it does, the synthetical with the analytical methods of teaching living languages, it may be found to supply a want which I, in company with many of my colleagues, have long felt, namely, that of a handy, yet tolerably complete, companion to the study of German literature and the composition of German themes or letters. OTTO C. NÄF. London, December 1886. CONTENTS Reference-Page A. The German Alphabet — German Handwriting, PAGE xiii FIEST TERM. Reference-Page B. On Pronunciation, ........ 2 Lessons 1 and 2. Introductory Rules (1-7); Present Indicative; Imperfect Indicative of Regular Verbs, ••••••....,. 3 Reference-Page C. " Definite " and " Indefinite Article groups " (with Exercises), . . 5 Lessons 3, 4, 5, and 6. Introductory Rules continued (8-20) ; Tenses of Verbs and Auxiliaries continued, . . ••.-...... 7 Additional Exercises on the First Term's Grammar, . . . . . .11 Dictionary of Words, to be used for the Exercises in the First and Second Terms, ... 12 Conversational Sentences, to be learnt during the First Term, ...... 13 Poem ("Lurline"), to be learnt by heart during the First Term, ..... 14 SECOND TERM. Lesson 7. General Rules continued (21, 22) ; Imperative, General Scheme of the Declensions, and Formation of Plural, of the Noun, Reference-Page D. Detailed Formation of Plural of Nouns (with Exercises), Lesson 8. Gener al Rules continued (23-26) ; Present Subjunctive, Reference-Page E. Detailed Declension of Nouns (with Exercises), Lesson 9. General Rules continued (27-21:) ; Imperfect Subjunctive, . Reference-Page P. Rules for recognising the Gender of Nouns (with Exercises), Lesson 10. General Rules continued (30-32) ; Compound Tenses ; Conditional, Re ference-Pag Gr. On the Declension of the Adjective (with Exercises), . Lesson 11. General Rules continued (33-36) ; Compound Tenses, Lesson 12. General Rules continued (37-40) ; Compound Tenses (continued), Additional Exercises on the Second Term's Grammar, .... Reference-Page H. Scheme of Conjugation of Regular Verbs {to say), Reference-Page I. Scheme of Conjugation of : to have, to be, to become, Conversational Sentences to be learnt during the Second Term, Poems (Two), to be learnt by heart during the Second Term, . Reference-Page J. Scheme of Sequence of Words in a Primary Sentence, . 16 17 18 21 22 24 25 27 28 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Example of Parsing, Reference-Page K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. THIRD TERM. The Auxiliaries of Mood (with Exercises), Hints on recognising Regular Verbs ; Notes on Auxiliary, General hints on the Irregular Verb (Exercises), Alphabetical List of Irregular Verbs, . On the Prepositions (with Exercises), . Separable and Inseparable Verbs (with Exercises), Personal Pronouns ; Reflexive Pronouns, b 40 41 44 46 49 52 54 56 Contents. Dictionary of Words for the Exercises in the Third Term, Additional Exercises on the Third Term's Grammar, . Conversational Sentences, to be learnt during the Third Term, Poem ("The Thunderstorm "), to be learnt by heart during the Third Term, FAGB 58 60 61 62 FOURTH TEEM. Refekence-Page R. „ S. „ T. ,, U. „ V. ., w. The Numerals (with Exercises), .... Possessive, Demonstrative, Interrogative Pronouns (Exercises), Comparison of Adjectives (with Exercises), Indefinite Pronouns ; Adverbs (with Exercises), Relative, Correlative Pronouns (with Exercises), Conjunctions ; Alphabetical List, Exercises on the above, . ,, ,, X. Oratio Obliqua (Indirect statements, questions, commands), ,, ,, Y. Interjections; Impersonal Verbs (Exercises), On the Assertion and Predicate, ,, ,, Z. Complete Rules on the Sequence of Words (Exercises), General Sentences (Recapitulatory), .... Dictionary of Words for the Exercises in the Fourth Term, Conversational Sentences, to be learnt during the Fourth Term, Poems (Two), to be learnt by heart during the Fourth Term, . 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 83 85 86 88 89 FIFTH TERM. NOTES ON IDIOMATIC USES OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. Reference-Paoe AA. Noun and Article (Exercises), ,, BB. Gender of Nouns, ,, CC. Number of Nouns, ,, DD. Adjective (Exercises), ,, EE. Prepositions (with Exercises), ,, PF. Pronouns (Personal, Possessive, Relative), Indefinite Pronouns, . ,, GG. On the Government of Verbs, ,, HH. On the Translation of the English Infinitive, ,, KK. On the Translation of the English Verbal in -ing, ,, LL. On the Past Participle and some Tenses, Idioms and Proverbs, to be learnt during the Fifth Term, Poems, to be learnt by heart during the Fifth Term, Example of German Composition, , . ' . 92 94 95 96 98 106 108 110 114 116 118 120 121 124 SIXTH TERM. HISTORICAL OUTLINE, ETYMOLOGY, AND WORD-FORMATION. HisTOBiCAL Outline, ........... Etymology. Vowel and Consonant Changes — I. Vowels : A. Ablaut, .......... B. Umlaut, .......... C. Brechung [with Schwächung and Dehnung], ..... 128 133 134 134 Contents. xi II. Consonants : p^^j, A. Spirantes, ......... 135 B. Liquidae, .......... 135 C. Mutae, ........... 136 Wo7-d-Fo7-'mation. General Remarks, ......... 137 I. Inner or Root-vowel changes (List), ........ 137 II. Derivation of Words — A. By Suffixes : (a) Verbs [-cn, ^cln, -trcii, -exn, =jcn], ...... 139 {b) Substantives [-ex, -ncr, 4n, -el, =fal, 4iiig, =lcin, -c^cii, ^img, ^d, -niif/ -^iit, «turn, =f^aft], 139 (c) Adjectives [=cn, =crn, -Iq, -'i(l)t, 4^d), 4ic^, -fam, =bar, 4aft], ... 140 B. By Prefixes : (cf) re?-5s [ge*, bc=, fr=, »er*, jer^ cnt=, nüf=], ..... 140 (b) Substantives [@e*, Un*, !D?if«], ....... 141 (c) .4cZ/ecn 53erfafl (Jotumbuö 2)uMtn gtngat ©laoftone 3önattuß 3uno ^ingfton bonbon 3)?erico 9?ooember £)bc|Ta Duecn^Ionb Tiber Uhlan Venus Warwick Xerxes Yacht Zululand XibtX Xerreö 3ulu{anb Notes. — s at the beginning or in the middle of a word or syllable is syllable is 6 . Distinguish f / =&- from f / -/. ^/7y # /7/ -t,-^. ,y^?/? ■/^ '>t^t--7/^-'7^'Ui^-t^l^iL ; but s at the, end of a word or •ss at the end of a word or syllable is always ^.ß . Distinguish ^fj =ss from ^ /? =tz. St is sometimes written ,/'' instead of 'JV . Distinguish /-' /' - c loses the little mark • when in combination with /■'^'■;/ St from /I- =iV — vc/i. 6^ German Granunar. XV Examples in German Writing. Watxi l^at Albert " has a cineu 23ruber in (Jatatö otcr Doöer brother in Calais or Dover (^nglanb unt) granfretc^ France tn 3r(anb : was in Ireland ; bonbon tft bie ÜÄetropoIc England and ©cinrtc^ war ^ Henry London is the great-powers in ^aüforntcn in California metropolis of Europe ; New-York, of America unb fJcji ftnb 3tt)ttttnöö:^lOärap^ ifi The Xylograph is erne neue new na(^ §Jofo|>ama gegangen Yokohama " gone @d;reibmafc!)ine writing-machine Notice. — Capital initials must be used in German for all nouns and words used as nouns, and also for the Pronouns of the 3d person plural, if used instead of the 2d person, in addressing persons. — id^, /, has no capital initial, except, like all other words, when at the beginning of a sentence. NOTICE The student will find that in this Grammar the useless I) after a t is regularly omitted ; thus: tun, to do; XÜXC (f.), door. As this return to the more correct old spelling may how- ever be too thorough for many, attention is here drawn to the fact that the etymologically doubtful or incorrect tf) is still retained in most modern books, etc., in the following words, and of course all their derivatives or compounds : X^al (n.), valley, dale Z^m (m.), clay but : %on (m.), sound SI;or (m..),fool Xi)OX (n.), gate X^xälU (f.). tx, er, Wer, etc. x i \(ii.) short, almost like a in hat; Jberr, äöevL etc. { ^ i-. • i -\ e tJ ^v / ' } y r f M NEVER like e m /le.l ) /o\ /^^"^ ^°"S' ^^^® ^ ^^ sane; gept, 2öeg/ etc. i ^^'"'^ l(ii.) short, as in then; n)enn, >^elt>, etc. ^ j\rj5, — ee, ee is always close and long, as a in sane ; except only in teer and ©^ecre, where it is open and long, as e in there. , c (1) short, as in this ; mit, ^ixt etc. 1 ^ __^ ,., . . , ■ , -, i i I ^ ■' .J U NEVER like 4 m /w(//t. I ( (2) long, like e in these ; XO\X, tpn, etc. j Ü Ü always like M in s^r (sft/e) in French; for, tnübe* (1) open, short, almost like e in her; ^otte, föurteit^ (2) close, long, like eu in deux in French; @5^ne, fc^OU. „ I (1) open, long, like e in ^Aerc; S3ctV, gä^ven» ( (2) close, long, like a in sane ; ^väne, gä|)nen. J^.B. — Vowels followed by a doubled consonant ai-e, as a rule, pronounced short, ew, du \have a short sound made up of that of e in her and that of the ih in the French U)u ; (eu), (ciu)-' ^veunb, «l^äufev» This sound somewhat approaches that of oy in hoy. N.B. — ie sounds like e in Äe ; ei sounds like i in hUjU. Consonants. The consonants in German have the same sound as in English, except : c before a, e, i sounds like -ts in gets. ch is guttural after a, o, u, au, as ch in loch (Scotch) ; it is soft in all other cases at the end of a syllable ; (but like k in king when at the beginning of a word.) c before a, o, u, or any consonant (except h), is like k in king, g at the beginning of a syllable is hard, like g in gone. g after e, i, ä, ö, ü, äu, or a consonant, is sounded like a soft rf). h always aspirated at the beginning of a syllable, as h in horse ; when not initial, it is scarcely sounded at all. j always like y in young. v always like / in feel, to always like v in veal. z always like -ts in gets. cju always like kv as in bucb-uenison. ph like ph in Philip. \ sch always like sh in shoot. Most German words have one strongly accented syllable, which must be carefully noted by the pupil. In words alike in English and German, the accented syllable often differs, and in most cases the German accent is nearer the end of the word than in English, as : ^onjcvt, ^axi^, 33eva«, mn\if, etc. German Grammar. Lesson i. 1. The Noun or Pronoun expressing the doer of the action indicated by the verb is in the Nominative, that expressing the object of the action, generally in the Accusative Case. 2. The Accusative and Nominative of all Feminine and Neuter words in the Singular, as well as of all Plural words, are the same in form. 3. The Verb expressing the action of a Substantive must always be in the Third Person and agree with it as to Number. 4. All Infinitives end in — eu (or — n) ; if this ending is cut off, the root of the Verb remains ; this root never changes in the Regular Verbs. PRESENT INDICATIVE OF REGULAR VERBS. Subject. Assertion. Object. Subject. Assertion. Object, i(^ \)^\''t bie Sirnc I fetch the 2^ear t>u uvm baö 2)orf thou praisest the village er (fie, eö) fauf'-t baö |)u^n he [she, it) buys thefoiol wir fU(|*cn bnö Si toe seek the egrj x\x üer!aiif=ct bie )?ru($t ye sell the fruit fte (©te) I;ör-en baö Sieb they (you) hear the song bie (f. s.), baö (n. s.), the bie 5OTiltter/ the mother tie 55Iume, the flower bie geber, the pen bie 3?ofe, the rose bie @tabt, the toton bie ®c[;ule, the school WORDS. Ullb, and tobten, to praise fag=en, to say fauf=en, to buy fud)-en, to seek i)OUm, to fetch S)erfauf-eii, to sell eine (f. s.), ein (n. s.), a, an baö ilinb, the child baö Sorf, the village baS Suc|), the book baö ©faö, the glass baö Mäid^tn, the girl baö Si, the egg Exercise for Translation into German. 1. We seelc the child. 3. The mother praises the school. [3.] 5. The child seeks the book. 7. They praise the town. 9. You sell the flower and a glass. 2. The girl buys a pen and a rose. 4. Ye sell the flower. 6. The mother seeks the child. 8. You jaraise the rose. 10. A child fetches an egg. German Grammar. Lesson 2. m 5. Almost all verbs with 0, It, eu or ä, Ö, Ü, alt in the Koot are regular, i.e. the Eoot never changes throughout the Conjugation. 6. In Simple Statements the order of words in German is the same as in English, i.e. Subject, Assertion (Verb), Object. 7. In Questions the order is : Assertion (Verb), Subject, Object ; hence the English do, does, did, etc., are never translated. Affirmative : 2)er 33atcr tobt ba(5 Äinb. The father praises the child. Interrogative : ioU ter 33atev baö tfnb ? Does the father praise the child ? IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF REGULAR VERBS. SUBJECT. ASSERTION. OBJECT. SUBJECT.' ASSERTION". OBJECT. ic^ I;o^tc bie Same / fetched the lady bu |)öv=tcft baö |)orn thou didst hear the horn er (fie, eö) tieb-'tc baö 2:f;ier he (she, it) loved the animal xoxx fuc(;-tcu bie pfeife ive sourjht the 2yipe i^r fa3=tct baö Sort ye said the zvord fte (©ie) fauf*teu baö ©emälbe they [you) bought the picture WORDS. t»er (m. s.), <Äe ein (m. s.), a, an einige, some ber ilönig, ^^^^ M, S. F. S. N. S. PLUKAL. ENGLISH. Nom. Ace. beu \ bie bad btc the, GeD. beü tetr bed bcr of the Dat. bcm fcer bent ben to the 1. All the members of this group are declined like ^ ^r and are pure adjectives, i.e. they belong to some, / ■ noun, with which-Üiey must strictly agree in Gendejp, "* ' ' Number fl^d Ca'feeM^ The Only Memhers of this group are : Nom. M. S. F. S. N. S. PLURAL, ENGLISH. | Nom. M. S. F. S. N. S, PLURAL. ENGLISH. wei^'cr? iveW;e? iveW;eg? iveic^e? which? jeber jebc jebeä every, each mawdjct manege mandjC'S (manc{;e) many-a Notice : =aÖ (n. s. ) of baö becomes *eÖ in the other members of the group. 2. Sometimes this, that, ii:hich ? are separated from their nouns by a 3d person of some tense of the verb to be, as. This is my father; when used thus, the neuter singular baö or biefes?, feneö, tvetc()eö? are employed, and no agreement with the noun takes place, as, bflö ifi mein Skater. M. S. F. s. N. S. PLURAL, ENGLISH. ber btc ia^ btc the biefcr biefc biefc Ö biefc this, these jener jene |ene§ jene that, those (6) The 'INDEFINITE ARTICLE GROUP' of Determinative Adjectives. 1. All the members of this group are declined like fein, and are pure adjectives, and must be followed by a noun, with which they agree strictly in Gender, Number, and Case. M. S. F. S. N. S, PLURAL. ENGLIS Nom. Ace. fein ) feinen ( feine fein feine 110 Gen. feinet feiner feine§ feiner of no Dat. feinem feiner feinem feinen to no The Only Memhers of this group are: Nom. M, s. F. S. N. S. PLURAL. ENGLISH. ein eine ein (einige) a, an {some) fein feine fein feine no (before a substantive) tvaö für ein. .2 wa^ für eine. .9 \v>ai für ein. ,? Wci^ für...? What sort of .. ? and all the Possessive Adjectives. Nom. M. s. F. S. N. S. PLURAL. ENGLISH. Nom. M. s. F. S, N. S. PLURAL. ENGLISH. mein meine mein meine my itnfer unfeve unfer unfere oi'.r bein beine bein beine thy euer euere euer euere your fein feine fein feine his it)r it; re i^r i^xe their i^r if;re i^r i^re her [3H- 3^re 3^r 3t;re your] fein feine fein feine its (The latter used in polite address ) 2. When the noun to which these adjectives belong is not expressed after them, they change like the members of the " Definite Article " group (see a above), as: meiner, meine, meinet, meine, m/?ie. S3a5 für eineä? What sort ? (neutev). German Grammar Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page 0. cr (fte, Co), tfl, he {she, it) is ber 2?Icifiift, the pencil ber ©rief, the letter ber |)unt>, the dog ber ^Ut, the hat WORDS. bcIof;nen to reward fagcn (with Dative) tt ttebft beine 3)hitter thou lovest thy mother. tl^t Ii'ebt eitve 9)?iittev ye love your mother. (©ie tt'eben ^^re Wlntkx you love your mother. fie IkUn i^vc Wlntkv they love their mother. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF INDICATIVE OF ^affCtt, tO haue. bu ^af^, ^attefi er (fxe, e^) ^at, ^atte wix 1)abin, fatten i^x ^aBt, hattet fte (®ie) t>Cibin, ^aiten ber ^atfcr, the emperor ber 3üngfirtg, the young-man ber 3;cppic^, the carpet ber 2;ifc(), the table ber ©tu^t, the chair ber £)^eim, the imcle bie ©tunbe, the hour OBJECT. SUBJECT. ASSERTION (Verb). OBJECT. ben 3;tfd; / have, had the table btefe U^r thoti hast, hadst this ivatch biefcö ©elb he (she, if) has, had this money mand;e gruc^t w'e have, had many -a fruit jcneö ?D?efTer ye have, had that knife iebe Slume they (you) have, had every flower WORDS. belO^n^en, to reward bie ©tabt, the toivn gel;0r^-en (with dative), to obey bie U^r, the luatch ober, or bie grU(|)t, the fruit auc|), also (even) baä @e(b, the money tver? who? bai^ papier, thepxiper feraö, well-behaved baö 2)?effer, the knife unartig, ?ja2<rince ber i^nabe, the boy bie (Sonne, the sun bie Srbe, the earth WORDS. wägten, to choose yx\)liX\, to count jetgen, to show reifen, to travel tok'^ how? lange, long Wonn? when? bie Siebe, the love iaß Äleib, the dress basJ -^emb, the shirt ba^ (Si fen, the iron baö |)eft, the copy -hook baö ^inbtein, the little child baö Sffen, the dinner Future : @r Wirb ben SWann ni^t I;otcn. He ivill not fetch the man. Exercise. 1. His father became an emperor. {Norn.) 3. Their mother was very beautiful. 5. Where will you buy this copy-book ? 7. Which [C. a. 2.] is her peu ? 9. Was he not your father ? {Nom. ) B 2. You choose your dress. 4. She will become my daughter. 6. How long was he well-behaved ? 8. Will they not choose a king ? {A cc. ) 10. How hai^py he was ! lO German Grammar Lesson 6. 16. The " Compound Tenses " are formed in German, as in English, by means of auxiliaries and the Past Participle of the Verb. This Past Participle is however (unless there be an Infinitive also in the sentence) always placed last in the sentence. 17. Regular verbs form their Past Participle thus : Put ge ♦ ♦ before the Verb, and replace the final — en by —i, as : (oben, to jpraise; i^tXi^ht, praised. 18. If the Infinitive of a verb begins with an unaccented inseparable prefix (see 19) no ge ♦ . is placed before it for the Past Participle. 19. All prefixes are capable of being separated from their root, except only : be ♦ . , 9^ • ♦ emp ♦ * , ent ♦ ♦ , er . « , »ev ♦ ♦ ♦ , jer ♦ ♦ , l;tntev .., mtf ♦ * , yott ♦ ♦ , ivibev » * ♦ (These ought to be learnt by heart.) 20. In speaking of completed actions of recent date, the Germans, like the French, use the Perfect in preference to the English Imperfect. EXAMPLES ON THE COMPOUND TENSES. 1. Serfcen ®ic ba6 ©elb brausen V 2. 5Rein, ic^ werbe eö nic^t braitd;en. 3. Set f;at bicfcs? Sanb entbedf^ 4. !t)iefcr S)?ann ^ai eö m6)i entbedt. 5. f)at er ©träfe »etbtent? S'Jetn, 6. SerijlÄöntg? So tfi ber @raf? 7. S)er ®raf mirb ntc(;t I;ier fein. 8. Sirb ber @oI;n fleißig werben? 9. 9lein, er ifi fe^r unartig. 10. fiatte er @elb? Sr t;at feinet gehabt. 1. Will you ivanb the money ? 2. No, I (will) shall ngt want it. 3. Who discovered this land ? 4. This man has not discovered it. 5. Did he deserve punishment ? No. 6. Who is king ? Where is the count ? 7. The count will not be here. 8. Will the son become diligent ? 9. No, he is very naughty. 10. Had he money ? He had none. ber ®raf, the count bie 33etot;nung, the reward bie ©träfe, the ^punishment baö Seben, the life baö Sanb, the land baö ©c()af, the sheep WORDS. t» erb i en en, to deserve entbecfen, to discover brauchen, to tise, to luant no^) nic(;t (inseparable) not yet wer? %oho? wo? where? ober, or ^ier, Aerc bort, there bciö @e(b, the money ba^ gräulein, the young lady baö Seuer, theßre Exercise. 1. Who has deserved (a) punishment? 3. Where is the count ? He is not yet here. 5. No, he had not used it yet. 7. Who is king? He is not yet king. 9. Has the man sought his sheep ? 2. This child deserved a reward. 4. Had our father used the money ? 6. Have you discovered the land ? 8. Where will you use the money ? 10. He will seek it here and there. German Graimnar. II ADDITIONAL EXERCISES. {On revising the work of the First Term.) 1. He says, they fetch the flower. 3. The mother seeks a rose. 5. The child says, they buy a pea. 7. The girl and the mother say it. 9. We biiy the pen and a flower. On Lesson 1. 2. We say, she buys the pen. 4. They fetch a glass and a flower. 6. The mother and the child say it. 8. We praise the school and the town. 10. The mother says, they seek the girl. On Lesson 2. 1 . We hear, you love the horse. 3. Did the child seek the pen ? Yes. 5. The king loved the town. 7. Did the daughter seek the child ? No. 9. He said very much. 2. Do you hear the child ? Yes, father. 4. Did he praise the pupil ? No. 6. The teacher bought the paper. 8. We loved the town much. 10. Did you buy the picture ? No, mother. On Lesson 3, and Reference-Page C. 1. Thou hast thy pen there. 3. We have our pencil here. 5. Have ye your money ? No. 7. We had no watch. 9. The man loved his child much. 2. Had you your dog ? Yes. 4, Many a town has much money. 6. That king had no son. 8. Has this yoiing man no father ? 10. Which emperor has this ? This. On Lesson 4. 1. My son is not very tall. 3. Our street was not clean. 5. What sort of king is this king? 7. I have a dress. What sort ? (C. h. 2. ) 9. He is becoming a man. (Nom. ) 2. My teacher is very good. 4. Are these rooms beautiful ? 6. He is very small, but is very well-behaved. 8. Does she become poor ? 10. They are becoming rich and not poor. 1. Will the king buy this horse ? 3. He became very rich. 5. Did you become his scholar ? 7. The man will become poor. 9. When will they fetch this book ? On Lesson 5. 2. The daughter was very well-behaved. 4. My son was my teacher. 6. It was here or there. 8. Will the father become a teacher ? 10. What sort of mau was this king ? On Lesson 6. 1. The pupil has deserved a reward. 3. Who has fetched my son ? This man. 5. Had they discovered their money. 7. You will believe this or not. 9. Will they iise their money, there ? 2, We shall punish this man. 4. Here was the count, and not there. 6. Where will the emperor be ? Here. 8. The king has not yet used his money. 10. Will he deserve punishment ? 12 Gei'man Grammar. DICTIONARY of Words. {For the Exercises in the First and Second a, an, ein (C. h.) and, unt) to ask, fragen to be, fein beautiful, f^ön to become, ivcrbcn the book, bciö 35u^ but, ahn to buy, faufen the child, baö Äinb to choose, Ivä^Cen clean, rein the coat, ber 9tO(f «Ae copy-book, baö §eft tte coim«, ber @raf <Äe daughter, bte SOC^ter «0 deserw, i) erbten en bie Dame <7«e land, baö Sanb iSAe ^e^ej-, ber Srtef long, lange io love, tiebcn «Äe ?na?i, ber 9J?ann many-a, ntancf)er (C. rt.) mine, meiner (0. &. 2) the money, baö ®etb <7ie mother, bie SJZutter ?72?«c/i (intensity), fet;r much (quantity), üiet m^/, mein (C. b. i) ?io (before Noun), fein (C. b. 1 no (answei's), nein not, nic^t (Rule 11) to obey, ge^Or^en (Dative) old, alt or. Ober our, unfer (C. &. i) ours, unfercr (C. b. 2) the paper, baö Rapier the pen, bie geber the pencil, ber 33(eipift the picture, baö SSitb p>oor, arm to praise, toten to punish, flrafen erlaufen the sheep, baö ®d;af the son, ber ®ot;n ivhat sort of? Saö für ein . . . (C. 5.) the Street, bie ©trafic the table, ber 2;if^ tall, grop i^ (C- *• 1) yours, euerer, 3t;'cer (C. b. 2) German Grammar. 13 CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES.— First Term. {To he learnt in small portions over and over again.) 1. ©Uten 5!??orgen, mein |)erv. 2. 3^ iDünfcfie 3^nen guten Joij. 3. Seftnben @ie fi4) tec^t Jvo|)t ? 4. 3a, tcf) banfe, ic^ btu immer wo^t. 5. Unt) wie gei;t eö 3^ter grau 5OTuttet? 6. ©anfe, fi'e if} etivaö beffer ^eute. 7. Serben ®ie in bie ®tabt ge^cn? 8. 3a/ ic^ fomme {;cute in bie ®tabt. 9. Sir ivottcn in baö 3;^eatcr ge^cn. 10. Siefen 2(benb gc^en ivir in baö donjert. 11. Sirb 3^re ©c^njefler mit una fommen 'i 12. 9?ein, jtc muf ju §)aufe Bleiben. 13. 3^ f>tttc ®ie, geben @ie i^r ein ©t((et. 14. 3?ie(en S^anf, \^ S);)crbe eö gern t^un. 15. f)aben @ie meinen ©ruber gefe^enV 16. ^cm ©inn. 2. Sie Saft ifi fü^t unb eö bunfelt Unb ru^ig fliegt ber 9li;ein ; ©er ©ijjfet beö Sergeö funfett 3m 2tbenbfonnenf4)ein. 3. ©le f^önfie Jungfrau it|et ©ort oben tvunberbar; 3^r golbneö @efd)mcibe btiget ; ®tc fcimmt if;r gotbeneö |)aar. 4. ®{e fämmt eö mit gotbenem Äamme, Unb fingt ein Sieb babei ; ©aö f;at eine iininbcrfame ©eivattige 2)?eIobei. 5. ©en ©Ziffer im Meinen ©c^iffe (Ergreift eö mit witbem 2Bef; ; @r fdfiant nicf;t bie getfenriffe, @r f^aut nur hinauf in bie ^öl/. 6. 3(|) glaube, bie Seüen öerfc|)tingen 2lm ©nbe ©Ziffer unb Äa^n ; Unb baö I;at mit if;rem ©ingen ©ie Soretei getrau. 1. 1 knoio not, what it can mean, That I am so sad ; A legend of olden times Will not leave my mind {keeps haunting). 2. TJie air is cool and it is getting dark. And quietly the Rhine is floiving ; The summit of the mountain sparkles In the evening suiishine. 3. The most heaideous maiden is sitting Up there wonderful [to behold) ; Her golden ornaments glisten ; She is combing her golden hair. 4. She is combing it with (a) golden comb ; And is singing a song withal, Which has a ivondrous Potverful melody. 5. The boatman in the little boat. It seizes \vith a wild looe ; He looks not at the rocky reefs, He looks only up on high. 6. / believe the waves will swalloio In the e7icl the boatman and (his) boat ; And this has with her singing The Liüiine (naiad) done. Note, — The above is one of the best-known German poems, and one of the most favourite popular songs. The Lurline rock, near Bingen and Mayence on the Rhine, overlooks some rather dangerous rapids in the stream, and the many accidents there formei'ly were ascribed j)opularly to a naiad, sitting on that rock combing her hair, and drawing the attention of boatmen from their boats by her singing. SECOND TE RM A FEW of the Conversational Sentences on pages 13 and 34, as well as a few of the words in the Dictionary on page 12, should form an integral part of the work set for every lesson during this term. The little poems on page 35 should also gradually be learnt by heart. It is only by constant repetition of the same few words or sentences, that they become thoroughly fixed in the memory, and in Modern languages such viva voce practice is absolutely indispensable. For the order of words in the Exercises for translation consult EeferencePage J at the end of this term (page 38). i6 German Grammar Lesson 7. 21. Sentences beginning with Interrogative Pronouns, as : SBev? wlio'i SBas? ?r/irt^.? etc., invert the order of Subject and Assertion ; so also do sentences beginning with adverbs, as, ^ter ift eV/ Here lie is. 22. The ImiDerative has no third person, properly speaking ; if a third person is com- manded (indirectly), Ave have, as in English, to use auxiliaries, I(lfl"en, to let, with Accusative of the person commanded, or fotten, shall — Infinitive at end of sentence. In addressing a command to a person or persons politely, use invariably the verb (Infinitive) itself, with (StC, yoii, added, as, SBä^Ien ©ie ! Choose ! Imperative. All regular Vex'ljs. 2d. f)Ote ! Fetch (thou) ! fdx foü fll(l;en ! ffe shall seek : 3d ISa^t i^n tansen ! Let him dance: 1st. @e^orc|)en n>ir ! Let m obey .' J©Ud;et! Seele [ije]! \®uc^cn ®ie! Seeh! fBii folten ta^en I They shall laugh . ISapt fie la^cn I Let them laugh ! 2d. fein, to be, ®ei! Be {thou)! /-(Sr foil fein! He shall he! l?aft tl;n fein ! Let him he! 1st. ©eien n?ir ! Let us he ! 2^r©eii)! Be {ye)! \®eien ©ie! Be! r®ic fotfen fein ! They shall he . ISafJt fie fein ! Let them he ! Examples on the Imperative. 1. fWein Äinb, frage ben Se:^rer! 2. ©ovi ifl Co; fagen ®ie eö fccr grau ! 3. 25er Äönig foü fein Sanb tieben ! 4. Sa{5t ben Sater tt)ä^ten ! 5. ^ören ®ie ben f)unb ! 1. My child, ask (thou) the teacher! 2. There it is ; tell it to the woman ! 3. The king shall love his land! 4. Let the father choose! 5. Hear (listen to) the dog. Exercise. [^Notice. — For the words to be used in these Exercises see page 12 in the First Term.] 1. Let us obey the teacher. (Dative.) 3. Be (ye) well-behaved ! 5. Seek the child ! Here is the book. 7. Let them be happy ! They are good. 9. Where is my sou ? Let him be here. 2. Punish that dog ! 4. Let the woman choose the dress ! 6. What did he say ? Let him say ! 8. Use your mouey ! Where is it 1 10. Do not use this book, my son. \_Notice. — Put the Infinitive last in the sentence, except in the Imperative with @te.] German Grammar. 17 GENERAL RULES about the Declension of German Substantives. German nouns may be said to be either n:m'k or strong as to tlieir declension : weak, if the Genitive Singular ends in -ax or does not alter from the Nominative ; strong, if the Genitive Singular ends in ==6. Grammarians differ as to the number of Declensions ; here, the Nouns are treated simply according to gender, number of syllables, and termination. CHANGES IN THE SINGULAR. [See Ref.-Page E.] I. Masculine Nouns : J Nominatives in «e (and ten monosyllables) »take =n (or »en) for Accusative, Genitive, and I Foreign words not in -at, -an, -afi, -r ) Dative. (h) All other masculine Nouns take «s? for Genitive, and do not change for Accusative and Dative. II. Feminine Nouns never change at all in the Singular. III. Neuter Nouns, all (except baä l^erj) take *Ö for Genitive, and do not change for Accusative and Dative. CHANGES IN THE PLURAL. [See Ref.-Page D.] Notice carefully : Accusative, Genitive, and Dative Plural are always like the Nominative Plural, but the Dative Plural must in every noun end in sji. (This m has to be added, if the other cases have not already the termination «Jl.) L Masculine Nouns : A. Monosyllables have Plural : modify root-vowel and take ?e. B. Dissyllables and Polysyllables : (a) Nominative Singular ending in «ct, -tn, 'iX have Plural: modify root-vowel without other change. ! Nominative Singular ending in =ig, 4ä), =at, 4x\Q •. Foreign words ending in -at, 'an, -afr -X (not *cr) >- Plural : modify root- vowel and add =e. Monosyllables with prefix SSe«, @e» ^ r Nominative Singular ending in «e [see Singular (a)] -v , X ) Tj, • 1 , T ■ ^r ^., ^a ^ f PZwrö^.- do M0< modify root-vowel, but take (c) < Foreign words not ending m «al, =an, =a|l, 'X y j > ^ ' Foreign words ending in -üX -' > ' * II. Feminine Nouns have Plural : do not modify root- vowel, but take »(e)n. III. Neuter Nouns : A. Monosyllables have Plural: modify root- vowel and take >(x. B . Dissyllables and Polysyllables : (a) Nominative Singular ending in «er, =et -en, *^en, 4cin have no change for Plural. (b) Nominative Singular not ending in »er, =et, =en, =c|)en, 4etn have Plural : do not modify root-vowel, but take «e. Notes. 1. Compound nouns change only their last component, according to its own i-ule. 2. All nouns which take =er for Plural modify their vowel. 3. The only vowels which can modify are : a (into ä), (into 0), u (into Ü), au (into äü). C Gerinan Grammar. Reference-Page D. {a). Formation of Nominative PLURAL OF NOUNS from the Nominative Singular. General Rules : L When seeking to form the Phiral of any Noun, answer these three questions : a. What gender is the Noun ? h. How many syllables has it ? c. What termination has it 1 Then, if the noun is not given among the exceptions in its class, to which it belongs in virtue of the answers to the above questions, it will follow the Rule. 2. By — — is meant, a, 0, \\, OU of the singular become n, Ö, Ü, alt in the plural. 3. A vowel already modified in the Singular remains so for the Plural ; e, t, et, te, eit, cannot modify. 4. In compound nouns, the last component only changes for the Plural according to its own class. MASCULINE NOUNS. A. Monosyllables. RULE: Plural: -^ — e; as: ber ®ot)n, ain Plural: 1! er '5 as : I ber ?et{», the body ber 9J?ann, jJ/te ma« ber ^DJann, the man, bie 93?äniier. I ber Ort, the p)lace I I ber 9?anb, easant 1 ber 9}?uö!et, ^Ae muscle ! Singulars in ^ig, ^i(|, -at, =ing. Foreign words in =at, *an, aft, -On, -r (not =0r). Monosyllables with i^refix 23 e-, @e*. Exceptions : Plural : ber (Il;ara!ter, te 2(ngfl, the anxiety tie 95anf, 6'°'*^ baö £)^r, «Ae ear I baö |)emb, ^Ae shirt B. Dissyllables and Polysyllables. (a.) Singulars ending in the derivative suffixes, --tx, --tl, \ RULE: Plural: [no change], as: «en, *c^eii, -iein. ( baö Ufer, the shore, bie Ufer. Except : baö ^tofier, the convent, bie ^löfler. (b.) Singulars not ending in the derivative suffixes, »er, ("RULE: Plural: c; as: =el, --en, 4en, 4ciiu 1 baö MüaU, the metal, bie SJZetaltc. Exceptions : 1. Plural: —^ — er; as : brtö B^itai, the hospital, bie ©pitciler. baö ©entac^, the apartment iaß ©emiit, the temper baö ©efc^Iec^t, the race, sex 2. Plural: baö %UQe, the eye baö @eftd;t, the face baö ©efpenfi, the ghost baö ©Clüanb, the garment baö Steßiment, vet, tkejeiuel, bie 3nit)elen. ba^ (Snbe, cr ®tul;l, the chair ber |)a^n, the cock ber S'iadjbar, the neighbour ber 9?ante, the name bcr %\iax, the altar ber ilud;cn, the cake ber SJZorgen, the momimj ber S:ag, the day ber Stffe, the monkey ber Slbeilb, the evening ber |)aufe, the heap bcr Sauer, the peasant ber Ääftg, the cage ber |)unb, the dog ber ^err, the gentleman ber 2tf}, the branch ber ^rofeffor, the professor ber ^rt'nj, the prince bcr SSatb, the forest Feminine Nouns. Form the Plural of bte U^r, the watch. In answer to the above questions, Ave find it is among the Feminine Nouns, and not among the exceptions, therefore the Plural is according to the General Eule there : bte U^iven, Exercise. Write out the Nominative Plural, according to the answers in each case, of^ bie 5D?aUÖ, the mouse bte 9ta(|)t, the night bie 23urg, the castle bte S^ivefler, the sister bie ©tabt, the town bie (5rjäI;Iung,t,) {te (®ie) ^WÖ^^tn baö Äinb, (they believe,) they (you) seek the child i^ fei reic^, / am rich bu fci'Cft ^ter, thou art here er fei bort, he is there tt)ir fei=cn gut, lue are good i^r fct=et arm, ye are poor fie fei'cn brau, they are good Examples on the Present Subjunctive. 1. (Sagt man, \6) ^abe baö |)auö ge!auft? 2. 9iein, man fagt, ®ie «werben eö faufen. 3. ©tauben ®ie, ber (53raf fei bort ? 4. 3«, i^ |)offe, er n^erbe bort fein. 5. ^ofFfl bu, bu werbeft baö S5u^ H^en? 6. 3c^ gtaube, \^ ivcrbe eö ni^t brauc()en. 7. Sirjl bu fagen, er fei ni^t retc|)? 8. 3«/ ic!^ fage, er fei arm aber braö. 9. (Sr fagt, bu Itebefl biefen SWann, 10. 3fl/ unb i(^ iDerbe bem 3)?ann glauben. 1. Z)o they say, I have bought the house? 2. No, they say, you xoill buy it. 3. Do you believe, the count is there ? 4. Yes, I hope, he ivill be there. 5. Dost thou hope, thou loilt have the booh ? 6. / believe, I shall not want it, 7. Will you say, he is not rich ? 8. Yes, I say, he is poor but well-behaved. 9. He says, you love this man. 10. Yes, and I shall believe the man (Dat. ). Exercise. 1. They say, you believe this man. 3. No, he believes, they are not poor. 5. They hope, he will be here or there. 7. They will say, I am not well-behaved. 9. Which wine have they bought ? 2. WiU he say, they are very poor ? 4. Where wil) the count be ? 6. Do you hope, you will be rich ? Yes. 8. Do not believe the king will be here. 10. I believe, they have bought no wine. 2 2 German Gravimar Reference-Page E. The Declension of German Nouns. I. SINGULAR. I. Masculine Nouns: (A.) The following take =ett (or m) for Accusative, Genitive and Dative (see D. B. c.) 1. All Masculine Nominatives in =e, as : bet Äliabc, the. hoy : ben, beö, beut Knaben. 2. The following ten monosyllables, which were once dissyllables, and ended in «e : ber Seit/ the hear ber S^rtfi, the Christian ber gürfl, the duke, earl ber ©raf, tlie count ber ^elb, the hero ber f)err, the gevtleman ber 9^avr, the fool ber 3Wenf^, /Ae human be inj ber ^rtnj, the prince ber Sor, tariaö, 5D?arienö, Mary's I^War ber ben beö max ber SBauer, thejJeasant baö §)anö, <Äe Aowse ber 2)?enf(i^, ^Ae human being bie Stante, offten, fie feten (or it)ären) reic^, toe hoped they were rich. tc^ gtaubte, er fei (not n)äre) pter, / thought he was heie. 29. But if an action is referred to as distinctly completed and past, the German idiom requires the Perfect Subjunctive in the oblique clause (see Rule 20, lesson 6) : , \M\X ^orten, er |)abe baö ^fert) i?erfauft, ive heard, he sold the horse. IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. In all regular verbs, the Imperfect Subjunctive is the same in form as the Imperfect Indicative, but the two tenses cli-£fer in all irregular Verbs, and in all auxiliaries. SWail fagte, they said: (one said :) i^ laufte eö, / bought it bit lobteft fie, thou praisedst her er ^örte baö, he heard that \X)h Itebtcit ieneö, we loved that Vc)X tt)ä{;ttct biefeö, ye chose this fte (©ie) fudjtcn eö, they [you) sought it Xix waxen, we were il;r Xoäxtt, ye ivere fte waxen, they were i^ WüXie, I became bit tt)ürbcft,er) a season A. 2 2lbenb, evening masc. (bcr) part of a day A. 2. ©Ieid;^eit, equality fern. (bie) Derivative in s^ett . B. 4 @Olt>, gold nexit. (baö) a metal C. 3 3??tt»V0^, Wednesday masc. (bet) a day of the week . A. 2 @taf;i, steel masc. (ber) exception to metals . C. 3 ©oune, sun fem. (tie) Dissyllable, inanimate, in «c B. 2 ^Ration, nation fem. (t)te) Foreign word, in «ion B. 5. grältlein, young lady neut. (baö) diminutive . C. 2, SGSinter, tvinter masc. (bcr) a season A. 2. Exercise. Give Gender and Reasons for Gender, of- @raf)en, ditch (Sonntag, Sunday @c()ön^e it, beauty seiger, ««g^er faring, herring SBenn, ^7 ®d;Ia^t, hattle 3Säter4)en, ^««^e /a^Aer Slnfunft, arrival 3:anjen, dancing (Si fen, iron Alee, clover ©C^ttJetJ, Switzerland (Eroberung, conquest ©petting, sparroio 9^ac|»t, ?%Ä(; ^{)ilofOp^ie, philosophy ©pielerei, plaything ©arten, garden 9l^etorif, rhetoric ©iamant, diamond Slau, 6?«e ©ebutb, patience Using Reference-Pages D. ani E. with F. Give Gender, Genitive Singular, and Nominative Plural of— grau, woman Sruber, brother ©traße, street 2;ag, day grciulein, yoxmg lady Gender. bie, F. B. 1. ber, F. A. ]. bie, F. B. 2. ber, F. A. 2. bao, F. c. 2. Genitive Singidar. ber grau, E. b. beö Sruberö, E. a. b. ber ©traf5e, E. b. beö Sagcö, E. a. b. beö gräuleinö, E. c. Nominative Plural. bie grauen, D. (b) Femin. General Rule, bie 23rüber, D. (a) B. (a) Rule, bie ©trafen, D. (b) Femin. General Rule, bie Stage, D. (a) A. exception 1. bie grautein, D. (b) Neuter, B. (a) Rule. Exercise (using Reference-Pages D., E. and F.). Give Gender, Genitive Singular and Nominative Plural, as above, of — ^lnm(, flotver Ääfig, cage Pointer, winter 2(uge eije iDiantant (foreign) diamond ©onne, sun ©arten, garden 9?ac|)t, night 3??äbcf;en, girl ©C|)la^t, battle 355 eib, woman ^akx, father S)?onat, mo7ith 9tofe, rose §:mU, boy £)örfci;en, little village German Grammar. 27 Lesson 10. 30. Many Verbs are conjugated in their Compound Tenses with fetll, to he, instead of |>a6en, to have. Past Participles, when used as adjectives, take fetll as their auxiliary, as : e^ tft gefaufty it is bought. 31. The Past Participle of fetn, to he, is getticfen^ hee7i, and of wevbeu, to hecome, geftiocben [or tttot^m, when used in connection with another Verb], as : ev tft ßut ßettJefen, he has been good; ev tft ein ®vaf geivovben, he has hecome a count ; eö tft gefauft Hiorbcn, it has been (become) bought. Kemember to place the Past Participle last. 32. The English "to be" must be rendered by tucvbctt/ to become, in the Passive voice •; i.e. when an agent may be thought of, who did the action suffered by the subject, as : baö Ätnb tft ge^oU iUOtbcn, the child has been fetched ; somebody {the agent) has fetched the child. Examples of Compound Tenses of fetn and ivevben. (Notice the English to have must here always be rendered by fein, to he.) 1. 3Wetn 33ater ift {;icr flciwcfcn. 1. My father has been here, [is here been]. 2. We had been in London, [were . . . been]. 3. She had become very rich, [was . . . become]. 4. This hook has been hovght. [is bought become]. 5. The hoy had been jntnished. [was punished become], 6. His son has become a father. (Nominative). 7. He is praised and not punished. (Passive). 8. It is sold ; it is {being) sold (by somebody). 2. 2Sir ivaven in Soubon gcttiefen. 3. ®ie mat fcf;r rct(|) jjcitjorbcn. 4. ©icfeö Sucl tft gefauft JtJovbcn. 5. 2)er Änabe tone geflraft twovbcn. 6. ©ein @of;n ift ein 5?ater gctoorben. 7. dx toivb getobt itnt» nicf;t gef^raft. 8. (fg ift üerfauft, eö toirb »erfauft. The Conditional Simple of all German Verbs is formed by using the Imperfect Subjunctive of ivevben (see Lesson 9), and adding to it the Infinitive of the Verb. As in the Future Simple, this Infinitive must stand at the end of the sentence. Examples. id) tviirbe e6 nic^t faufen, «Dcnn, etc. i shoidd not buy it, if, etc. Siirben ®ie ben ^Wann loben, lüenn, etc. Should you praise the man, if, etc. Exercise. 1. That teacher has been ovir teacher. 3. The child had been (become) praised. 5. Who bought the horse ? It is sold (adj.). 7. Do you use this book ? or this pen ? 9. The king would have bought it, if, etc. 2. You had been very well-behaved. 4. He has become my pupil. 6. The pencil has been used. 8. They have not yet been discovered. 10. Would you hear the pupil, if, etc. 28 German Grammar Reference-Page G. On the Adjective. Adjectives after "to be" or "to become" never change at all (see Eule 10, Lesson 4), but all adjectives, as well as Present and Past Participles used adjectively, have changes when they stand as attributes before a noun, or are used as nouns themselves. These changes depend on the article or determinative word before the adjective. We have three forms : FIRST FORM. The adjective preceded by one of the '■'■Definite Äriicie Group" (See Reference-Page C) fcer, btefer, jener, jeber, mancher, ivelcl;cr? Nom. Ace. Gen. Dat. masc. Sing. ber gut^e ben gittert beö gutcrt bem gut=ett fern. Sing. bie gut'C ber gut-ctt ber gut^cn neut. Sing. baö gut-c beö gut=^cn bem gut^cn Sc heme for First Form. All Plurals. ■ N. m. s. =e f.s. n. s. Phiral, bie gitf^cn .c A. D. *en -en ber gut-en ben g«t»en vaö für ein ; mein, bein, fein, (il;r), unfer, euer, iijx (3!)r) ; Nom. Acc. Gen. Dat. masc. Sing. betn gut-ct bctnen gut-en beineö gut^cn beincm gut^c« fem. Sing. beine gut--c betner gut-c« beincr gut-'c« 7ieuf. Sing. betn gut'cS beinei? guten beinern gut=cn All Plurals. beine gut^en betner gut-en beinen gut e« Sehen lefor Second Form. N. m, s. «er n. s. «eö Plural. =en »en »en A. G. D. «en «en «en «en «en =en »en i\ro<2ce.— Nom. Sing, in «er, «e, «eö; all other forms in «en, except fem, and neut. sing. Acc. by 2, Lesson 1 THIRD FORM. The adjective not preceded by any determinative of the Definite or Indefinite Article groups, or preceded by a definite or indefinite numeral [without one of the words of the "Definite " or "Indefinite " article groups before them], as: ^e|)n, te7i, etc.; einige, several; mei;rere, several; i)iefe, many; üiel, much; ivenige, /e;o; tDCnig, little ; etn^ai?, something. This form is used also in the Vocative ( = Nominative). Notice. — These terminations are those of the '^Definite Article group," see Reference- Page C, except in the Genitive Singular, masculine and neutei*, where «eu displaces «CO for the sake of euphony. masc. Sing. fem. Sing. neut. Sing. All Plurals. Nom. Acc. gut -er gut«cn 1 gut-e gut«cö gut«c Gen. gut'cn gut-et- gut«ett gutter Dat. gutem gnt'ec gut=cnt gut=eH German Grammar 29 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page G. N.B.—TWq declension of the adjective does not in any way influence that of the Determinative nor that of tlie Substantive. First Form.— Decline 0«, old, with bet . . 35ater; biefe . . grau; wcl^eö . . 35uc|)? Singular (masc.) N. ber atte 35ater, ~i ^, 77 ^ „ U/ie old fatlier A. ben attc II i^ater, j G. beö alten 3?aterÖ, the old father's D. bent attcn 3Satcr, ^0 «Ae old father Plural. . Vbte atten 58ater, «Ae old fathers G. ber attcn 33äter, 0/ //^e old fathers D. ben atten Siätern, ^0 the old fathers Singular (fern.) ibiefe altc %Xet^eö attc Suet;? u-Mch old book? m\ä)t^ attcn Suc^eÖ? of which old hoolc ? iwelc^em attcn S5ucl;e '? to ivhlch old book ? Plural. m^i attcn 93üct;erV which old books? mlä)n alien Sucker ? of which old books'; iüetd)en atten S3 üd)ern ? to ivhich old books i Exercise.— Declme gtürftic^, hapjnj ; with biefer . . Warn] jebe . . 3J?utter (of course no plural), and feneö . . Sanb; also i>va\>, loell-behaved ; with ml(^tx . . ^nabe'? Second Form.— Decline neu, new, with fein . . |)ut; feine . . geber; Sao für ein . . Sanb? [his neiv hat Singular (masc. ) N. fein neuer §ut, "i A. feinen neuen §5ut, /' G. feineö neuen §uteö, ofhisneiuhat D. feinem neuen f)ute, to his new hat Plural. N.-k vfeine neuen SÜte, his new hats G. feiner neuen f)üte, of his neio hats D. feinen neuen |5üten, to his new hats Singular (fem.) feine neue geber, no new pen feiner neuen geber, of no new pen feiner neuen geber, to no new pe?i Plural. 2Baö für neue Sauber ? What sort of new lands ? [Note. Sao für ein . . drops ein in the Plural, tl fore the adjective changes according to the T i^oj-m in Plural.] ^a;e>-cto'e.— Decline arm, 2^oor, with Saö für ein . . ©raf?; meine . . 3;üc^ter; 3^t . . ^inb: also grof, tall, with ein . . ■^unb. (No plural.) Plural. feine neuen gebern, no neiü pens feiner neuen gebern, of no new pens feinen neuen gebern, to no neiopens Singular (neuter). Saö für ein neues Sanb? What sort of new land Saö für eineö neuen Sanbeö v Of what sert of new h Saö für einem neuen Sanbe? To what sort of new U Third Form.— Decline fd)tec^t, with Sein, v7%r ; also rei^, rich, with Sonig (m.), and with je^U . . ©täbte (no sing.). German Grammar. Sentences and Exercises on the use of the Adjective as an Attributive (Ref.-Page G.). (Learn these Model Sentences carefully, and imitate them.) FIRST FORM. 1. The beautiful daughters of the dear mother. 2. Each good child loves its father. 3. Which beaidifid letter will you fetch? 4. The rich count has many-a large village. 5. He has not heard this poor man. 1. Sie fcf;önen 2:ö^ter bet lieben a3?utter. 2. Sebcö gute Äint) liebt feinen 35ater. 3. S05et(|)en frönen Srief ttjerben ©ie ^olen ? 4. 2)er re{ö;e @raf f)at man^eö grof e S)orf. 5. (5r I;at biefen armen 3Wann ni^t gehört. Exercise on the First Form. 1. Which happy boys were there ? These. 3. Will you seek those beautiful letters. 5. Every j)oor man will be here. 7. Who has heard that good young-man ? 9. Mauy-a happy child was there. 2. I have not fetched every large book. 4. Where were these rich counts ? There. 6. Do you use this beautiful knife ? No. 8. They bought these large pictures here. 10. These well-behaved children are poor. 1. My old dog is sold. 2. Have you heard our good pupil ? 3. We have not chosen your beautiful Tcnife 4. Wliat a long letter you have ! 5. Do not (thou) buy any large books ! SECOND FORM. 1. SD?ein alter §unb ifl öerfauft. 2. .Jjaben ®ie unferen guten ©d;ü(er gehört. 3. Sir ^aben ^\)x fd;öneö 3)?effer nic^t gewählt. 4. 2Öaö für einen langen ©rief ®ie i^aben ! 5. .Kaufe feine grof en Sucher ! Exercise on the Second Form. 1 . What a beautiful horse he has ! 3. Have you chosen our happy boy ? 5. Where is my poor, old dog ? Not here. 7. Did you sell your large lands ? No. 9. He loved a poor but happy girl. 2. We have not heard your good brother. 4. No, we have chosen his poor child. 6. What sort of an old knife have you ? 8. They love their good old house much. 10. We have no rich boys here, not one. 1. Do you use much good money ? Yes. 2. The men had little clear xvme. 3. We fetched ten big, but poor men. 4. You have several good, old boobs. 5. My father said : Poor child, listen ! THIRD FORM. 1. Srauc()en ®ie öiet guteö ©elbV 3«. 2. ©ie 3)?änner fatten ivenig reinen 23ein. 3. Sir |)otten je^n grof e, aber arme S'Zänner. 4. ®ie ^aben mef;rerc gute, aXi^ Sucker. 5. SJZein 25ater fagte ; Slrmeö Äinb, ^örc ! 1. I say it to ten poor, old men. 3. Rich man, hear poor children ! 5. Well-behaved pupils have clean books. 7. Do you love good old wine ? 9. Mi^ch old wine is not very good. Exercise on the Third Form. 2. Little good wine, but much bad. 4. They had something good there. 6. Several old brothers of our boys are here. 8. Poor child, choose this large book ! 10. He deserves something beautiful. Germaji Grammai' 31 Lesson 11. 33. Instead of the Conditional Simple, we often use in German the Imperfect Subjunctive, as in English. For example : Iwmld he rich, if, etc. 3cf; ivuvte vet(^ fetit, or, ^d) ivcive vet'd;, wenn, etc. He u-ould have the hool', if, etc. C?i' it)üvl)e baö 53u(f) |)akn, or, ev ptte baö S3ucf), wenn, etc. 34. The Present Participle of all German verbs is formed by adding #ent) to the root, as : ^ab*en, to have; ^ahftn'ti, having ; failfen, to buy ; fauf*ent), huying. It is, hoAvever, seldom used as a verb. 35. Both the Present Participle and the Past Participle may be used as adjectives ; when thus standing before a noun, they conform to the rules given in Reference-Page G., as : baö gefauftc 33u^, the bought book ; ein tiebenbcr greunb, a loving friend. 36. The Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive are formed as in English, by using the Present and Imperfect Subjunctive of the auxiliary with the Past Participle of the Verb. Remember that this Past Participle must come last in the sentence [see 1 6] ; and also be careful to remember that fein, to be, and Werben, to become, as well as many other verbs, take feilt, to be, for their auxiliary, though they may have in English the auxiliary to have. Examples on the Perfect 1. 3)?an fagte, ic^ ijättc baö fc^^öne ^ferb gelauft. 2. ®ie hofften, bu luärcft reid) getworben. 3. 3c^ glaube, ev fei ein reti^er @raf getwcfcn. 4. ©tauben ®ie, et »väre bort gcivefen, wenn, etc. 5. Sv fagt, er ^nftc baö geliebte ^inb gefut^t. 6. Sir I;ofTen, ®ie tuetiicn bicfeö glawtien. 7. @agt man, er fei arnt gehjorbcn? 8. SDZan fagte, @ie toären bort getucfc«. 9. hätten ®ie baö alte ^ferb ücrfauf t, ivenn, etc. 10. asjärc baö grope Suc^ geholt 1» orb en, ttjenn, etc. a7tf? Pin/perfect Subjunctive. 1. TAe?/ sctit^j //jarf bought the beaiUi/id horse. 2. ^T/tey hoped, thou hadst become rich. 3. / believe, he has been a rich count. 4. Do you think he ivould have been there, if, etc. 5. He says, he has [25] sought the loved child. 6. We hope, you will believe this. 7. -Do they say, he has become poor ? 8. They said, you had been there. 9. Would you haue sold the old horse, if, etc. 10. Would the large book haue been fetched, if, etc. Exercise. Read up Rules 25, 31, 33 1. They say, we have been (Subj.) there. 3. The old king hopes, he will become rich. 5. This loved man has been chosen. 7. These rich men use their money here. 9. My good father says, you have been there. 2. They said, we had become happy. 4. This well-behaved child has been (is . . . become) punished. 6. Will you say, he has deserved it. 8. Do you hope they had praised the happy men. 10. They say, the poor count would have been there. 32 German Grammar. Lesson 12. 37. The Second Future and Second Conditional are formed in German, as in English, by joining to the Past Participle of the Verb, the First Future and First Conditional of the auxiliary, as : cl shall have bought it. \Thou wilt have been there. xd) wevbe e^ gefauft l)ahm ^ , ^ ^ , r r • yetc. Second Future, bu unrft bovt gewefen fem J / should have believed that. tcf> tt)ürt)e baö geglaubt ^abm ^ r .. . „ .. . ^. [etc., Second Conditional, { ^. ,,^- , ., t>u iDurbeft veiq) geworben [ein ) vThou wouldst have become rich. 38. The really conjugated Verb in these tenses is the auxiliary ^evbeu ; this auxiliary therefore is the Assertion, and all rules as to the position of the Assertion apjDly to it, and not to the Infinitives fetlt or I^aben, nor to the Past Participle of the actual verb. 39. Instead of the Second Conditional, we may use the Pluperfect Subjunctive, as : id; ivüvbe baö geglaubt ijahtn = \d) ^'^iii ba6 geglaubt» / should have believed that. bu ivuvbejl retd) geworben fein = bu wcireft retc^ geworben. Thou wouldst have become rich. 40. In every Primary or independent statement or question, containing a Past Participle and an Infinitive, the Infinitive must stand last of all in the sentence, and the Past Participle last but one. Examples. Wlaw fagt, er Jverbe ein- @raf werten. r®te mürben ben |)nnb gelauft ^aben. \®te J;ätten ben f)nnb gefauft. rSiirbe er arm geivorben fein, i»enn, etc. \2öäre er arm geivorben, ivenn, etc. rScr Änabe ivürbe geflraft ivorben fein, |2)er Änabe wäre geflraft werben. Su wirft baö @elb gebraudjt |)aben. SBirb ber 3Wann nicf;t gewäf;lt werben ? S)ie grau wirb il;r i^inb getobt ^aben. Sir werben baö nic^t gefnc^t ^aben. @r wirb bcm 23rief nic(;t geglaubt :^aben. ©ie S:oc^ter wäre gelobt worben. Exercise. 1. Will you not have sought your book ? 3. This good boy will be praised. 5. Would he not have been chosen, if . . , 7. He fetched my old book, the good boy. 9. Where was our fine, happy child ? 1. They say, he ivill become a count. 2. They [or you) looulcl have bought the dog. 3. Would he have become poor, if, etc. 4. The boy would have been (become) punished. 5. Thou ivilt have used the money. 6. Will the man not be {become) chosen ? 7. The ivoman ivill have praised her child. 8. We shall not have sought this. 9. He ivill not have believed the letter (dat.). 10. The daughter would have been praised. 2. I would have sought it, if . . . 4. He would have been punished, if . . 6. Yes, he would have been chosen, if 8. He would not have fetched it, if . . 10. It will not yet have been there. German Grammar ZZ Additional Exercises. (To be written on repeating the work of the Second Term.) On Lesson 7. 2. There is my horse ; let us sell it. 1. My boy, fetch that book there ! 3. Let the teacher {ace.) hear this child ! 5. Seek my letter (act-.), do you hear? 7. Here is your father ; he has the letter. 9. Praise this pupil ; he is well-behaved. 4. Do not use your pencil, child ! 6. What did you choose ? Choose that. 8. Let him be poor or rich, father ! 10. Let them hear their teacher ! On Lesson 8 mid Ref. -Page D. 1. We say, these boys are not well-behaved. 3. Those ladies hope, you are not poor. 5. We hope, you will buy those houses. 7. The men believe, they will choose this. 9. These pupils say, they are very happy. 2. They say, they have deserved rewards. 4. I believe, he will fetch my horses. 6. My books say, he was very poor. 8. Do the counts say, they are not rich ? 10. We believe, we have discovered the lands. On Lesson 9 and Ref. -Page S. 1. I believe the boy [dat.) ; he said, it is there. 3. We hoped, you had your teacher's book . 5. The child of this man said, it was happy. 7. Did you hear, he sought my pictures ? 9. The sons of those brothers were not rich. 2. My father's dog is very large ; they say so. 4. I believed, this town was very old. 6. Do they say, we were rich, or poor ? 8. No, but I heard, they bought those there. 10. We thought, the children were happy. On Lesson 10 and Ref. -Page F. 1. Have you been there ? Yes, we were there. 3. Would you, my child, have been happy ? 5. Will you buy my father's horse ? 7. My child has become a man (woto. ). 9. Which dog has been (become) bought ? 2. These wines have been bought here. 4. No, I should not have been very happy. 6. Who will have become a count ? 8. Would you have become my pupils, if . . 10. Who will have used your money ? On Lesson 11 and Ref. -Page Gr. 1. Would this rich man have become poor, if 3. Does he think, this good book is very old ? 5. These old horses have been bought here. 7. Had you been there, my poor men ? 9. Would you believe these rich coixnts ? 2. I believe he would have become a poor man. 4. My poor son said, he was not happy. 6. Would he seek my old hat ? No. 8. Rich daughters of poor mothers. 10. We hope, they will sell their old houses. On Lesson 12 and General 1. I think, my good child will have a book. 3. Let these poor children choose books. 5. Happy sons of happy, old fathers ! 7. Should we not have been chosen. 9. Would they have sold these old horses ? E 2. The happy fathers would have been here. 4. I should not have believed this. 6. Much money, but few good dresses. 8. I believe, you will be chosen there. 10. I sold it to those good, happy men. 34 Gei'man Grammai'. Reference-Page H. The Regular Verb ; root unchanged throughout. 1. Verbs with roots ending in f, \, i, ^\\, gn, i\)\\\, insert a euphonic e before the ?t of all terminations, as : ev vet'C^t, lie S])eaks ; er veb^e-te, he spoke. 3. No ge= is prefixed for the Past Participle if the verb begins with be*, ge^, emp*, twU, ev*, »er*, jev-, |)tntev=^, mifj*, OOtt-, Jütbev*, (see Rule 19, lesson 6), nor is ge== prefixed to verbs ending in ^I'ven, as : yerbfeiU, iprobtrt. 4. In verbs conjugated with fetn, to he, simply substitute this auxiliary for OaBeit, to have, (below) in all Compound Tenses, Avithout any other change whatever. Example of Regular Conjugation : f rtg-eil, to say. {N.B. — c&, it, shows the position of the Object or Predicate throughout.) PRESENT INDICATIVE. id) frtg»e ii, I say it tu ... =fl ii, thou say est it er ... 4 e§, he says it trir ... -m ti, we say it t^v ... --t e», ye say it fie ... '-en c«, they say it IMPEEFECT INDICATIVE. icf; f(ig4c eg, / said it bu ... 4cft c«, thou saidst it cr ... 4e eS, he said it mv ... 4en c9, ice said it if)r . . . 4et c8, ye said it fie ... »ten d, they said it FIRST FUTURE INDICATIVE. 'c^ rocrte \ bu wirft er irirb >ini' ircrbcn i6r irerbet fie nierben r e I shall -N thou loilt he luill toe shall ye ivill they will J IMPERATIVE. (no First Person Singular. ) f ag-e eg I say {thou) it ! (a?t eg i^n fagen ! Let him say it ! f flg=en tt>\x c« ! Let us say it ! frtg=t eg I fng=en ®ic eg ! laft eg fie fogcn! Let them say it! Say (you) it PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. icf) fflg^e eg, / say it bu ... «eft eg, thou say it cr ... »e eg, he say it tniv ... =cn eg, xue say it if;r ... -it eg, ye say it fie ... »en eg, they say it IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. id) fag-te eg, I said it bu ... »teft eg, thou saidst it ev it)r fie 4e eg, he said it »ten eg, tve said it 4ct eg, ye said it . «ten eg, they said it FIRST FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE. id; roerbe bu ivcrbcft er »ucrbc lüir lucrben i^r werbet fie werben J I shall thou unit , he loill ■ loe shall ye will they will y>> FIRST CONDITIONAL. id) würbe a / should bu würbeft er würbe wir würben if;r Würbet fie würben . thouwouldst S he would >-n toe should ye tüotdd they woidd PERFECT INDICATIVE. ic|) t)(ii( \ I have bu f)Ci^ er T>it wir 'i)aben \t)v ^att fie 'i}abm -« thoti hast « he has ^toe have " ye have they have PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE / had ^ id) Ijatti bu fjatUft er I)atte wir ftatten t^r ^attet fie Batten i, thou hadst 'Si The had ^ we had ye had they had SECOND FUTURE INDICATIVE. idt) werbe \ / shall ^ bu Wirfl er wirb wir werben i^r werbet fie Werben J ^ thou toilt -M he toill «. toe shall ^ ye toill they toill SECOND CONDITIONAL. id) Würbe >, I should bu würbeft er würbe thouwouldst ■ he woidd wir würben I « toe shoidd xijx würbet fie würben ) ' ye would they toould PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE, id) r;ate -«^ / have bu r^atcft er fiak wir l^aben i()r r;a6ct fie l^ntcn J ^ thou have e he have ^5 toe have " ye have they have PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. ■^ I had (or ^ loouldhave) thou hadst id) f;ättc bu r;ättcfl er fjättc wir r;ätteu 'if;r fjättet fie Ijätten [•^he had ^ toe had ye had they had SECOND FUTURE SUBJUNCT. id) werbe -\ „ / shall bu werbcft er Werbe wir Werben if^r werbft fie Werben J ^ thou wilt •SS- -^j he toill £. loe shall «' ye will ^ they will >' INFINITIVE. cg fag-en, to say it eg gc=fng.-t Traben, to have said it PRESENT PARTICIPLE. eg cig=enb, saying it PAST PARTICIPLE. ge.frtg4, .said German Grammar. 35 Reference-Page I. tjatic«, S>'i eö, / liave, it bit ^afl eö, feien wir eg, let us he it t^r fcib eö, ye are it if;r feiet cö, i^r wäret eg, 8 if;r wäret eg, 1 fcib eg, ) , , , feien fie eg, r'^ (2/0»)* jte jtnb eg, <Äe?/ are z< fie feien eg. fte waren eg, ^ g *->( fie wären eg, (regular) In the Future Simple and First Conditional, fein is regular ; in the Compound Tenses it is its own auxiliary. PERFECT INDICATIVE. \<}^ bin eg gewefen, 1 have been a pluperfect INDICATIVE. {^ War eg gewefen, / had been it PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. i(^ fci eg gewefen, / have been it PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. iri) wäre eg gewefen, I had been it SECOND FUTURE INDICATIVE. ic^ werbe eg gewefen fein, / shall have been it SECOND CONDITIONAL. IC^ würbe eg gewefen fein, I shotdd havebeenit werben, to become. Pres. Partic. : iwcrb-enb, becoming. Past Pakt. : (ge)WOrbeu (see Rule 31), become. Conjugated exactly like the Regular Verbs, root : WCrb« \ except in the — IMPERF. suBJUN. Thus Regular are : \6) würbe eg» ^ '^ present subjunctive. bu würbcfi eg, ■^. j i^ Werbe eg, / become it er würbe eg, ~§ | bu werbcfl eg, thou becomest it PRESENT INDICATIVE. iö) werbe eg, I become it bu Wirfi eg, thou becomest it er wirb eg, he becomes it wir werben eg, u'e become it i^X werbet eg, ye become it fie werben eg, they become it IMPERF. INDIC i(i) würbe eg, >j bu wurbefi eg, cr würbe eg Wir würben eg, i^r würbet eg, fie würben eg, J wir würben eg, i^r würbet eg, fte würben eg, r. FUTURE SIMPLE INDICATIVE. iä) werbe eg werben, / shall become if bu Wirfi eg werben, thou wilt become it In the Compound Tenses, werben is conjugated with fein, to be. PERFECT INDICATIVE. ic^ bin eg geworben, / have become it PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. i^ fei eg geworben, //lai'e become it PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. i^ war eg geworben, / had become it \ i4) wäre eg geworben, I had become it SECOND FUTURE CONDITIONAL. \^ werbe eg geworben fein, I shall have become it SECOND CONDITIONAL. i(^ Würbe eg geworben fein, I should have become it 36 German Graimnar Conversational Sentences. (To be learnt in small portions again and again during the Term.) 1. Sffiie iveit ifi eö »on {;tcr nac^ S3crltn? 2. So ifl noc^ met)r alö jwanjtg 2)?ctlen. .3 ^^ bin mubcl; baö SReifen crmübet fe^r. 4 ©tnb ©te '^iingrtg ? S'Jetn, aber ic^ bin bitrjlfg. 5. (Jo regnete jlar!, eö ^ixi gefiern gefc|)neit. 6. |)eute ifi eö aber rec^t f^öneö 253etter. 7. ©iefommen mit unö; nii^tma^r? 8. 3^/ i^ n^erbe mit SSergnügen fommen. 9. ©e^cn ®ie ^eute 2tbenb in'sJ (lonjert? 10. 9?ein, tt)ir iverben in'ö 2:^cater gc|en. 11. ©e^en @ie bag fcfiöne ©orf bort unten V 12. f)icr auf bem Serge ift eö fe:^r fc^ön. 13. ©e^en ®ie ftc^ ba auf biefe Sanf. 14. ©anfe, mein ^err, fe^en ®ie fic| and;. 15. 2Sie :^at eö 3^nen in Sien gefatfcn ? 16. @ö geftet mir auf erorbentii^ gut. 17. Sie lange blieben ®ie in ber ©tabt? 18. 3^ t^ie^ einen ganzen 2)?onat bort. 19. ©inb ©ie f^on in ber ©d;weij gcmefen? 20. 9Jein, aber wie ge|en näc^fleö 3a^r |in. 21. Sir werben im 3uti abreifen. 22. SOTcin greunb if! nac^ Hmerifa gegangen. 23. ®r wirb wa|>rf4)einlic|) fünf 3a|)re fort fein. 24. @ö tut mir leib, aber i^ fann ni4)t bteiben. 25. 3c^ fürcf)te, ©ie finb nic^t ganj wo^I. 26. 5Rein, ic^ \). 27. 5Wein Äopf tut mir fe^r wep. 28. 3c^ bitte, geben ©ie mir etwaö Saffcr. 29. |)ier ift ganj faiteö, frif(|)cö Saffer. 30. %^, baö ip gut, i^ banfe 3^ncn befienö. 31. güf;ten ©ie |t^ wiebcr etwaö beffer? 32. ID:^ ia, aber icf) Witt nad^ f^aufe gc^en. 33. 3^ glaube, man wirb je^t fortgei^en. 34. Stbieu, mein lieber greunb, auf Sieberfc^en. 35. 2(uf balbigeö Sieberfe^en, lieber ^einrtc^. 36. %^ ^offe, bic^ xz^i baib wieberjufe^en. How far is it from here to Berlin ? It is still more than twenty miles. I am. tired ; travelling tires one very mrich. Are you hungry ? No, hut I am thirsty. It rained heavily, it snowed yesterday. To-day, however, it is very beautiful toeather. You are coming ivith us, are you not ? Yes, I shall come with pleasure. Will you go to the concert this evening ? No, we are going to the theatre. Do you see the beautiful village down there ? Here on the mountain it is very nice. Sit down here on this bench. Thank you, Sir, sit doivn also. How did you like Vienna ? I liked it very much indeed. How long did you remain in the town ? I remained a whole month there. Have you already been in Switzei'land ? No, but we go there next year. We shall set out in July. My friend is gone to America. He tvill probably be away five years. I am sorry, but I cannot remain. I fear you are not quite well. No, I have a violent headache. My head pains me very much. I beg you to give me some water. Here is some quite cold, fresh water. Oh, that is good, I thank you sincerely. Ho you feel a little better again ? yes, but I ivill go home. 1 believe, people are going away now. Good-bye, my friend, au revoir. / hope to see you again soon, dear Henry. I hope to see you again very soon. German Grammar. 37 POEMS. (To he learnt In small pmiions until thoroughly Icnoivn.) S^aö if! bcr XaQ beö ^cnn I 3ci^ bin allein auf weiter glut ; 9io^ eine SWorgcngfocfe nur 9tun Btiüe na|>' unt» fern. Stnbetent) !nie' ic^ Her. O fiipeg ®rau 'n ! 0e|)eimeö Scf)'n ! 21(0 fnieteu 25iclc ungcfe^'n, Unt) beteten mit mir. 2)er Fimmel, na^' unb fern, (it ifl fo f lar unb feierlich ; @o ganj, aU a>oUt' er ijffnen fi^. 2)aö ifi ber XaQ beö fserrn. ^ec ©utc ^amerab. (U|)(ant).) 3d; f;att' einen Äomerabcn, ©inen bcffcrn ftnb'fi bu nit. (for nic^t) Sie 2;rommeI f^Iug jum ©treite, Sr gieng an meiner ©eite 3n gteic^em ©djritt unb 2;ritt. eine ilugel fam gcPogen, ©ilt'ö mir ober gilt e^ bir? 3^n 1)at fie weggeriffen, Sr liegt mir üor ben güf en, %H n>är'ö ein ©tücf üon mir. SSiß mir bie $anb no(| reichen, ©ernjeil {^ eben lab'! Äann bir bie ^anb nic^t geben, ^Uib' bu im ejD'gcn Seben, fWeiH guter Äamerab! The Shepherd's Sunday Song. (Literal Trauslatiou. ) This is the day of the Lord ! I am alone on the widej^lain; Yet one morning-hell only, Now silence near and far. 'iVorshipping I kneel here. O sweet awe ! Mysterious breathings ! As if many knelt unseen, And were praying along with me. Heaven, near and far away, Is so clear and solemn-looking ; So altogether, as if it were going to open. That is the Lord's day. The Good Comrade. (Literal Translation. ) / had a comrade, A better one you could not find. The drum beat for the battle. He marched at my side With equal step [and tread). A {cannon) ball came flying (toivards us), Is it my turn or is it yours ? Him, it has torn axoay. He lies in front of my feet. Just as if it were a jnece of myself. He wants to give me his hand once more, Just whilst I am loading {my gun) ; I cannot give you my hand. Remain in eternal life {hereafter), My good comrade 38 German Grammar Reference-Page J. SEQUENCE OF WORDS in the PRIMARY or PRINCIPAL Sentence. {Becapitulatio7i of Syntax Rules given hitherto.) The student must, of coui'se, be able Avithout hesitation to recognise a member of a sentence as the Subject, or the Object, or the Predicate, etc. He must also carefully remember that the Assertion is never an Infinitive or Past Participle, but always a verb or auxiliary conjugated, i.e. expressing Person, Number, and Tense. A. Natural order in Statements. (Learn this order by heart.) 1 2 3 4 5 Ö 7 Subject, with all Assertion Objects with their Adverbs Predicate with Past Partie. Infinitive. its enlargements. i.e. enlargements. or its enlargements. If more than If more than Conjugated (Noun with preposition) Adverbials. [Separable prefix] one, put that one, put that Verb or Noun in oblique Case. See Notice Nom. of nouns. of the Auxili- of the Auxili- Auxiliary. fauft See Notice (a) below. (b) below. Adj. invariable. ary last. ary last. ©er gute Änabe feine 33ücf;cr ^eute. none none none 5Wein alter 58ater i)at bent Änaben nic^t none geglaubt none ©le Winter fiiit) »on bem 2el;rer geflern none getobt ttjorben. none (Sr Jvar none fc^on ein alter Wanu. none none ©iefe Tlännn tDürben none bort nic^t ret^ geivorben fein. ©ie ©onne gieng none (icute fpät auf. none none B. Inverted order, i.e. Assertion before Subject, without any other change. This takes place {a) in Questions ; (h) when any other member of the sentence, except the Subject, stands at the beginning of the sentence for emphasis. 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 2 I> 1 r VERSION. 3 4 5 6 7 Assertion Subject. Objects. Adverbs. Predicate. Past Partie. Infinitive. itauft ber gute ilnabe feine Sür()er ^eute? none none none ©cgtaubt ^at metn alter 25atcr bem Knaben ntc^t. none (at beginning) none 3Son bcm ?e^rer ftnb bie^Äinber (at beginning) geflern none gelobt tt)orbcn. none ein otter SCZann war er none fc^on. (at beginning) none none S)ort ttJürben btefe Scanner none (at beginning) ni^t xiii) geworben fein. |)eutc gieng bie (Sonne none fvat auf. none none Notice.— {a) If there are more than one Object, Person precedes Thing, Pronoun precedes Noun, Dative precedes Accusative. (6) As to Adverbials, adverbs of time precede all others, and even stand often before the Objects ; the adverb niäit generally precedes other adverbs, or it may stand before the word it negatives ; [noä) niüii, not yet, is rarely separated], (c) Principal sentences joined by— unb, and; ober, or; t»enn,/or, because; oder, oHeiit, b\it; and fonbern, but (after a negative, and not introducing a complete sentence), preserve the same sequence of words in each sentence as given above. N.B. — The above Sequence of words is sometimes slightly interfered with by a desire to make any word specially emphatic by placing it where it ought not to stand according to Rule. THIRD TERM The pupil ought now to begin with translating very easy pieces of German, using a Dictionary. Every word ought, with the assistance of the teacher (especially in the Irregular Verbs) to be parsed viva voce. The Eeference-Pages ought to be constantly referred to in this parsing. A few words should be parsed in tvriiing for each translation lesson, and a " Voca- bulary" should be begun by the pupil, into which he should write down the English of every neiv word he meets with in each lesson set in translation. A few sentences from page 61, and a few words of the Dictionary on pages 58, 59, should still form an integral part of every Grammar lesson set, also the Poem on page 62. N.B. — Reference-Page J, page 38, ought now to be constantly referred to in doing the Exercises in this Term, the words for which will be found in the Dictionary on pp. 58, 59. 39 40 Germmi Grammai' Example of Parsing. Translate .-—Du ^ajl jtvei Dpvcii unb nur einen 9)?unb ; 3Ste(eö foltft bu |)oven, unb luentg bavanf fagen. 2)u ^aj^ jivei 2(ugen unb nur einen ?D?unb : benn a}?anc()e^ foflft bu fe^en unb baOei fc(;treigen. ^\x>ti |)änbe |)aft bu, unb einen SD^unb : '^wx SIrbett finb jivei ba, jum (Sffen nur ©iner» PARSING. Of Nouns give number and case in the text ; and Nominative Singular with definite article and English; also Genitive Singular and Nominative Plural. — Of Verls give Person, number, tense, and mood in the text, and Infinitive with the English, 3d Person Singular Present Indicative ; Imperfect Indicative ; and Perfect Indicative. N.B. — For some time the Infinitive of Irregular Verbs met with in Translation must be given by the teacher to the pupil, who will then be able to parse the verb by looking them out on Eeference-Page N. [The letters in ( ) refer to the Reference-Pages, which must be consulted in the Parsing.] bu (Q.), Personal Pronoun, Nom. Sing. 2cl person, thou (you). ^ttft (I.), Auxiliary, 2d pers. Sing., Pres. Indie, of ^0^)611, to have. er ^ai, er ^atte, cr i)at 9e(;abt, hast. 5lt)ci (R.), Numeral adjective, two. Ot)ren (D. a.), Noun, accusative Plural of : baö D|r, beö — eö, tie —en, ears. jtnb, co-ordinate Conjunction, and. nut, adverb of limitation, onli/. einen (C. b.), Indef. Article, masc. Sing, ace, a, one. ä)2unb (D. a.), Noun, accusative Singular of : ber 9)?unb, bee -co, bie — e, moutli. S3iefe§, Indef. adjective, neut. ace. Sing., much. foUft (K.), Auxiliaiy, 2d pers. Sing., Pres. Ind., of: foUen, er foil, er foUte, er ^at oefoKt, shalt. I)ören (H.), Infinitive regular Verb : er I;ört, |)örte, t;at öet;5rt, (to) hear. XaeniQ, Indefinite Pronoun, little. bavttuf (Q. 5.), contraction for auf eö, Preposition with ace. neut. Pers. Pron., about it. fagen (H,), Infinitive, regular Verb. er fagt, fagte, ^at gefagt (to) say. 9(ugen (D. h.), Noun, accusative Plural of : baö Stuge, beö — ?, bie — n, eyes. bcmt/ co-ordinate Conjunction, /or (because). SWJrtnd^eS (C. «•), Indef. adj. neut. Ace. Sing., many a (thing). fctjen (N.), Infinitive irregular Verb. er fte^t, fa|), l;at gefeljcn, (to) see. taiei (Q. 5.), contraction for fcet beitl, Preposition with dat. Sing, of relative, " by it," withal. fii^hiejgen (N.), Infinitive irregular Verb, be silent. er fc^weigt, fc(;»r»ieg, ^at gefcf;n)iegen. $änt»e (D. b.), Noun, accusative Plural of : bie f)anb, ber — , bie' — e, hands. jur (O. N.B. — 2.), contraction of JU ber, Preposition with dative singular feminine article, /or (the). Ströeit (D. b.), Noun, dative singular of : bie SJrbett, ber — , bie —en, work. finb (I,), Auxiliary, 3d plural Present Indicative of : fein, er ifl, ivar, ifi gewefen, are. ba, Adverb of place, there, he7-e. sum (O. N.B. — 2.), contraction of JU bent. Preposition with dative singular masculine Article, /or (the). (gffcn, Infinitive used as a noun, dative singular of : baö offen, beö — ö, [bie — ], eating. (Sinex (C. b. 2.), Indefinite article used as a noun masculine Singular Nominative one. Literal Translation. You have two ears, and only one mouth ; much you should hear, and say little about it. You have two eyes, and only one mouth ; for many a thing you should see and be silent withal. Two hands you have, and one mouth ; for work there are two, for eating only one. German Grammar 41 Reference-Page K. The Auxiliaries of Mood. Besides !^abeil, to have, fetll, to he, and iverben, to become, the German language has, like the English, auxiliary verbs, to express the mode of an action. Unlike the English auxiliaries of mood, the German auxiliaries have a complete conjugation, and require the actual verb in the Infinitive without JU (to...). There are seven such auxiliaries : bürfcit, to be alloived ; föttttCtt^ to he able; mögen, to like; miiffett, to he obliged; foUett, {to) ought ; UfoUcn, to be ivilling ; and taffett, to let. Of these laffctt is altogether irregular, and will be given among the irregular verbs ; the other six are regular verbs throughout, except in the Singidar Present Indicative ; the first four however drop the modification of their root vowel for the Imperfect Indicative, but resume it for the Imperfect Subjunctive ; foKen and WOKen cannot modify at all ; mögen changes g into (f) in the Imperfects and Past Participle. In all other respects they are conjugated like fag-eu. (See Reference-Page H.) bitrfe«, to be allowed, may PRESENT INDICATIVE. t^ batf, > / am allotved to bit bctrfft, £- fhoti, mayest er bavf, "5- he may iüir bur fen, {^ we are allowed to i^r bl'irft, "" ye may iie bürfeit, J they are alloived to- IMP. IND. [^ burfte, / was alloived (might "j IMP, SUB. i(i) burfte, /- , , , Vbe alloived PAST PARTic. geburft, alloived lönnctt, to be able, can PRESENT INDICATIVE. trf; fann, bu fannft, er fann, »vir fönnen, i^r fönnt, fte fönnen. / am able to \ thou canst he is able to we can ye are able to they can IMP. iND. i(| fonnte, I could IMP. SUB. i^ fonnte, / would be able to PAST PARTIC. gefonnt, been able utögett, to like, may PRESENT INDICATIVE. id; mag, bu magfl, er mag, ivir mögen i(;r mögt, fte mögen, J y2. I like to -^ thou mayest he may we like to ye like to they may ■ IMP. IND. t(| mo^te, / liked to IMP. SUB. t^ mö^te, I should like to PAST PARTIC. gemotzt, liked muffen, to be obliged, must PRESENT INDICATIVE. td) muf , bit mu§t, er muf , tt>ir muffen, i^r müf t, fte muffen. / am, obliged to \ ^ thou must •— he is obliged to ^ we must c r^ ye must they are obliged to. IMP. IND. l^ mufte, Itvas obliged to IMP. SUB. t(^ müfte, I should be obliged to PAST PARTIC. gemußt, obliged follcu, ought, should PRESENT INDICATIVE. ic^ fot( ^ bu folffi, er fott, t»ir foCfen, if;r foUt, fte fotlen. / shoidd - \ thou shouldst he is to ive are to ye should they are to IMP. IND. tc^ foUte, / ought to IMP. SUB. id; fotfte, / ought to PAST PARTIC. gefoHt, ought tooKcn, to wish, be willing PRESENT INDICATIVE. ic^ IVtCt, bu njittft er \x>ia, tt)ir njoffen, i^r ttJoKt, fte trotten, ■ I ivish to ^^ thou wilt he wishes to ive will ye will they wish to- IMP. IND. tc^ iVOKte, / wished to IMP. SUB. iH) VOOUti, I loanted to PAST PARTIC. gen)Oltt, wished Though easy of conjugation, these auxiliaries present great difficulties as to their employment. 42 German Grammar. Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page K. Example. — Write out in full — (1) the Present Subjunctive, (2) the Imperfect Subjunctive, (3) the Future Simple Indicative, (4) the Conditional Simple, of biicfctt ; also (5) the Compound Future Indicative, (6) the Perfect Subjunctive, (7) the Compound Conditional, of i^öttnett. (1) PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. id; bütf^e, 1 am (be) alloiued ... «efl, thou may est ... «e, he may ... sen, we are allowed ... 'ii, ye may ... sen, they may (2) IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. iH) t)Ürft=e, I might, ivould-^ bit ... 'i^, thou woiddst er ••• sC, he would ivir ... sen, vje should i^X ... set, ye mhjht fte ... sen, they might j (3) PUT. SIMPLE INDICÄT, \i) tt)crt)e ^ / shall -^ bu i»ir|l er tvirb \\)\x tverben i(;r werbet fte lüerben ) thou unit ^ he will -3 lue shall JO ye will they ivill ■ (4) CONDITIONAL SIMPLE id) ivitrbse ^ / shoidd \ bu er Jvtr i{;r fte seft -z =en set sen^ yti thoib wouldst he looidd 5 toe should ye tvould they icoidd ■ (5) COMPOUND FUTURE INDICAT. \6^ njerbe ^ bu wirft er wirb wir werben i^r werbet fte werben / shall \ thou vnlt he will we shall ye tvill they will J (6) PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ic|) ^afee "N '""' I have \ thou have he have ^^ we have o ye have T' I they have J bu f;at>cfl er I;abe wir t;aben fte ^aben J IS c (7) COMPOUND CONDITIONAL. ic| würbe • bu würbefl er würbe wir würben i^r würbet fte würben . o ^o^ / should \ thou wouldst he lüould we should ye ivould they tvould IS sö O ■»> Exercise. — Write out in full — (1) Future Simple Indicative, (2) Future Simple Subjunctive, (3) Present Subjunctive, of möi^Ctt ; also (4) Imperfect Subjunctive, (5) Pluperfect Indicative, (6) Perfect Indicative, of muffen. Examples. 1. J)arfber^nabebiefeS5üc|)er laufen? 2. @r ^at fte faufen bürfen * (not geburft)'. 3. Sir mögen biefe Silber nic|)t fe^en. 4. (?r follte morgen nac|) ?onbon gc|en. 5. ®ie ^aben cö fo gewollt, mein ^err. 6. 9)?öc|)ten @ie nai^ ^ariö reifen ? 1. Is the hoy alloived to buy these books ? 2. He has been alloived to buy them. 3. We do not like to see these x>ictures. 4. He ought to go to London to-morrow. 5. You have ivished it thus, Sir. 6. Shoidd you like to travel to Paris ? * Notice carefully : When these auxiliaries are used in the Compound Tenses, along with the Infinitive of a Verb, the Past Participle of the auxiliary is replaced by its Infinitive. Exercise. (See Rules on Reference- Page K ; also above.) 1. Was the man allowed to see those dogs? 3. We wished to sell our old horse. 5. My father does not like his new wine. 7. They say you are obliged to do this. 9. Were they allowed to choose their books ? 2. Yes, he has been allowed to see them. 4. They have not wished to go to London. 6. You ought not to be idle, my boys. 8. Your daughter did not like to sing. 10. Yes, they have been allowed to choose. German Grammar 43 Additional Notes on Reference-Page K. Differences in the idiomatic use of the auxiliaries in English and German. {Learn and digest these sample sentences carefully.) 1. ©iei^oöettStc^t, mein |)err; irf; t)ottc Unrecf)t. 2. (So ift bun!et gciooritctt, unb cö luiri» fa(t. 3. Sort i^ eö fagen? S)u batfft cö nic(;t fageii. 4. 3^ tiättc mein ^ferb tJcvfnuf en lijnneu. 5. können ©icDcittfd;? Sd) f «nn cö nocf; nic|t. 6. ®ie inag retcf) fein. ajJö^tc fic gtücfttd; fein ! 7. 3f^ ^ättc ben Änabcn gem fefjen mögen. 8. Sit Mafien baö |)auÖ bctfoufcn muffen. 9. 9}Zein ©o^n foH je^t granjöfifd; onfangen. 10. ©u f oöft beinen 5Räd;flcn lieDcn ! 11. (Sr fou auögewanbert fein. 12. @r to ill na(|) SUtflratien gef;cn. 13. Sir toctbcn etJ morgen faiifen. 1. You are right, Sir ; I was lorong. 2. It has got dar!:, and it is getting cold. 3. IVIay I say it ? You must not say it. 4. / could have sold my horse. 5. Do you know German ? I do not know it yet. G. She may be rich. that she were happy I 7. / shozdd have liked to see the boy. 8. We were obliged to sell the house. 9. 3Iy son is now to begin French. 10. Thou shalt love thy neighbour! 11. He is said to have emigrated. 12. He intends to go to Australia. 13. We shall buy it to-morrow. Conjugate like biicfen : Jebiitfen, to need ; cr t^cbarf, er Beburfte, er I;at bcburft, followed by a noun in the Genitive, as : t^ Bebarf beö S3u(|eö, I need the book. Conjugate like mögen : öcrmögcnto be able ; er öermag, er t»crmod;tc, er |at oermoc^t, followed by an Infinitive with Jit, as : \&) üermag eö jit t^nn, I am able to do it. (This verb admits of JU before the Infinitive. ) Exercise on 1 . My father will be right, I shall obey. 3. It is getting late ; it has got night. 5. We needed a fi'iend, and you are one. 7. My little son knows a little German. 9. He is to learn French soon. 11. AYe were obliged to go to Pai-is. 13. Was she able to do this work ? 15. Have you needed your money, Sir? 17. I have not wished to buy it. 19. He is said to be in Berlin. the above. 2. Are you not wrong, my dear friend ? 4. You may say it to your kind teacher. 6. that these children were diligent ! 8. Does he also know French ? No, not yet. 10. The men could have chosen their friends. 12. Were they not also obliged to go? 14. No, she has not been able to do it (/ei7i.). 16. Did you wish to buy my horse? 18. It may be cheap, but I need no horse. 20. Why was he not allowed to go ? Notice. — The words for the Exercises in this term will be found in the Dictionary on pages 58, 59 ; or in that on page 12. 44 German Grammar. Reference-Page L. Eints, for recognising as regular or irregular any verb [not an auxiliary or one of the half- regular Verbs (Eef.-Page M, N.B. b and c)] met with in Translation. Auxiliaries, and the nine half-regular verbs [see Eef.-Page M, N.B. b and c] are not com- prised in the following hints, which ought to be very carefully learnt, as they are very useful. Any verb is regular — I. If the 1st or 3d person Singular Imperfect ends in ?te» (No exceptions.) With the exception of tint, to do, and the Verbs (about 20 altogether) which have a root ending in b or t; the terminations 4iift, 4cn, '4ct of the Imperfect also betray a regular verb. II. If the Past Participle ends in 4* (No exceptions, as all irreg. Past Part, end in ?n.) III. If the Infinitive has : (Learn the exceptions by heart. ) (a) Boot-Vowel: o; except only fomineil, ^ö co??ie/ ftOpeit, o push. u; except only rufeit, to call ; tint, to do. eU/ äu ; without any exce^jtions. d; except only ga^reit, to ferment; gebären, to bring forth. Ö; except only ev(üfci;en, to become extinguished; fd)tvöven, to siuear. Ü; except only betrügen, to cheat; (Ügen, to lie, tell a lie. au; except only ^auen, to hit; taufen, to run; fd;nauben, to snort; faufen, to drink (of animals) ; and fangen, to suck (b) Termination: ...rfen; except only bacfen, to bake; erf4)recfen, to be frightened. ...djten; except only fed;ten, to fight ; flechten, to tueave. ...jen; except only ft^en, to sit, be seated. ...gnen; ...etn; ...ern; ...igen; ...iren; these without exceptions. Notes on the auxiliary to be used in the Compound Tenses : The English often differs from the German in the use of to have or to be, as we have seen ah'eady, thus : / have ieen — iä) öltt getvefcil (/ ctvi been). Neuter verbs of motion or of condition mostly take fein in the compound tenses. (a) Of motion : [Root verbs only are given here ; the derivatives also take fein.] flte|)en, to shun, flee gel;en, to i« meinem grcunb begegnet; er ift gefommen. (Fr iuar gefallen, er wax erfc^rocfen. ©aö ^inb ift eingefcf;Iafen, esJ ifi mübe genjefen. Sir finb burd; ganj Suroj^a gewanbert. 2)ie geinbe fint» geflogen; loir fiut) geblieben. Given : fliegen, to flee; fto^, ifi gefi[cf;en. bleiben, to remain; btieb, ift geblieben. Exercise. I. Have you remained there? No, Sir. 3. Who has fled ? The enemy has fled. 5. No, I have not yet met my brother. (Dat. ) 7. We have gone to Englaird. (Page 22, foot.) 9. Have they travelled far, your friends ? 2. Where have you been, my little friend ? 4. Have you met your brother ? (Dative.) 6. 1 should have remained if . . . 8. Will you believe, we have (subj. ) remained ? 10. He has fallen [headlong] into the river, (in with ace.) 46 Germaii Gra77imar Reference-Page M. The Irregular Verb. The Irregular Verbs are irregular only in the Imperfect Indicative, the Imperfect Subjunc- tive, and the Past Participle. But most of those, which have % (x\\, or e, for their root vowel modify a into ä, au into äu, into ö, and e into i orte, for the 2d and 3d \)uveT the 1st] persons Singular of the Present Indicative ; and the 2d person Singular Imperative, if contracted. Examples of the Irregularities of Irregular Verhs. fc^cn, to see. PRESENT INDICATIVE. i^ fef>e e^, / see it bu ftc^:fi C^, thou seest it cr ficti=t Co, he sees it Wix fef;=en cö, we see it it)X fc^-t Co, ye see it fte Ui)'in eö, they see it IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. IC^ faf; Co, I saw it bit faf>fi e^, thou sawest it er \al) eö, he saw it wix \al)m\ iä, tve saio it \{)X fnf>t CO, ye saw it fte fflf;=en CÖ, they saw it All other tenses are always regular, i.e. as given on Reference-Page H, It will therefore be sufficient to give of irregular verbs only the INFINITIVE PRESENT. I 3d SING. PRES. INDIC. I 3cl SING. IMPF. INDIC. 1 3d SING. PERF. INDIC. fe^cn, to see I er fte(;t I er faf; | er ^at gcfe{;cn IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. tcf; fäf;e eö, I saw it bit fa^'Cfl CO, thou saioest it er fä()«e eö, Ae saw it wix fä^«en eö, ice saio it i^X ^ä\)'-ii CO, ye sato it fte f(i(;-cn eö, they saio it IMPERATIVE. ftet;! see {thou)! (rest regular) PAST PARTICIPLE. gefe^en, seen to show what auxiliary to use. Bememhenng carefully the follovnng Rules. 1. Where the 3d person Singular of Present Indicative shows a modification of root vowel, the same modification occurs in the 2d person Singular of the same tense, and the 2d person Singular Imperative if contracted. 2. The Imperfect Subjunctive is throughout formed from the Imperfect Indicative in the same way as shoAvu above, modifying a into ä, into ö, and u into Ü. 3. All other tenses are regular, as shown in Reference-Page H. N.B.—(a) The following verbs do not modify the root vowel in 2d and 3d person Singular Present Indica- tive (of course verbs with i, ie, et, Clt cannot do so). Regular Verhs never do so, nor do the half-regular Verbs below, nor verbs with tt for root vowel, of which two only are irregular : beilegen, to move ; gencfen, to recover ; t;c'6en, to lift ; fc^affcn, to create; fielen, to stand; ge^en, to go ; I;aiieil, to hit ; pflegen, to nurse ; fiecfen, to stick; weben, to weave. {b) The following Verbs have a root-vowel change, but are otherwise quite regular brennen, to hum ; brannte, gebrannt l fennen, to know ; fannte, gcfannt I nennen, ^oca?Z; nannte, genannt rennen, to run; rannte, gerannt fenben, to send; fanbte, gefanbt tvenben, to turn; ivanbte, gcivanbt (c) To these may be added the following : bcnfen, to think ; bad)te, gcbaci;t bringen, to bring ; bracl;te, gcbradjt / jvtffen, to know ; »t)u(5te, gcnjugt. with irreg. Pres. Ind., Sing, only, i^ tvci^, bu u^eif)t, er tveiß German Grammar 47 Notes to Reference-Page M. The Irregular Verb. The learner will find that the best way to acquire a knowledge of the irregular verbs is to constantly repeat the " Headline " of each, and enlist the ear in the service of memory. The alphabetical list should be gone over again and again in small portions. We may distinguish four conjugations, according to the root vowel in the Imperfect Indicative. \st Conjugation : Imperfect : a (about 60 verbs, i.e. root-verbs) : (a) e(i) a e as : lefen, to read ; \ai, gelcfeit [h) e(t) a as : ^ctfen, to help ; {;«![, geholfen (c) t a u as : finben, ^o/kcZ; fani), gefunden 2d Conjugation : Imperfect : le or i (about 50 verbs) : (a) ei i t as : I ei fccn, ^o SM^'er; litt, gelitten (h) et te ie as: fd;rciben, ^o?fnte; fi^rieb, gef(i()ricben (about 15 verbs) (c) (a) U a as: fcl;fßfen, to sZeep; [(flicf, gefc^Iafen (about 15 verbs) 3fZ Conjugation : Imperfect : (about 40 verbs) : (re) te as : vertieren, into tt : f(!()nett>en, to cut ; f^nitt, gefc|)nitten (t) Still further irregularities have — NFINITIVE. ENGLISH. PRESENT INDICATIVE SINGULAR. IJ get; en to go (reg.) ergebt {;auen to strike (reg. ) er !^aut ne|)men to take id) nel;me, bu ntmmf^, er nimmt flehen to stand (reg.) erflet;t tun to do, make ic^ tue, bu tü% er tut jie^en to ptdl (reg.) er jief;t gtcitcn, to glide ; glitt, geglitten pfeifen, to ivMstle ; pfiff, gepfiffen f^ietfen, to grind; fd;Iiff, gef4)(iffen flreitcn, to quarrel ; f^ritt, geftrittcn leiben, to suffer ; litt, gelitten fteben, to loll; fott, gefotten 3d SINGULAR 3d SINGULAR IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. PERFECT INDICATIVE. er gieng er ifi gegangen er f;teb er \)<\i genauen er naf)m er I;at genommen er fianb er ifi geftanben er tat er f;at getan er 50g er f;at gcjogen 48 German Gra7itviar Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page M. Example.— (7/ce?! .- Icfcii, to rend ; er ttcöt, laö, l)cit (jelefen and : ocf;en, (0 go; ct a,d)t, QkwQ, ift gegangen write out in full — (1) Present Indicative ; (2) Imperfect Subjunctive ; (3) Imperative ; (4) Perfect Indicative ; (5) Perfect Subjunctive ; (6) Compound Future Indicative ; (7) Future Simple Subjunctive of each. (1) Pres. Ixdicative. icfe (efe, / read bit licfcfl, thou readest er litSt, he reads Wix Icfen, we read i^x lefet, ye read fte lefen, they read (1) Pres. Indicative. i^ ger;=e, / go bit ... =fl, thou goest «t he goes er . wix x\)x ■ sen, we go A, ye go fte ... =en, they go (2) Impf. Subjunctive. might ( should ) bit ...«cf}, thou woiddst er ...=C, he loould >vir ...»en, rre should t(;r ...»et. ye woicld fte ...»en, crb»e 1 I shall read bu ... »eft I thou wilt er ... »e I S Äe to/^ Jinr if;r fte »en »ct »en we shall .. ye will they will .. (7) Future Simple Subj. td; tverb»e bit ... »efl cr iinr it;r fi'e »en »ct / shall go thou wilt go he ivill go toe shall go ye will go »en they loill go (4) Perfect Indicative. t^ ^Ctbe A / have read bu ^aft thou hast read er i)at wix ^ahen xi)x iiciit fte f;aben ■ ^ he has read - J we have read ye have read they have read (4) Perfect Indicative. id) bin bu bill cr ifl »t>ir finb i|)r fcib fte ftnb ^^ J haue gone j; thou hast ... g» he has « ive have ... '^ ye have they have ... (5) Perfect Subjunctive, id; ^ab»C >j / have read bu . .»en thou have er . wix .. . »e .»en he hai^e we have il)x . .»ct ye have fte .. . »en J they have Same of: gclicn, to go. (5) Perfect Subjunctive. id) f ct -^^ / have gone bu feiefl er fet wix fcien i()r fciet fte feien j; thou have ... g' he have ' ^ we have ^ ye have they have ... (6) CoMPD. Future Indicative. id; IV erbe >> I shall \ bu wix^ thou wilt 'S cr irirb he IV ill 1^ Wix ipcrben " c we shall fl i^x ivcrbct o ye ivill -< fie ivcrbcn J they ivill J (6) CoMPD. Future Indicative. iä) ivcrbe bu u>irfi er unrb ivir'tvcrben i|)r ivcrbct fte iverben / shall •«^ 'Z thou wilt c he ivill « g^ ye ivill Exercise. -Given: flc{;en, ^0 stand: cr flcl;t, flanb, ifl gefianben and : öcrlicrcn, to lose; ix ücrticrt, üerlor, I;at verloren write out in full— (1) Present Indicative ; (2) Perfect Subjunctive ; (3) Conditional Compound ; (4) Imperfect Subjunctive of each. German Grammar 49 Reference-Page N. Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs. Notes. 1. Eoot-verbs only are given here, not their derivatives; thus the pupil will find : finbcn, to find ; but not emp^finteil, to feel. 2. Auxiliaries are not given (except tofeil, to let), nor are the half-regular verbs, as fenneu, to know, etc. [These nine will be found on Eef.-Page M. N.B. b.c.] 3. Of each verb the Infinitive, and the 3d pers. Sing, of — Pres. Indie. ; Imperfect Indie. ; and Perfect Indie. ; are given : these parts suffice to conjugate the verb fully, if we remember the following Kules, which have been already given or hinted at : — (a.) The Present Indicative : 1st pers. Sing, adds *e to the root of the Infinitke; 2d pers. Sing, substitutes ?ft for the 4 of the given 3d person ; Plurals add *en, *(e)t, m\ to Infinitive Boot. (b.) The Imperfect Indicative : 1st pers. Sing, always like the given 3d person; 2d pers. Sing, adds ^t to the given 3d person; Plurals add *en, 'ii, *en to the given 3d person. (c.) The Imperfect Subjunctive: adds (without any exception) ?e, -eft, =e; *en, *et, ?en, to the given 3d person of the Imperfect Indicative, modififmg a, 0, U into ä, 0, Ü. {d.) The Imperative is generally regular, as : ci^zhz, give thou. But sometimes a contracted form is used for the 2d pers. Singular only, as : '^o^it^, give thou ; whenever this is the case, the vowel is modified as in the given 3d pers. Sing, of the Present Indica- tive; in fact it is then the 3d pers. Sing, of the Pres. Indie, with the ?t cut ofi". see * in the List. [All the other tenses are formed regularly, as given in Reference-Page H.] The Perfect Indicative shows both the Past Participle and the auxiliary used for all the Compound tenses — (as adjectives, the Past Participles are used always with feitt, to be) — and in the ^passive voice with ittctbctt/ to become. This List ought to be learnt over ctnd over again in small portions. Infinitive. 3d pers. Sing. Pres. Indie. 3d pers. Sing. Impf. Ind. 3d person Sing. Perfect Indicative. Infinitive. 3d pers. Sing. Pres. Indie. 3d 2)crs. Sing. Impf. Ind. 3d person Sing. Perfect Indicative. bacfen, to bake er bäcft bncf |)at gebacfen binben, to bind er binbet banb ^at gebnnben b ef e ^ (en, ^0 command *er befiehlt befahl ^ai befohlen bitten, to beg er bittet bat f;at gebeten bcf(eif en (fi^) to ap- er befleißt beflif ^at(fic^)beflifren blafen, to blow er Uäit blies? i)at gcblafen ply {oneself) (fic^) m) bleiben, to remain er bleibt blieb ift geblieben beginnen, to begin er beginnt begann {;at begonnen braten, to roast er brät briet I;at gebraten beiden, to bite er beif t bip ^at gebiffen brechen, to break *er bricht brad; ^at gebro^en bergen, to hide *er birgt barg I;at geborgen bingen, to hire er bingt (bingte) l)at gebungen berflen, to burst cö birfl barfi ift geborf^en tirefc|)en, to t/irash *er brif^t braf^) (;at gcbrofcl;en beilegen, to induce er bewegt bewog ^at bett)ogen bringen, to urge er bringt brang ift gcbrungen biegen, to bend er biegt bog ^t gebogen empfehlen, to recom- *er empfte^tt empfahl l;at empfol;len bieten, to offer er bietet bot l)at geboten mend 50 German Grammar Reference-Page N. — List of Irregular Verbs — Continued. INFINITIVE. erbteidjen, to turn pale erlöfd;en, to become (xtinguished crfc^aKcn, to resomid erfc|)recf en, to become frightened cffen, to eat fal}ven, to take a drive fallen, to/all fangen, to catch fecl)ten, foßght ftnben, toßnd flcdjtcn, to weave, lilait ffiecjen, to fly {wings) flicken, to shun, flee fticpen, tofloiu freffen, to eat {of animals) frieren, to freeze gä()ren, to ferment gebären, to bring forth gcBen, to give geMeten, to command gebe if; en, to thrive gefallen, to please ge^en, to go gelingen, to succeed gelten, to he rcorth gencfen, to recover [health) genief en, to enjoy gefd)el;en, to happen geivinnen, to gain, win giefen, to pour gteid)en, to resemble gleiten, to glide glimmen, to glow graben, to dig greifen, to seize i^atten, to hold I;angen, to be hanging Zd pers. 3d pers. Sing. Pres. Indie. Im-pf. Ind. cr erbleicht erblich eö erlöfd;t erlof^ eö erfc^aßt crfd)Oll *ererfd)ricft erfc^ratf *er if t a§ er fäi;rt fubr er fäüt fiel er fangt ft eng er fi($t mt er finbet fanb er flicht f(od;t cr fliegt flog er fliegt flo^ (er) fliegt m *(er) frift frap eö friert fror eö gäf;rt gol;r jte gebiert gebar *er giebt gab er gebietet gebot er gebeif;t gebie|) er gefällt gefiel er ge^t fltcttg eö gelingt gelang eö gilt galt er genefl genaö er geniest genop eö gcfc^ie|)t gefd;a|) er gewinnt gewann er gießt 009 er gleicht glic^ cr gleitet ßlitt eö glimmt glomm cr gräbt grub er greift önff er ^ält ^ielt er l;ängt l;ieng 3d person Sing. Perfect Indicative. if* erblid)en ift ertofdjen ift erfd)ot(en ift erfd)roden ^atgegeffen ift gefahren ift gefallen ^at gefangen l)at gefocbten l;at gefunben l)at geflod;ten ift geflogen ift geflogen ift gcfloffen ^at gefreffen :^at gefroren ^at gegobren ^at geboren |at gegeben "i^at geboten ift gebiel;en ^at gefallen ift gegangen ift gelungen ^at gegolten ift genefen bat genoffen ift gefc^eben bat gewonnen bat gcgoffen bat geglicbcn ift geglitten bat geglommen bat gegraben bat gegriffen ^at gebaltcn ifi gebangen INFINITIVE. bauen, to hit, heto beben, tn lift beißen, to be called belfen, to help Hemmen, to pinch flimmen, to cUmh Hingen, to sound fnicfen, to jmich freifcben, to scream !ommen, to come friecben, to creep füren, to elect laben, to load laffen, to let, allow laufen, to run leiben, to suffer Iciben, to lend tefen, to read liegen, to lie, be laid lügen, to tell a He meibcn, to sMm melfen, to milk meffen, to measure neb men, to take pfeifen, to whistle pflegen, to nurse preifcn, to j)raise quellen, to gush forth raten, to advise reiben, to rub reißen, to tear reiten, to take a ride ried;en, to smell ringen, to striiggle {roring) rinnen, to run rufen, to call faufcn, to drink (of animals) faugen, to such fcbaffen, to toork [create) fd;eiben, to separate [depart) 3d pers. Sing. Pres. Indie. er baut cr bebt cr ^ei^t *cr bilft cr flemmt cr flimmt Co Hingt er fneift cr freifd;t er fommt cr friecbt cr fürt er labet er läßt erläuft cr leibet cr leibt *cr licöt er liegt er lügt cr meibet er milH *er mißt *er nimmt er pfeift er pflegt cr preist eö quißt er rät er reibt er reißt er rettet cö rie^t cr ringt cö rinnt cr ruft er fäuft er fangt cr fcbafft er f4)cibet 3d pers. Sing. Impf. Ind. t)ic6 bob W^ balf (Homm) flomm !lang fniff (frifcb) fam fro^ for lub ließ lief litt lieb laö lag log mieb molf maß nabm Pfiff l>flog pries? quoll riet rieb riß ritt rocb rang rann rief (foff) fog fd;uf f^icb 3d person Sing. Perfect Indicative. bat gcbauen ^at geboben bat gebeißen bat gebolfen (bat geflemmt) ift gcHommen bat geHungen bat gcfniffen bat ge!rifd;en (also regiilar) iftgefommen ift gefroren bat geforen bat gelaben ^ai (ge)laffen ift gelaufen bat gelitten bat geliebcn iiat gclefcn ift gelegen i)at gelogen bat gemieben ^at gcmolfcn ))at gemeffcn bat genommen bat gepfiffen l)at gepflogen ^at gepricfen ift gequollen l)ai geraten ^at gerieben ^at geriffcn ift geritten bat geroeben ^at gerungen ift geronnen i)at gerufen bat gefoffen bat gcfogcn l)at gefcbaffen (ift) gef^iicbcn German Gram'tnar 51 Reference- Page N. — List of Irregular Verbs — Concluded. Infinitive. Sdpers. Sing. 3d pers. Sing. 3d person Sing. Infinitive. 3d pers. Sing. 3d pers. Sing. 3d person Sing. Pres. Indie. Ivipf. Indic. Perfect Indicative. Pres. Indic. Impf. Ind. Perfect Indicative. fcf;einen, to seem er fcf)eint fcl;ien ^at gefd)tencn fpringen, to spring er fpringt fprang ift gefprungcn fc(;eUen, to scold *er fcf;trt m^t '^at gefc^oüen ficc^en, to sting, prick *er ftic^t fta^ t;at ge)lod;en fc^cercn, to shear er fct;cert fc^or f)at gefdjoren {Werfen, to stick er jlecft m (i)at geftecft) (concern) fief; en, to stand er fiel;t ftanb ift geftrtubcn fcl;ickli, to jmsh er fc|)iebt fcf)ob i)at gef(|oben jiel)ten, to steal *er ftie^tt m)i t;at gcfloI)ten f(i;tef}en, to shoot er f^iie^t fd)09 i)at gef4)offen fieigen, to mount er fleigt fiieg ift gcftiegen fd)tafen, to sleep er fc|)Iäft fdjfief \)at gefd;tafen fierben, to die *er fiirbt narb ift geftorben fd;taoen, to hit er fc^tciGt fcf;tug ^at gef4)lagen flkUn, to ßy off cr jiiebt ftob (t;at) gefioben fd)tctd;cn, to sneak er fc^(eic|)t miä) ift gef^ttcfjen flinfen, to stink Co flinft ftanf ^at gc^unfen f4)Ietfcn, to grind er fc^Icift m^ i)at gefdjtiffen jioßcn, to push er ftöf t fiicf I;at gefiopen (knives) firetc|)en, to stroke er ftreid)t jiric^ f;at gcflrid;en fc(;tte§cn, to con- er fc^fic^t \d)m t)at gef4)tofTen fireiten, to quarrel er fireitct i^ritt ^at gcflrittcn clude, shut tun, to do, make er tut tat ^at getan \6)Un(iiU, to surround er fct)Itngt fcfjlcing l)at gefc^tungen tragen, to carry er trägt trug t;at getragen fc^mcipen, to throiv er fc^mci^t fc{)mif 1)^^ gcfd)mtiTen treffen, to hit *-cr trifft traf f;at getroffen fc^metjen, to melt *er fc|)mi(jt fcf)motj (;at gefd)moIjen treiben, to drive er treibt trieb f;at getrieben fdjiiauben, to snort er fc^nauM fc^nob 1)at gcfd)nobcu treten, to step *er tritt trat ift getreten fcf;neit)en, to cut er fd;neit>et fc^nitt I;at gefc|)iutten triefen, to drip er trieft troff (;at getroffen fc()reikl1, to ivrite er (einreibt f($rieb l)at gcfc|)riekn (also regular) fd;teien, to cry, shout er fcf;re(t fcf)rie {;at gefct^rieen trinfen, to drink er trinft tranf I;at gctrunfcn [^reiten, to stride, er [freitet fcfjritt ift gefc^ritten trügen, to cheat er trügt trog I;at getrogen liroceed öerberben, to sj)oil *er öerbirbt i)erbarb bat ücrborbcn fc^tVCigen, to he silent er Wivetgt fc^ivteg ^at gef4)n)iegen verbriefen, to annoy eö verbrieft ücrbrof {;at üerbroffcn f^ivetten, to swell eö fc^tüiöt fcI;tvott ift gefc^woöen »ergeffcn, to forget *er »ergibt üergap bat öcrgeffen fc(;ivimmen, to swim erfc^tüimmt fd;wamm iftgefc^wommen »ertieren, to loose er vertiert öcrtor bat verloren fcl)tvinticn, to vanish er f4)Jinnt)ct fcf)ivant> ift gefc^iintnben wac^fen, to grow er TOäd;fi wud)ö ift gcwacbfen f^lVingen, brandish, er f^ivingt frf)ivang I;atgefö;mungen wägen, to toeigh er wägt wog f;at gewogen Sluing n)afd;en, to wash er Wäf4)t wufc^ bat gewafd;en f^WÖren, to swear er fc()Wört f^wor l)at gef^woren JVeben, to weave er webt wob i)at gewoben fef;en, to see *er ftelt m l)at gefet;en jDeicf;en, to yield er \viiä)t wic^ ift gcwi^cn ficbcn, to boil er ftebet [Ott ^at gefotten it)eifen, to shoiu. er Wii^t wicö bat gcwicfcn ftiigen, to sing er ftngt fang l)at gefangen point out ftnfen, to sink er ftn!t fanf ift gefnnfen IVCrben to recruit *er wirbt warb ^at geworben ftnuen, to meditate er ftnnt fann l)at gefonnen iverfen, to throw *er wirft warf bat geworfen fi^eii, to sit er ft§t faß ift gefcffen wiegen, to tveigh er wiegt wog bat gewogen fpcien, r {ago, before), and in {in), always take dative, as: Dor je^U Sagcu (dative Plural), ten days ago; in einer S^Jinute, in a minute. (2.) Preposition and Definite Article are often contracted, as : am = an t>cm ; itn'8 = an t>aÖ : auf'^ = auf baö; ftcim = Ux bem; burd^'S = burd; baö; im = in bem; in'§ - in baö; bom = won bent; äum = ju bem; 5ur = JU bcr. (Other contractions are vei'y rare indeed.) German Grammar. 53 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page O. ®r führte ben atten S'lann burci^) ben SBatb. i ®ie gieng ben 33erg :^inauf, ben 35a(| entlang. So ge^t gegen meinen SÖiffen. | Exercise on the Accusative. 1. i7e ?erZ <7ie old man through the forest. 2. She loent up the mountain, along the brook. 3. It (joes against my will. This is for your good, kind teacher. He bought this without my permission. 5. The child fell down the hill yesterday. 2. Go through the town towards the church. 4. He has (is) gone along this rapid river. 6. We shall travel round the world. II. 1. ®ic jtnb tro^ beö SSerboteö gegangen. 2. 2;ue eö, um beineö SSaterö ttJiöen. 3. ®r lam wä^renb meiner ©tunbe. 1. You have gone in spite of the prohibition. 2. Do it, for your father' s sake. 3. He came during my lesson. Exercise on the Genitive. 1. He lives this side of the mountain. 3. The boy came on account of his brother. 5. He died in the midst of the enemies. 2. We went, in consequence of the command. 4. The house lies above the village. 6. We were walking alongside of the river. III. 1. (5r gieng auö bem §anfe ju bem 5D?ann. l. He loent out of the house to the man. 2. 2Bir ttterben nac^ einer ©tunbe lommen. 2. We shall come after an hour. 3. ©ie »o^nen S^rem |)aufe gegenüber. 3. They live opposite your house. Exercise on the Dative. 1. Come out of the room after the lesson. 2. Will you go with your father ? 3. We shall do it within three days. 5. Charles was (became) loved by his teacher. 4. The soldiers went against the enemy. 6. I spoke to those idle boys yesterday. IV. 1. ©er S?ogeI fliegt über baö ©»a^ bort. 2. ©te^en ©ie nidjt an bem genfler. 3. kommen ©le an baö genfler, Äart. Exercise. 1 , Those books lie on the chair in my room. 3. We go to (into the) school ; they are in (the) church. 5. They went (have... gone) across the sea, a week ago. 1. The bird flies over the roof there. 2. Do not stand at the window. 3. Gome to the ivindow, Charles. 2. Bring them into this room, my good boy. 4. We were between two fires. 6. I shall come to London in a few days. General Exercise on the Prepositions. 1. Were these boys in the room with the man ? 3. Where do you live ? Opposite that church. 5. We remained here against our will. 7. You have not been in (the) town. Why not? 9. He has been on the mountain. 2. Yes, but they went soon out of the house. 4. Why did you not go to London ? 6. Let us go along this beautiful brook ! 8. It was on account of our poor friend. 10. Are you also going on the mountain ? , 54 German Grammar Reference-Page P. On Inseparable and Separable Verbs. I. Inseparable Verbs. (a.) We have already seen that verbs beginning with the unaccented prefixes : be ♦ , , ge . . , emp , ♦ , ent * ♦ , er ♦ » , ücv ♦ , , jev ♦ ♦ , |){ntev ♦ ♦ , mt^ ♦ ♦ , i?of( ♦ * , Jvtbeiv (Ref.- Page H.) are inseparable, i.e. these prefixes never leave the root-verb throughout the conjugation, nor is ge . ♦ prefixed for the Past Participle, as : {iw) vertieven (irreg.) to loose; er üerttert, yertor, ^ empfangen unb mif}btaud)t. Exe 1. Will the boy be (become) rewarded ? 3. Do not withstand (to) your faithful friend (Dat.). 5. That town has been (become) destroyed. 7. What has he bequeathed to his daughter (Dativ^e)? 9. Did she receive her foi'tune ? 1. Does the boy get {a) punishment ; it is deserved. 2. When did you breakfast? He has not yet break- fasted. 3. What has he answered ? He answered nothing. 4. You have received and misused the money. 2. No, 1 believe he has deserved punishment. 4. He has contradicted his brother (Dative). 6. We have accomplished the deed. 8. He bequeathed her (i^r) a large fortune. 10. Yes, and she misused it. II. Separable Verbs. (Conjugated like their root verbs, which look out on Eeference-Page N, if irregular.) bei'tragen, to contribute ein'ne(;men, to take in, earn fort'fe^en (reg.), to continue ^er'bringen, to bring hither ab'f^Iflgen, to refuse an'Üeiben (reg.), to dress auffiel) en, to rise, get up aufgel;en, to rise {of stars) auö'geben, to spend (money) tOÖ'taffen, to let free, go \ iveg'tragen, to carry away mit'ge^en, to go with [one) ! WCg'bleiben, to remain aioay nai^'fe^en, to look after j ivieber'fommcn, to come again nieber'laffen (ftcl;), to settle : ju'bringen, to spend (time) 1)in'UQ(n (reg.), to lay there 'oOXfttUm (reg.), to i7itrodtice ju'mac{;en (reg.), to close Examples. 1. bleiben ®ie baö Äinb an ! (So ifi angeKeibet. 2. Sann fle|)en ®ie auf? dt n?irb mitgeben. 3. ©eben ©ieöiet (Selb auö? 3c|) ^abe lein (Selb. 4. So bringen ®ie Sftve 3cit ju? 3ni C^aufe. 1. Dress the child ! It is dressed. 2. When do you get up ? He will go ivith (us). 3. Do you spend much money ? I have no money. 4. Where do you spend your time ? In the house. Exercise. 1. Do not refuse his request ! Let thebu-d loose (go). 3, I have introduced him (i^n) to the count (Dative). 5. We have spent this money. 7. They have come again. (C/sefein.) 9. I have already introduced him (if)n). 2. Bring my book into my room hither (^ier^W). 4. Get up ; the sun has (is) risen. 6. I contributed to the work (ju with Dative). 8. Will you introduce the man to the king ? 10, We do not earn much money ? Exercise on buvc^ . ♦ ♦, übev ♦ ♦ ♦, um ♦ ♦ ., UUtev ♦ ♦ » 1, We have translated (überfe^en, insep.) the exercise. 3. The mük has run over (über'faufen, sep.). 5. The man was (became) run over (überfahren, insep. ) 2. They have crossed (über'fe^cn sep.) (over) the river, 4. I returned (um'fe^retl, sep.) and went away. 6. Those ships have sunk (unter'ge^en, sep.). 56 German Grammar Reference-Page Q. Personal Pronouns. FIRST PERSON. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Nom. \^,I tt)tr, we Ace. intct», we, myself unö, ?(s, ourselves Gen. meiner, of me unfer(er), of us Dat. nur, to me UJ1Ö, to us, ourselves SECOND PERSON. SINGULAR. bu, thou bicf), thee, thyself bciner, of thee fcir, to thee THIRD PERSON. SINGULAR MASCULINE. Nom. er, he Ace. i^n, him Gen. feiner, of Mm Dat. if;m, to him SINGULAR FEMININE. fie, she (Ace. her) X^XiX, of her \\)X, to her SINGULAR NEUTER. i€, it [feiner, of if] [i^m, to iti i^x, ye eitcf), ye eucr(er), of ye [you) CU(^, to ye {you) PLURAL M. F. and N. fie [they] ; ©ie, you t^rer, of them ; S^rer, of you i^nen, to them; 3^nen, to you Notes on the Personal Pronouns. (1) RememLer that the 3cl person PUiral is used in addressing a stranger politely, as : Serben Sic gc{;cn? Will you go ? ^d) "fringe Sl)ncn baö 23ud;, / bring [to) you the book. (2) Be careful to make the possessive adjective agree with the Personal pronoun in person, as : 3^u I;af! bcinen 3iO(f, thou hast thy coat. ®ie fetten ^f)vc ®ö|)ne, you see your sons. [Of course this rule only applies to a case where the same person (or persons) is referred to.] (3) Personal pronouns must strictly agree in Gender with the nouns they refer to ; thus the English it may be ev, or fie, or es?, according as it refers to a masculine, feminine, or neuter Noun, as : 2Ö0 i^ ber §Ut V Where is the hat ? 6-v ifi (;ier, It is here (etc.) (4) The oblique cases (Accusative, Genitive, Dative) may be governed by prepositions, as: S)On ii)m, ß-om him. Notice however, that when the Personal Pronoun refers to a thing, it is preferable to use Genitive and Dative of fcerfetbe, or biefetbe, or baöfclbe, in which the definite article is declined, and fctbe is merely an adjective in the First form (see Ref. -Page G), as : Where is my stick? 1 am in need of it. 2ßo ijl mein ®tOcf ? 3c^ bebarf bcSfeltieu. (5) Moreover, if the thing referred to be an abstract, or of the neuter gender, the Dative and Accusative pronouns are replaced by ba . . . (bar . . . before a vowel) or I)ici: ... as prefixes to the preposition, as : '^laben ®ie l>at»on ge{;ört'? Have you heard of it {there-of). Reflexive Pronouns. myself, thyself, ourselves, and yourselves are borrowed from the Personal Pronouns above ; but himself, herself, itself, themselves, have only one invariable form: \iü) (Dative and Accusative) ic^ freue mld^, I rejoice (myself), but : cr frcut ^äf [not i(;n) ; ®ie freuen liä). N.B. — (a) All reflexive verbs take "l^oöcn" in their Compound tenses, and all, except ten, govern the Accusative of the reflexive pronoun. (6) fetbfi is often added to strengthen the reflexive pronoun, as : er XU^i ft(^ felbfi, (c) If myself, etc., are not reflective, they are rendered by felbfl without any pronoun, as : The king himself, ber Äönig felftft; I shall go myself, i^ iverbe feltift gelten. German Grammar 57 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page Q. I. On the Personal Prono^ins. Some verbs govern the Genitive in German, which do not in English, as : bebiivfeil/ to loant ; gebeitfen, to remember ; fpotten, to make fun of, laugh at. 1. 2Bir ^ahiw feiner uiib 3^«t beburft. 2. Serben @te feiner fpotten ? Sf^ein, i^ bebarf feiner. 3. 2)ie gran I;at itnferer getiacf)t (or an nnö . , ). 4. ©eben ®te mir ta^ 93ud^ unb ntc^t i^m. 5. @a()en ®ie i(;n? 9Jein, aber ic^ ^abe ®ie gefet^en. TFe Äave loanted him and you. Will you laugh at him ? No, I need Mm. The woman has remembered (thought of) us. Give the book to me and not to him. Did you see him ? No, but I saiv you. Exercise. 1. I beg you, give me (Dat.) your pen. Here it is. 3. He will bring you (Dat.) our exercises. 5. I hope, you will believe us (Dat.) and not liim (Dat.). 7. Here is your ring. Take it (masc). 9. I have not heard of it (there-of = bai>On). 2. Where did you hear him ? In the town. 4. Do not laugh at him (Gen.) ; he is very ill. 6. Are you going to (ju) him ? No, to her. 8. Here is her book. Do you need it ? 10. Are you satisfied with it? (there-with. ) II. On the Reflexive Verbs. Some reflexive verbs govern a genitive (besides the Ace. of the reflexive Pronoun), as : fic^ erinnern, to remember ; ft(| erbarmen, to piiy ; [tc^ erfreuen, to enjoy, etc. 1. Sir erinnerten unö feiner unb i^rer. 2. Sitte, erbarmen ®ie ft^ unfer(er). 3. Äteibe bid; an ! 3c^ H^e i"ic^ angeHeibet. 4. f)aben ®tc fid; f^on gewafrijen? 3« ntein |)err. 5. Sir erfreuen unö fe|>r guter (53efunb^eit. We remembered him and her. Pray, take pity on us [pity us). Dress yourself! 1 have dressed myself. Have you already ivashed yourself? Yes, Sir. We enjoy very good health. Exercise. 1 . Do you remember me, my dear friend ? 3. Does he enjoy good health ? 5. We have refused to (ju) go there (bai;in). 7. You must not praise yourself. 9. Have they resolved, to do this ? (Inf. last. ) 2. yes ! I remember you very well (gut). 4. No, he has caught cold (fic^ erfiilten). 6. We have resolved not to go there. 5. Take pity on (Pity) her, Sir. 10. No, they refuse to do that (that to do). Difference between myself, thyself, etc., as reflexive and as not-reflexive Pronouns. |)a^cn nitii; gerufen (not reflexive). You yourself have called me. ©te felbft Exercise. 1. We saw you ourselves (not reflexive). 3. You yourself came to (ju) us. 5. Thou hast seen it thyself. 7. The men sold the horses themselves. H See Q. {N.B. b and c). 2. We dressed ourselves (reflexive). 4. I have washed myself, myself (emphatic). 6. She remembered you and him. 8. They cheated themselves (emphatic). 58 German Grammar. Dictionary of {To be learnt in to be able, fonnen (K.), üetmögcn (K.) above, über (Dat. and Ace.) (0.) to accomplish, 'OOUhxittQitl (sep.) 071 account of, tvcgetl (Gen.) (0.) after, nacf» (Dat.) (0.) again, IVlcbcr against, \v>iber... (insep.) (P.) gegen (Ace.) (0.) ago, feit... (Dat.) (0.) to alloio, ertauben (reg.) to be allowed, bürfen (K.) along[side of), tängö (0.), entlang also, auc^ (conjunction) bad, fc^Iec|)t (adj. and adverb) to beg, bitten (irreg.) (N.) to bequeath, I;interIa(Ten (insep.) Berlin, 33ertin 5evenig) German Grammar. 59 a little, ein IDCntg (adverb) to live, leben, iiio^ncn (reg.) London, Sonbon loose, frei (frei'laffen) may, fönnen, bürfen (K.) meet, begegnen (reg. with Dat.) n the midst of, inmitten (Gen.) (0.) Miss, (mein) gräutcin the mountain, t>er S3erg, — eö, — e to need, braui^en (with ace.) (reg.) bewürfen (with gen.) (p. 43) new, neu (adj.) the night, bie '^d'iji, —, — e now, je^t, nun to he obliged, müffcn (K.) on, auf (Dat. and Ace.) (0.) opposite, gegenüber (Dat.) (0.) ought, fotten (K. ) out {of), auö (Dat.) (0.) over (across), über (Dat. Ace.) (0.) Paris, ^ariö the permission, tie (Sriaubnif to pity, fi(|) erbarmen (Gen.) the pond, ber Zi\^, — eö, — e the prohibition, baö SSerbot, — eö the rain, ber 9iegen, — ö rajjid, f^ineö, reipenb «0 receive, erhalten (irreg.) to recommend, empfel;len (irreg.) to refuse, Deriveigern (reg.) to remain, bleiben (irreg.) to remember, ftd; erinnern (reg.) to request, bitten (irreg. ) to resolve, ftc^ entf4)Iie^en (irreg.) to return, jurüd'lc^ren (reg. ) to be right, Stecht ^abeu to rise [of men), auffielen (sep.) {of stars, sun), anfge{;en (sep.) Dictionary — continued. the river, ber B^Hp/ — iTP»^/ -ffe round, runb (adj.) turn-round, um'fe(;ren (reg.) satisfied, jufriebeu (adj.) the school, bie ©c^ule, — , — n the sea, baö 3)?eer, — eö, — e to see, fe^en (irreg.) self {selves), fetbfi to send, fc^icfen (reg.) fenbcn (46) several, mel;rere (adj.) this side of, bieöfeitö (Gen.) (0.) that side of, jenfettö (Gen.) (0.) to sing, fingen (irreg.) Sir/ mein ^err! to sit, fi^en (irreg. ) to go to sleep, einf^tafen (irreg.) the soldier, ber ©olbat, — en, — en soon, batb (adv. ) to speak, fprac^en (irreg.) to spend {time), ju'bringen to spend {money), auö'gcben in spite of, trO^ (Gen.) (0.) to steal, flehten (irreg.) still, nO^ (adv.) the srm, bie ©onne, — , — n to tale, nehmen (very irreg.) to thank, banfen (Dat.) (reg.) there -{thither), bOrtH« er einmal ju fc^en. 6. So bif} bu benn gewefen, feit id; bic^ faf; ? 7. 3cf; '^in öiet I;erumgereifl feit 2Setf;nad;ten. 8. 3d; tt)ar and; einige S:a3e in a}Ziind;en. 9. Unb wie f;at eö bir bort gefatien, ilart ? 10. iDf; ! ©e^r gut, banfe; id) traf "oWU greunbe. 11. ®a^jl bu au^ unferen atten 3}ZüÜer ? 12. 3a, unb er täf t bi^ freunblid)ft griif en. 13. 25ie ge|)t eö if;m in feiner neuen f)eimat^ ? 14. 3ieni^ic^ Qut er :^at ein guteö ©ef^äft. 15. |)afi bu ben ®o^n beö reit|)en 33. getroffen ? 16. 5^ein, cr ^atte bic Uniüerfttät üertaffen. 17. @r war auf 9teifen, in 3tafien, gtaub' i^. 18. a)?an fagt, eö ge^e i(;m n>ieber ctwaö beffer. 19. Sao ^attc er benn ? Sar er fran! ?. 20. ®r litt an täglid)em Äopfwe|). 21. (Sr foil ju üiet flubirt laBen, fagt man. 22. 9^un, baö ivar nie ber gatt mit unö. 23. Srum |)aben it)ir auc^ ni^t fo »iel Äopfwe^. 24. Unb n^irb ber junge 35. lange fortbleiben ? 25. Stein, i^ glaube, er tt)irb batb jurücffef;ren. 26. Sann rt>irb er in'ö ©ef^äft eintreten. 27. ®o ^at er feine ©tubien ganj aufgegeben? 28. 3a, er foü ®efd;äftömann iverben. 29. Sarf i^ bir eine (Zigarre anbieten? 30. SfJein, id; ^laying ; the mother is decking herself out ; Grandmother is spinning ; great- grandmother, bent, Is sitting behind the oven in the cushions : How oppressive the air (is blowing) feels ! 2. The child says: " To-morrow is (a) holiday ! ' ' How I will play in the green meadow ! " Hoio I will skip through vale and hill! " Hotv I will gather many beautiful floioers ! " The green fields, of them I am fond !^' Do you, hear, how the thunder groivls {angrily) ? ! 3. Tlie mother says : " To-morrow is holiday ! " Then ive all will keep up the merry feast ; " / myself, I am preparing my holiday-dress ; " Life, it has still joy after sorrow, " Then the sun shines, even as gold ! " Do you hear, how the thunder roars ! ? 4. Grandmother says : " To-morrow is holiday ! " Grandmother has no holiday ! "i^She must cook the dinner, and spin (for) the dress ; " Life is (but) cares and much work ! " Happy is he, luho did what he ought to have done" ! Do you hear, hoio the thunder roars ! ? 5. Great-grandmother says : " To-morrow is holiday ! " Most of all I should like to die to-morrow : " / caw 710 longer sing nor joke ; " / cannot be busy nor ivork hard ; " What good am I any longer in the loorld ? ! " Do you see, how the lightning strikes there ? ! 6. They hear it not, they see it not; The room is aflame, is nothing but light. Great-grandmother, grandmother, mother and child A II together are struck by the flash of lighting. One stroke terminates four lives: — And to-morroio is holiday ! FOURTH TERM The student should test his knowledge of Grammar continually in the Translation lesson by parsing and analysing. Some few words from pages 86 and 87, a few sentences from page 88, and a few lines of the poems on pages 89 and 90, should still form an integral part of every lesson in Grammar. The Dictionaries, Sentences, and Poems given in Terms 1, 2, and 3 might also with advantage be repeated. 63 64 German Grammar Reference-Page R. The Numerals. A. All Numerals are based upon the Cardinal Numbers, used for counting l = einö 6=fec{;ö li = citf (or elf) 21 = ein unb jwanjtg 100= ein ^unbert 2=jtt)ei 7 = fteben I2=jrt)örf 22=jtt)ei unt) jivanjtg 200=jn)ei^unbett 3=t»rci 8 = a(^t I3=t>teijel;n 30=breiftig 1000= ein taufcnb 4=ütcr 9 = neun 14 = tiictjef;n, etc. 40=ütcräifl 2000=jtt)ei taufenb 5= fünf lO=jet;n 20=jn)anatg 50 = fünf5ig, etc. 1,000,000= cine 5Wiaion The above will enable the intelligent pupil to form all numbers up to a million. All cardinal numbers are invariable, but Jltiei and hxtx, if used without any determinative before a noun (expressed or understood) become : Genitive — tx, Dative — eiu One in counting dates, etc., is cin§; if used before a noun, it is ein, eine, ein; if used without a noun, it is etnev, eine, etnei^ ; one after an adjective is neuer translated. B. From the above Cardinal Numbers are formed : 1. The Ordinal Numbers ; add — te up to nineteen, and — fie from twenty upwards, as : ber (bte, ba^), }^\\>t\it, the second; ber etn unb jWanjigfte, the twenty-first, except only bev evfie, the first, and ber bvttte, the third. Notice. — All these are adjectives, and may be declined as such [see 3 forms, Eef.-Page G]. 2. The Multiplicatives : (These may be used as adjectives, — uiflt then becomes — mattg.) {a) add — ma\ without exception [etltö drops f^/firsf] as : jc|)nntrtl, ten times. (b) add — f rtd) or f ä(tig [etn^ drops sg, first] as : etilfacl), one-fold, simple ; fed)^fttJ^, six-fold ; 'OXtxYAlix^, four-fold ['fflC^ and ^fäUlCJ are synonymous]. 3. The Variatives : (always invariable) add : — evtet [eülö drops s^, first^ otherwise no exceptions : eiuevtet, one hind {all the same); Jivölfevtet, tivelve hinds. 4 The Distinctives : (always invariable) add : — tend to the Cardinals up to nineteen, and — fiend from twenty upwards (seldom used), as : JlX^eiiend, secondly ; Jlvail^tg, — ^CXl^, tweniiethly. Only exceptions : ixftcn^/ firstly ; and "Oxittctt^, thirdly. 5. The Fractionals : (always invariable) (really compounds of bev Xtil, the part, abbreviated into —HI) ; add — it\ to the Cardinals up to nineteen, and — fiel from twenty upwards, as : etrt fecf;ÖieI, a sixth ; etn bvet^t'öfiel, one-thirtieth. Only exception, ein bvittet, a third. Note, — half as an adjective is l^«I6; as: boö %atb [with ^aih declined] or anbcrt^olb, [invariable] (half of the second). 2h. is either jivei unb cin I;atb or britt^alb [half of the third). 3i is either btei Unb ein Dalb or Uiert^alb (half of the fourth). (These are the only peculiarities of this kind.) German Gi'a7ninar. 65 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page R. . Examples .• 1. Write out German for : 56, 27. ®ec()ö unb funfjig. ©tcbcn lint» jivanjt'g. 2. In the year 1886. ^m ^oX)X(i ac|)tje{)n{;unt)crt fcc^ö unb acl;tjtg. 3. At what o'clock did he yo? At 9 o'clock. Urn toic biet Ul)r gtcng er? Itm licim U^r. 4. How old ivas the hoy ? Which one? This one. 2Sie att JDar bcr Äiiabe? SSctc^er? ^icfer. 5. ire have one good hiife and one had one. SBil" I;aben etil gutcä -CZeffer Ullb ein fcf;Icc^teÖ. 6. 32 a»fZ 76 are 108. 3tt>ei «nb bretf tg unb fec^\? unb fteftenjtg ftnb ein ^itnbevt unb acf;t. 7. The hooks of two or three hoys. X)ie 23üc^er stocict Ober brelct iJnaben. 8. T'Ae &oofo 0/ these two hoys and this one. 1}ie 33üc^er biefer jttici Knaben unb biefeö. 9. At 9.15 or 9.30. Urn ein Eßiertei nait^ neun U^r, ober um i)alh se^n U^r. 10. No, at a quarter to ten. 9?ein, um ein SSicrtet öor (or \>\i) 5e(;n Wijx. Exercise. 1. 36 and 142 are 178. 3. At what o'clock will they come ? 5. You have two diligent boys and an idle [one]. 7. We went there at a quarter to seven. 9. When did he die ? In the year 1715. 11. Do you see the dog of these two children? 2. How old are you ? I am 16 years old, 4. I believe they will come at 5.15 or 5.30. 6. Yes, and you have only two idle [ones]. 8. You were late, you should have come at 6.30. 10. Three boys' caps are here. (The caps of 3 boys.) 12. Give me a new pen, and not an old [one]. B. Examples: 1. Henry III. or IV. |)einric^ ber Dritte ober ber Siertc. 2. What day of the month is to-day? T>n jpiet>ielte beö 3)?onatö tfi ^eute? 3. What day of the month had ice yesterday ? ©en im'cöietteu beö 2}?onatö flatten ivir gef^em V 4. It is the 23(7 0/ March to-day. go if! ber bret uiib jwaujigfte 5Wärj ^eute. 5. 7 times 5 is 35. (Siebenmal fünf finb fünf unb breif ig. 6. Will you have tivo or three hinds of'pa'per? Söotlen @ie jiDeierlei Ober breicrtei papier? 7. I paid this threefold or fourfold. ^^ \i(x\iz bie^ breifacf; Ober öierfa^ beja^It. 8. Fourthly : he is a fool. SBiertcnö : er ift ein ^axx. 9. On the 16th of July he died. %m fe($Öje^nten ^liii fiarb er (Inversion, see p. 38). 10. We ivaited half an hour or more. 2Bir Jvartetcn eine ^atbe Stunbe ober mc^r. 11. This is only the half of your boot 2)iefcö (C. a. 2) ift nur bie |)älfte ^i/xs^ Sucf;eö. 12. I a7id -^Tj are f| 3tt'ci brittel unb brci ^tijwttl finb neun unb stvanjig breif igftel. Exercise. 1. Henry the Eighth of (i)On) England. 3. We have the 31st [of] March. 5. You have six kinds [of] knives there. 7. They (are) died on the 27th of July. 9. He gave me half an (a half) apple. 11. What are land I? ^. 2. What day of the mouth have we to-day ? 4. What are (Sas? finb) 9 times 12 ? 108. 6. He is firstly poor and secondly ill. 8. Give me one-half (subst.) of your apple. 10. It is 5 minutes past (after) seven o'clock. 12. I will not pay him ten times [over]. N.B. — Omit the words in [brackets], and write the numbers, etc., fully out in words. 66 German Grammar Reference-Page S. I. Possessive Pronouns. Distinguish Adjectives (before a noun) from Pronouns (not before a noun). The Possessive Adjectives, mefll, bctn, my, iliy, etc., are given and declined in Eeference-Page 0. h. The Possessive Pronouns are, if preceded by definite article, formed by adding ?ig to the adjectives, as : bev meintge, ber beintge, nilne, thine, etc. These are declined like adjectives in the 1st Form (see Reference-Page G). They are often abbreviated into ber meine, ber betue, etc. ; or if not preceded by the definite article, into meiner, meine, meinet, etc., declined like biefev. Thus we have: mine=ttv (bie, ba$?) metntßc, or: bev (bie, bas) meine, or: meiner *e -eö; thine='t)tx (bte, baö) beinige, or : ber (bie, baö) bcine, or : beiner (beine, beineö), etc. Bememhcr .• The Possessive Pronoun must agree in gender, as well as in number, with the thing possessed, but its case depends on its own verb, as : bieö i{t mein ^unb ; ^ier ift ber feinige; l;a6en ©ie ben S^rigen yerloren? Note. — The English Possessive is sometimes rendered by the definite article, with the verb reflexive, as : ivit ^Cilen un8 bie ^Jällbe gcwafc^en, We have (to ourselves) washed our (the) hands. II. Demonstrative Pronouns. biefer and jener may be used as adjectives, i.e. before nouns, and also as Pronouns, i.e. not before a noun. The Declension is the same, given in Eeference-Page 0. a- [Remember to use it neuter singular invariable when separated by fein from its noun.] To the above two we may add the following, used either as adjectives or pronouns, but always agreeing with their noun in gender and numher, and with their verb in case : berj'enige, bie|enige, bai3|enige, bie/enigen, this, these, those ; and varied in the same way : berfelte, the same ; ber näm(irf;e, the same. In these decline the definite article ber, bie, baö as if it stood alone, and decline : jieniße, felbe, nnmtid)e, as adjectives in the 1st Form (see Reference-Page G.). N.B. berjenige has an abbreviated form : ber, bie, ba6 ; bie; declined thus : M. S. Norn. ber Ace. ben Gen. bcffen Dat. bem F. s. N. S. PLURAL. jbie baö bie beten beffen beret ber bem bcitcrt M. S. betienfge denjenigen beSjenigcn bemienigen biejenige bctjenigen bcticiugen baöienige beöjenigcn bemjenigen bicjenigen betienigen benjenigen Where not differing in form from the definite article, the pronoun ber, etc., is pronounced emphatically. III. Interrogative Pronouns. The adjectives, )r)etd)er ? which, etc., can also be used without nouns after them [see ? becomes: 2Ö0Ö für einer? eine? eine^? as 0. a. h.], hut: SSaÖ fÜV ein ♦ ♦ .? u-hat sort of pronoun. There is besides these only one real Interrogative Pronoun, Wer ? who ? ivaö ? what ? of which the Genitive only, ttJeffen ? whose ? can be used before a substantive. Declension of Sue tf who? Nom. 2öer? who?\ Sao? what? Ace. 2Öen V whom? Sao ? luhat ? Gen. Seffeu? whose? SeffenV of what? Dat. 2ßem ? to ivhom ? [Sag ? to what ?] German Grammar 67 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page S. T. 1. This IS my ring, where is hers 1 2. He was not in your house, but in viine. 3. Tour houses and theirs are old. 4. She has loounded her hand. 5. Have you lost your pencil or mine ? 1. Is this (C. a, 2) your dog or his ? 3. He will bring his brother, and I mine. 5. Have you your books ? Yes, we have ours, 7. They have washed their hands (see 4 above). 9. Who has a friend ? I have lost mine. 11. These (bieö) are your pens, not oiirs. 1. Sicfcö i^ mein 9ttng. So ifl ber irrige. 2. @r Jvar nicl;t tu 3^rem f^aiife, fonbern in bcm meinigen. 3. 3^re |)äufcr unb bie i|)ri3en ftnb alt. 4. ®ic ()at fid; bie -^anb »enwunbct. 5. |)aben @ie 3()fcn Stcifiift »erloren ober ben meinigen. Exercise. 2. It is his. I have lost mine. 4. Was he in my house ? No, in (the) his. 6. I have brought my boots and yours. 8. Why do you ask my brother and not his ? 10. Ours died a year ago (ÜOt with dat.). 12. This is my pencil ; where is yours ? IL 1. These are our friends, not Charles' [those of Charles) 2. The man, whom ice remember (with gen. ). 3. Was it this boy, or {that of) that gentleman'' s ? 4. Have you my letter or {that of) my brother's ? 5. / have {that of) your brother's. 1. 3)iefcva0 für eineö? 3. SEem f;at er ben 2(pfe( gegeben? 4. 2ßcfren33ücf)er finb baö? S)?eine? 5. ®r »ertor feinen greunb. Se(c(;cnV Exercise. 2. Whose exercises are these ? They are his. 4. What are you doing ? Nothing. 6. What sort of dog have j'ou lost ? 8. Who is there ? Whose house is this ? General Exercise. 1. ^Vhose dog have you there ? (ba) 3. It is not my garden, it is his. 5. I have mine, yours are in your room. 2. I have my dog, not my son's (that of my son). 4. Have you my roses or yours ? 6. Why do you lose my knife and not yours ? 68 German Grammar Reference-Page T. The Comparison of Adjectives. As in English, Adjectives may be in the Positive, Comparative, or Superlative. A. The Adjective used as a Predicate, i.e. invariable (after "to be," or "to become"). 1. Positive, (-) . \ fans \ long 2. Comparative. (a) of Superiority . (b) of Equality. (-1) ct at^ longer than ebenfo ( — ) aXi ebeiifo tang atö as lonij as (c) of Inferiority. iDentger (— )alö ivetüger lang alö less long than 3. Superlative. (a) of Superiority. (b) of Inferiority. am (— ) ften am längftcn the longest am tt)enigflen (— ) am ttjenigficn lang the least long Of these only 2 (a) and 3 (rt) offer any peculiarities, as folio vrs : — (i) Adjectives of more than one syllable, and those ending in ail can never modify, (ii) Most adjectives of one syllable, having a, 0, U as vowel, modify these vowels ; except : bla^, pale bunt, variegated faIfc(;,/aZse frol^, merry |Ott), loveable, kind Uax, dear fa^m, lame I X0\), raw, coarse matt, languid ritnb, round plnnn.\ plump I fan ft, soft fc|)Ian!, slim ftolj, proud toll, mad Wll full ja^m, tame and a few rarely- used ones besides (iii) For the sake of euphony, adjectives ending in #et in the Positive, drop e before adding ?ev to the t for the Comparative 2, (a), as eitel, vain : titUx, vainer ; also adjectives ending in Ö, ^, j, or in more than two consonants, insert ?e before adding ^fteit for the Superlative, 3 (a) ; as : [ii^, siveet, am füpefteil, the sweetest. (iv) The following eight adjectives have further irregularities : — 1. 2 a. ( cfjev, \ vale, soon i .... Ysooiu { fi:ul)cr, J gem, vnUingly Ueftcv, rather gro9, great gut, good größer, greater 16cffcr, better 3 a. tttn c I) eft CM, the soonest am I i elften, [best) am 9 V off ten, the greatest am tieften, the best 2 a. 3 a. am f;öc^f}en, the highest am nädiften, the nearest ant met ft en, the most am u^cnigflen, ) the am mtnbeften, i least ^OC^, high l)i3^cr, higher na^e, near näl^cr, nearer Uiel, much ntel)v, more N.B. — If tAvo qualities are compared, 2« is formed with me^V . . . oB invariably. B. The Adjective used as Attribute, i.e. before a noun, must, after its Comparative or Superlative is formed according to the above rules, strictly change for gender, case, and number, as the Positive does, in the three forms (see Eeference-Page G.); thus — Form (i) : bcr gvöf^ere 9}?ani1, tlie greater man ; tc^ ))CLlt bcn fc{;öneven ^unb, / have the more beautiful dog. Form (ii) : citt attevcS ©C^lop, an older castle; ev tft MtCtn tiebfter 33lllt>ev, he is my dearest brother. Form (iii) : kffevec SSetll, better luine ; Wix l)aW\\ ((iligerc 5tllfgakn, lue have longer exercises. N.B. — If used attributively, the ^' am" in the Superlative is dropped. O. The Adjective used as an Adverb has the same comparison exactlj^ as when a Pre- dicate (see A. above) ; as : ev fifjVieb am (ailgftett, he wrote the longest. There are, moreover, two adverbial forms of some adjectives in the Superlative : (i) aiifö 6ejle, aufö ^öä)ftc, etc. And (ii) kften^, :pöcl;ften^. (in the best tvay). (in the highest degree). (in the best manner), (at the most). German Grammar. 69 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page T. A. Example: (i) Compare fully : \6^'iiX\ , heautiful ; fc^Iec^t, 6ac?; gut, j/oofZ ; t\)t[, noble. Comparative SUPE Positive. of Superiority. of Equality. ()/■ Inferiority. of Superiority. fd^ön fc^öucv (XU ebenfo fc^ön atö weniger fcf)ön atö am fc^önften fc^tec^t fc^Iec^ter aU cknfo fc^Iecf;t aI>J lüentger fc^lec|)t atö am f^tec^tcflen gut öcffcr atä ebeufo gut alö weniger gut alö am öcftcn ebel cbrer alö ebenfo efcet alö weniger efcet atö am ebeiften (ii) Compare shortly : ^dV^, proud j alt, old; Positive. Comparative. Superlative. alt noljer Otter am ftotjcflen am ältejleu I, h/fjh; fxnfler, da7-k. Positive. Comparative. fxnfler flöget finfterer of Inferiority. am wenigften fd)ön am wcnigfien fc})Iec^t am wcnigfien gut am menigfteu ebet Superlative. am ^öcf;ften am ftnjterften Exercise. Compare fully : faiiä) , false ; QXO% great ; tüX^, short ; hau, soon. Compare shortly : Wenig, little ; i>ta^, pale; jung, young; 'oiil, much. B. Example: Decline, Singular and Plural : ber ebtere ®raf, the nobler count; ein jüngere^ SJZäbc^en, a younger girl ; mein fcf)önjieö 5KefCer, my most beautiful hüfe ; and befferer SSein, better wine. Singular (adj. 1st Form). Nom. ber ebterc ®raf Ace. ben ebtercn ©rafen Gen. bcö ebtercn ©rafen Dat. bem eblcrcn ©rafen Plural (1st Form). Nom. bie eblercn ©rafen Ace. Gen. ber ebterctt ©rafen Dat. ben eblercn ©rafen Singular (2d Form). ein iüngercS SJZäbc^en einc^ jüngeren 2)?äbc^enö einem jüngeren 9}?äb4'en Plural (3d Form). jüngere 9i)?äbd;en jüngerer 9)?äbct;en jüngeren ^Wäbd^en Singular (2d Form). mein fiti)nf}c§ 3}?effer mcineo fc^iönften 5Weffer^ meinem fffjönflcn ^Keffer Plural (2d Form), meine fcfjiJnflcn 9)?effer meiner f($ij.nflen 2>Zeffer meinen f^önflen 9)?cffern Singular (3d Form). ( befferer SBcin \ beffercn SSein befferen Sßeineö bcfferem Seine Plural (3d Form), befferc Seine befferer Seine beffercn Seinen Notice : Decline article and nonn according to their own rules ; and the adjective according to Reference Page Gr. Exercise. Decline, Singular and Plural: fein größter g^eunb, his greatest friend ; biefe fanftere '^XO.W, this more gentle woman; jlreugf^e^ 35erbot, most severe prohibition. General Exercise. 1. Have you seen my most beautiful dog? 3. I have lost my dearest brother. 5. No, he is the falsest man in the tcwn. 7. You ought (fottten) to sell the younger horse. 9. We are at the most (see T., C.) twenty men. 2. I have never seen a more beautiful dog. 4 Have you ever (je) heard a falser word ? 6. Has he given (to) you [any] fresher water ? 8. He is (the) most proud; she is (the) most gentle. 10. I am astonished in the highest degree. 70 German Gram^nar Reference-Page U, Indefinite Pronouns and Adjectives. I. Used with or without a noun after them ; in the latter case often with a Capital initial. Those marked with an asterisk (*) are indeclinable. Declined like Adjectives : fccr cine, the one bcr anbere, the other {one) bcr licinit{d;e, the same {one) bie tlicipen, most {men) atteö, everything alte, all {people) beibe, both einige, several *zi\X)Oi^, something ieber («e, »eö), each {one) fein (»er, »e, -eö), no {one) manner, many a {one) *me|»r, more mcf;rere, several *nic^tÖ, nothing Wi, much (singular) öiete, many {men) IVent'g, little (singular) \X>t\\\(},i , few {men) Thus : f)tet ftub öcibc ^Jnvlbeu ; tC^ f;abc «cibc gefe^en. Here are both [the:] boys ; I have seen both. N.B.—Qat before nic^tö or iventg makes them emphatic, as : flat 9^id;tö, nothing at all. ivgcit^ increases the indefinite, uncertain meaning of etivaö ; also of ©(net and 3fnTanb. ®r f;at irgcnt» (Sttt^aÖ gefauft, he has bought some thing or other. II. Used as nouns, and never followed by a noun : 3ebcrmann, every one ; 3fntanb, som.e one ; man, some one ; 5^iemanb, no one. N.B. — man is the French on; it stands for the English we, they, somebody; or the Passive, and must have its verb in 3d pers. Singular, as : man fagt^^Äey say, one says, it is said, people are saying, etc. one's, before a noun, is fein = /ies. One loses one's money. 9J?an tiertiett fein ©etb. Notice : (i) ^ebermanu, 3enianb and 5tiemanb take =eÖ for Genitive, and do not change for the other cases; as : (Sx ifi 3cbermannc8 greunb, he is everybody's friend. (ii) not anything cannot be rendered by nt^t CttVaÖ j nor not anybody by ni^t 3fntanb ; they must be rendered by nothing = nid)t^, and nobody = ^ieman'l>. Adverbs. Most English adverbs have exact equivalents in German, which the Dictionary will readily furnish. Here are mentioned a few only of each class : A. Pure Adverbs. PLACE. rec^tÖ, to the right linU, to the left ba, he7-e S)Otn, in front auf en, outside TIME. fonfl:, formerly je^t, noiv einfl, 07ice feitbcm, since nod;, still, yet AFFIRMATION. ia, yes gelvif, certainly fretlid;, of course \Val)Xiiä), indeed iebenfaUö, certainly NEGATION. nein, no Uint^WtQ^, by no means nt^t, not butd;auö nt^t, by no means DOUBT. incHcic^t, perhaps fit)U>CrIid»/ hardly Wa()rfc^etnUc^, probably im\'\t\\)a'\i,doubt- ful QUANTITY. Jtjenig, little ganj, ivhoUy genug, enough faitm, scarcely ungefähr, about INTERROGATION. moV where Jt>iet)iet? how much JVO|)in? whither tt)Ol;er? whence [see p. 78.] B. Adverbial Expressions. In these German is very rich ; a few only are given here : Place : ju |)aufe, at home; nacJ; f)aufe, home. Time : eineö St^ageÖ, one day ; »on ^iii JU Z^xi,from time to time; ^eut ^W %aQi, now-a-days. Affirmation : auf jcben ^all, in every case ; oI)ne 3>t'CtfeI, tvithout doubt. Negation : auf feinen ga(f, in no case. Notice : Most adjectives may be used as Adverbs of manner, — they are then invariable. -^•-ß-— With verbs of motion, where? is toofjin? {ivhither) ; there is brtljin or bortfjin; /ie?-e is T;ierl;er or baf;er [uhere is too, only with verbs of rest]. See also Ref. -Page O. Where is he? 2Ö0 if^ er? but : Where is he going? 2Bo|)tn ge(;t er? German Grammar. 71 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page U. On I . Examples : 1. Most men love themselves. 2)ie mciflen 5D?enfc^cn lieben jtcl; fetbft. 2. Give him some thing or other, pray, ©cbctt ®ie i\)\W irgcnb Gta^aÖ, bitte. 3. Few are satisfied with little. Senige jtnt» mit Seiiig (or Senigem) siifi-icben. 4. Ma7iy a one luished something impossible. TlmÜJiX lVÜnfc(;te iWX'ixi Unmööticf;eö. 5. He has little, I have nothing at all. (Jr ^at IVCllig ; id) |)abc gar S^ic^tö. Exercise. 1. Several boys brought me (Dat.) beautiful presents. 3. Something is better than nothing at all. 5. No one likes this idle boy here. 7. All blamed that vain man. 9. The one and the other have seen him. 2. The one or the other has done this. 4. I have seen the same man several times (itlfti), 6. We punished both boys too (ju) little. 8. Many-a-one fears his own shadow. 10. Much wishes often [for] more. On II. Examples: 1. He has not found anything there. ®r ^at bOrt S'Jid^t^ gcfuuben. 2. It is every one's duty to do his best. Co ifl 3efcctntaimö ^fticfjt fein S?eüeö ju t^un. 3. People say he has died in Africa. Tlan fagt, cr f ci in 2lfrifa gej^orben. 4. I cannot give you anything. 3^ faiin Sollen ^iü)ti geben. 5. Some one has stolen my little dog. ^tmant |)at meinen Keinen ^unfc geflot;ten. Exercise. 1. I cannot give him anything to-day. 3. No, I have not found anybody there. 5. They say he has killed somebody. 7. Nobody has lost money in this affair. 9. Do not blame anybody. 2. Have you found anybody in the house ? 4. Everybody's friend is nobody's friend. 6. People said, everybody loved that boy. 8. I blame nobody. 10. Will people say, he was a good man ? On Adverbs, Examples.- 1. To the right lies the church. dit6}t^ liegt fcie ilird^e. 2. He will probably be in school. @r it)irb ival;rf^eintid; in ber ®c^ute fein. 3. Where are yoii going ? Where do you come from ? 2Bo|)in gelten ©ic ? 2Ö0f;er fommen ®ie ? 4. We shall visit that toicn perhaps. Söit luerben jcne ©tabt i>ieüeii|)t befiic^en. 5. / do not by any means know it. 3^ ttJCif (fenne) eö feineöl^egs. Exercise. 1. It lies in front, before the table. 3. Formerly he was (was he) a very good man. 5. How much has he bought at (anf, Dat.) the market ? 7. Now he is (is he) very happy and contented. 9. He has never played since. 2. He certainly will not do it. 4. The boys have wholly forgotten it. 6. He has not by any means bought much (see 5 immediately above, in Examples), 8. Indeed ; I do not know it. 10. We shall certainly go about twenty miles to-day. 72 German Grammar. Reference-Page V. Relative Pronouns. As in English so in German, Nouns or Pronouns are often accompanied by relative clauses, introduced by M'/w or wMcli, it)etcf)er, etc., ber, etc. These relative pronouns weld;er, bev must agree with their noun or pronoun {i.e. their antecedent) in gender and number ; but in case (unless followed by a noun themselves) they are governed by the verb in their own clause, or its preposition. MASC. SINGULAR. FEM. SINGULAR. Nom. Ace. ivefdjcr or fcer ) iretdjcn or ben ) ttjef^e or bie Gen. beffcn bercn Dat. tve(c|)em or bcm tt)elcf;er or ber NEUTER SINGULAR. PLURAL M. F. N. jvet^e or btc beren ivetc^en or benen ENGLISH. loho, ivJiich whom, which of whom, of which to ivhom, to lohjch tt)et^eö or ba3 beffen ivet4)em or bem Remember these three rules most carefully : (i) Relative clauses do not in any way alter the order of words in the Principal Sentence, as II 12 3 ^ev mann, I mc'(cf;er (or bcr) :^tcr J»0|)nt, I ga& bcm JJint» einen 3(^fer. I'he man, ivho lodges Acre, gave the child an apple. (ii) The relative clause itself must begin with the relative pronoun (or its preposition, if there be one) and must END with its ASSERTION (not the Infinitive or Past Participle), as : ©te ®tabt, tion ber i6) ^pveä)e, liegt in Socmen. The toum, of which I spealc, lies in Bohemia. 25er glu^, bcffcn Ufer ®te fo fit)i)n gefitnben liaficn, if! ber St^ein. The river, the hanks of which you have found so beautiful, is the Rhine. (iii) Separable verbs never separate in Relative clauses, as : 2)er itna'be, ber ju [pat aufftanb, ifl beflraft worben. The hoy, ivho got u}) too kite, has been (become) punished. Notice : Except the sentence be very short, place the relative clause always immediately after its antecedent, as : 3^ I;a'6e ben S'Zann, ivel^er meinen |)itnb f!a^t, geftern in ber ©tabt gefe^^en. I satv the man, who stole my dog, yesterday in the town. But we might say, finishing the sliort principal sentence first : 3d; f;abe ben 3)?ann gefe^en, »velf|)cr ben ^^unb fla^t. \^N.B. — Among the oblique cases of ^vh^ch^xms,t be included some oiihe interrogatives on page 78 when used as relatives.'\ Correlative Pronouns. The antecedents of Relative Pronouns are sometimes Demonstrative Pronouns, as : beviCUtge, etc., fcevfelbe, etc., ber nämliche, etc. These two kinds of pronouns, as : bev/entge, ivetrf;er. . ., are sometimes styled Correlative ; each of them is declined according to its own rules (see above, and Reference-Page S.), and dependent on its own verb, as : S{|) fiebe benjentgen, ber mein gi^f unb ifl. / love that one {him) luho is my friend. iV.i?. —berjcnige, n)ctc|)er is often contracted (only Nominative) into irer, as : berfenige, toctc^cv äufciebcn ift, ift glücflid^, He ivho is content, is ha2]py ; better: 2Ber jufrieben ifl, ifl gtÜcfUc|). Thus also "lung" for boSjeuige, \»tl(Sit%. German Grammar. 73 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page V. Remember to look to page 38 or 83 for the Order of Words, both in the Principal and the Relative Sentence ; in the latter the Assertion stands last of all in its own clause. The order in the Principal Sentence is not in any way altered by the insertion of a Relative Clause. {N.B. The relative pronoun must never be omitted.) I. Relatives. Examples: 1. Sir ^((btn ben Änaben nic^t gefC^en, toclij^ct ben '^mi erf)alten ^at. We have, not seen the hoy, who received the prize. 2. |)aben ©ie bie 3eitnn(], mcld^c id; 3^nen fd;tcfte, noc^ nid)t getefen? Have you not yet read the neiospaper, \ivhich'\ I sent you. 3. ©aö Sanb, beffcn ©cf)ön'^eiten ®te bewunberten, ifl mein Saterlanb. The country, the beauties of which you admired, is my country. 4. ®er 9}?ann in Sonbon, bcffcn @ie ftc^ erinnern, ifl le^te SBoc^e geflorben. The gentleman in London, whom you remember, died last iveeh. Exercise. 1. We bought the picture, which (of which) you remembered ; it is not dear. 2. Here is the dog, of which (ÜOn, Dat.) you speak ; it (lie) is very ugly. 3. Have you seen the man, whose house we bought yesterday ? 4. The present, we have received to-day, is very beautiful. 5. Will you visit the land, the beauties of which every one praises ? 6. That oak, the leaves of which are so green, is in our garden. 7. The town (which) we admired most, is Florence in Italy. ((Jtorcnj, 3tflltfn.) 8. Will they accept the rings which we brought them (Dat.) ? II. Correlatives. Examples: 1. ©Ö ifi baö nämliche, ivel^eö ic^ fo beiVUnberte. It is the same loUch l admired so. 2. 2Bir tabein btejenigen, iwelc^e tröge ftnb. We blame those ivho are idle. 3. ^er ?ef)rcr f^raft ben, ber bicö gctfian l)at. The teacher punishes him ivho did this. 4. (Sr lobt benieiligen ^eute, ben er gefiern tabelte. He praises Mm to-day ivhom he blamed yesterday. Exercise. 1. Will you see these books, or the one (that) which I have here? 2. Let us love what is beautiful and good [that which = lttaÖ]. 3. That one ought (foUte) to be h ppy, who is in good health. 4. I shall give this to the one, who is most diligent (am jltei^igflen). 5. He who (W)er) answers best, will receive the prize. 6. They remember (remember themselves of that which) what you have written. 7. The boys bought what was most costly. 8. Do not speak of what (that which) you ought to forget. K 74 German Gra7nmar. Reference-Page W. Conjunctions. Besides pure conjunctions, as and, unb, etc., many adverbs and some prepositions may be used as conjunctions. All these are here enumerated. Conjunctions may affect the position of the Assertion in the sentence which they begin, hut do not interfere ivith any other parts. We must distinguish three classes : 1. Conjunctions which do not alter the order of words at all, and allow of the separation of separable verbs in the Simple tenses. These are marked (1) in the alphabetical list below. Example : 1 2 1 1 2 5 S)ev 3Satcr Iteöt, I uni bte 9)?iltter gel;t auö. The father reads, and the mother is going out. 2. Conjunctions which [like all adverbs or other parts of the sentence (except the Subject), when first in the sentence, see Eeference-Page J., page 38] require the Inversion, i.e. Assertion before Subject in the clause they begin; these allow of the separation of separable verbs in the Simple Tenses. They are marked (2) in the alphabetical list. Example : Set Satcr tie^t, I untcvbcffcn gc^t iie Söiuttcr aüß. The father reads, meanwhile the mother goes out. 3. Conjunctions which throw the Assertion in the clause they begin to the very end of it ; these do not allow of separation of separable verbs in any case. They are marked (3) in the alphabetical list. Example: 1 2 2)er SSater Iteöt, | tticnn tie 2)?utter am ^benb inbieStabt au^gc^t. The father reads, ivhen the mother in the evening goes out into the town. Notice. — When the clavise beginning with one of these (3) Conjvmctions precedes the other, i.e. the Piin- cipal sentence, then in this latter, i.e. in the Principal sentence, the Inversion takes place [just as if it began with an adverb or other i^art of the sentence (except the Subject), see Reference-Page J., page 38]. Example : 1 2 12 1 SSenn fcie SWutter ailÖ9C{;t, |(fo) lic8t tocv Söatctr. If {when) the mother goes out, the father reads. Alphabetical List of Conjunctions and Words used as Conjunctions. Notice. — Those marked (1) do not alter tlie order; those marked (2) require simple Inversion of Assertion and Subject; those marked (3) throw the Assertion to the end of their clause. [See 1, 2, 3, above.] (N.B. — Subj. means Subject.) according as (3), je nac^bcitt (Subj.) (Assertion). after (3), Halbem (Subj.) (Assertion). also, too (2), Olid) (Assertion) (Subj.) ( obgtci^, ob»vo|)t, wenn (Subj.) aur^, although (3), < obfc^on, »Dieivol;!, iDcnn (Subj.) fc^on, ( ivenn (Subj.) gleic^. and (1), nnt) (Subj.) (Assertion, etc.). as if {3), aU ob,* aU wenn,* wie wenn.* [* These three require Imperfect Subjunctive.] as long as... (3), fo tange (atö) (Subj.)... as often as... (3), fo Oft (alö) (Subj.)... as soon as... (3), fO bait) (a(t?) (Subj.)... German Grammar 75 Reference-Page W. — continued. Alphabetical List of Conjunctions. — continued. because, for (1), benn (Subj.) (Assertion). because, as, since (cause) (3), Will, ba... be/ore (3), beöor, e^e... besides, moreover (2), au^etbem, likrbtef . both... and... (1), fO»üOl;t (1st subj.) aU auc|). but (1), ahix, aUein [ieboc^, l or 2]. but (after negative) (1), foilbevtl (with incomplete clause). bitt that (3), (after negative or JU and adj.), alö baf ... either (2), entiDcber... [or=ober (i)]. even «7(3), fclt^P tt)enn... furthermore (2), ferner... /io?ü... (3), tt)te. however { — as to the rest) (2), übrigenö... however (with adj.) (3) tt)ie (adj.) (Subj.) auc^... fo fe(;r (Subj.) au^... jvenn (Subj.) auc^ noc^ fo... requires its verb, if in a past tense, to be in the hnper/ect Subjunctive. in case [that) (3), fatt^, trofern... indeed ('« is true) (2), Jtvar... [aber (1)]. in order to (Infin.) (3), um (Obj.), JU (Infin.). instead of(...ing) (3), anftatt baf (Subj.). jioor man. J 1 2 5 I 1 S'?etn 3Jater if^ rcid;, | after (aUcin, ieboc^) mein t){)cim ift ein fel;r armev 2)?ann. 2. /Te cannot come now, for he has lost all his money. 2 1 2 4 7 I 12 3 er fann je^t nicl;t fonimen, | bcnn er l;at ait fein ©etb »erloren. 3. My friend has sent me these letters, and I am very thanlfid to him. 1 2 3 6 112 3 5Kein greunfc |>at mir titefe ©riefe Qe\ä)idt, I mii> ic^ bin il;m fel;r ban!t>ar. Exercise on (1). 1. Will you go with your brother, or will you remain at home (JU |?aitfe) ? 2. He is not going to Africca, but his brother will go there next year (näi^fieö 3^^^). 3. This little boy has not brought his books, but those of his friend. 4. You cannot go with me, my child, for I must go alone (atiein). 5. Will the enemies destroy both the town and also the villages ? 6. My friends, we must obey (Dat.) the king or the emperor (Dat.). 2. Conjunctions marked (2) : Assertion before Subject in the clause tliey introduce. Examples : 1. He has no friends ; besides, he is not a rich tnan. 12 3 , 2 13 5 1. (Jr I)at feine grennbe; I iiberbief ift et ni^t ein reicher Tlam. 2. He told them to go ; nevertheless they remained in the house. 2. i- ' ' ^ Sr befa|>t i^nen jn Ge{;en, I bcnnoc^ (nic(;tiJbef!ott)eniger) ftUeticn fie im |)aufe. 3. The enemy defeated us last year, on the other hand we gained a victory noiv. 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 4* 3 • ©er geint» beftegte uns? le^teö 3a^r, I bagegen ociwonnen mir jcl^t einen ®ieg. * N.B. — Adverbs of time sometimes precede the object. Exercise on (2). 1. He died soon, otherwise he would now be a rich man. 2. They are not our friends, still they are just towards (gcgen, Ace.) us. 3. That little boy brought us the newspaper, then (bann) he went away (fort). 4. 'Tis true, he is not a clever boy, yet (bennod;) he writes his exercises well (gut). 5. Not only was the English general brave, t/ut (1) he was also cautious. 6. We wrote to him last ((e^te) week, therefore he went to Liverpool. 3. Conjunctions marked (3) : Assertion at the very end of their clause. Examples ; 1. We shall not praise him, as long as he is such a lazy boy. , 1 2 3 4 7 I 1 5 2 Sir iverben i(;n nic|)t toben, j fo (nuoe (ors) er ein fo träger ilnobe ift. 2. You have believed this although your friend has told you the contrary. 2 J_ 2 3 6 I 1 3 3 G 2_ @ie ^aben biefeö geglaubt, I oftgleitö ^\)x greunb 3f;nen bad ©egent^eil gefagt t)at. German Grammar. 77 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page W. — continued. Exercise on (3). 1. Will you go on (auf, Ace.) the ice, notwithstanding that your friend has warned you ? 2. We are doing this, in order to try his courage. 3. Write to (an, Ace.) him, so that he may know (iviffctl) the whole affair. 4. You do not know (Wiffeit) how much we have loved that unfortunate man. 5. These boys played (were playing), whilst those ladies wrote their letters. 6. Will you wait, iintil the whole town knows (of) this affair (Ace.) ? 7. I would not have believed it, if he had not shown me the letter. 8. These men would not have (been) gone, unless we had forced them. 9. He will do it, provided that you pay him well. 10. They have been ill since I saw them last (Jitle^t). General Sentences on the Conjunctions and Relatives. Examples : [See Notice on page 74, attached to No. 3.] 2 1 I 1 1. Senn ber (St^nee fcl;nuf3t, | fo ivitb bcr grüf;Ung, I auf ben mx l^offen, I bait) tommen. When the snoiv melts, the spri)ig,/or which we hope, tvill come soon. 2 1 7 I 12 3 7 2. (Sntweber )t)trt) bcr 2)?ann fcmmen, | ober id) merbe i^n jlrafen. Either the man iviU come, or I shall punish him. 12 7 1 1 I 4 2 15 2 ffier fann iviffen, | ob ber Slngetlagte, | ber ^ier fle^t, I fcJjutbig ifl ober ntc^t? Who can know {it), xvhether the accused, %vho is standing here, is guilty or not ? 1 3 ( 12 12 12 1 3 2öä|)renb ber getnb bie ©tabt, I bie 'mix lieben, | jevfiorte, I gewannen IvTr einen ®ieg. Whilst the enemy ivas destroying the toivn, zvhich lue love, we gained a victory. 1 4 2 I 2 1 4 6 5. 2(l9 bie ^Rac^ric^t |)ier anfam, | Jwar ber ©olbat f^on öerurtetit. When the news arrived here, the soldier was already condemned. Exercise. Be careful to examine which is the '^Principal Sentence ;" it 7iever begins with a conjunction ; except fo (not translated in English). It is printed in italics here : — 1. The enemy, who gained this victory, ivould have fled, if we had been more cautious. 2. Whilst you (were writing) wrote this letter, he was reading the newspaper. 3. I shall loait, until the boy, whom I sent to (auf, Ace.) the post, comes back. 4. Have you seen the letter, which my son wrote, or have you not seen it (i^n) yet? 5. When the news, which we expected, arrived, we ivere no longer {uiä)t ntet;r) there. 6. We sent you a letter, so that you might (follten) not expect us. 7. Scarcely was the door opened, when (fo) the boys rushed in (f;inein'f^ürjen). 8. We hoped, yon would do this, because you have been our friend hitherto (bli?l;er). 78 German Gra^iimar. Reference-Page X. Indirect Speech {Oratio Obliqua). A statement, 'request, or command, and a question may be mentioned, as it was uttered, i.e. direct (Oratio Recta), as : Statement : id) fagte bir : „ S'r ^at eö QÜi)an," I told you: " Be has done it." Request : er lC[i t(;n : „ ©tcB mir Ctn S3u^ ! " He asked Mm : " Oive me a book ! " Command : ber 2>atcr 'bifal)l : „ ©c^t in'Ö f)aitÖ ! " The father commanded : "Go into the house." Question : ©te fragten mic^) : „ |)afl bu baö @etb ? " Fo« as^-ecZ me : " ifaye 2/02« the money ? " If the direct words are not used, all these become Indirect Speech. The folhwing Rules hold good in all Indirect Speech. 1. The order in the Indirect Speech clause is unchanged, if it is not introduced by any conjunction, hut if a conjunction begins the clause, the assertion, i.e. the conjugated verb or auxiliary, is thrown to the very end of it. 2. The Subjunctive is used in the dependent clause, particularly if it is not introduced by a conjunction [unless the quotation is mentioned as an emphatic fact ; then the Indicative may be used in some cases]. 3. The Present Subjunctive is preferred to the Imperfect, particularly in the third person Singular [unless the action referred to is emphasised as being a past action ; then the Perfect is used]. 4. Always complete the Principal Sentence entirely, before beginning the clause contain- ing the Indirect Speech. Statements : either not introduced by a conjunction, or introduced by ba^, that, as : i^ fagte t>tr, er ^ntie eö get^an ; or -...., bafj er cö get^an f)aifc (or \)at). Requests or Commands : either not introduced by a conjunction, or introduced by ba^, that. The dependent clause generally contains fottett, ought, as : er hat i(;n, ba^ er if;m ein S3ii(^ gcfte ; or : ..., er folic i(;m ein 93«(^ geben. ber 3]ater l>efat;(, baf? fie in'S f^ouo gel;cn f oaten; or : ..., fie foütcu in'ö f)auö ge^en. Questions : always introduced by oi>, whether, if; or by one of the interrogative conjunc- tions below ; all these throw the assertion to the end of their clause, as : ®ie fragten mi4), vb id; @elb l&ttfic (or : Ijötte), You asked me lohether I had money. Notice. — All interrogatives assume in Oratio Obliqua the force of Conjunctions. Such Interrogative Conjunctions are : [N.B. Those beginning with K>0... must be looked upon as oblique cases of the relative pronoun ivhich.'] tuann...? when...? jKer... V ivho... ? hjarum...? lohy... ? tvaö...? what...? n)eP;atb...? ivhy...? »vefjvegen...? why... ? tt>ie öiet... ? how much. iVie lange...? hotu long...? iro|)in... V whither. tt>0... ? where . ? iVObei... ? whereat...? tt?Obur(|)...? ivhereby... ? ttJO^^er...? ivhence... ? JVOntit... ? wherewith ... ? tVOran... ? ivhereat... ? tVOrauf... ? upon ivhat...? worin? wherein... ? ttJOrunter... ? under lohich. IVOÜOn...? of what...? tt)ie... 'i how ? or: auf H)et(|e Sßeife... ? how ? In what manner.. iraö für ein ? maö für ? what sort of... ? as : (£r fragte, tute lange i^ bort geiücfcn fei. He asked how long I had been there. German Grammar. 79 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page X. STATEMENTS. (Read the Four Rules on page 78 very carefully.) 1 2 3 112 3 4 6 3}er junge SJZann fagte mir, I cr i)atic ben ©d)ülcr nt(l;t gefef;en. The young man told me, he had not seen the scholar. 2 1 I 1 3 4_ __J 2_ ©lauben ®ie, | fea^ er tiefe Slufgabe allein gefc|)rieben I»a6c? (tjcit.) Z>o you believe, that he has written this exercise alone ? 2 16 1 1 4 6 2 3. f)aben @ie erwähnt, | baß biefe ©olbaten in 3nbien gewefen finb (a fact). Have you mentioned, that these soldiers have been in India ? Exercise. 1. It is said (9)?an fagt) (that) this young man has (is) become very rich. 2. We do not believe, (that) the teacher will punish those boys to-day. 3. I have already mentioned, that the ship will sail (on (am, Dat.) ) next Monday. 4. Who can say, (that) these men have not fought very bravely ? 5. Do you deny, that our garden is larger than yours ? 6. The messenger reported that the high tower had fallen down (Conj. with fein). REQUESTS OR COMMANDS. 1236112 4 7 1 2 2Ber f;at Sbnen befot)(en, I @ie foBcu in bie @tabt ge(;enV [bau @ie. . . foUen,] Who has ordered you, to go into the toivn ? 3 2 1 I 1 2 I 1 6 2 2. Sao befiehlt ber .^an^tmann? | (Sr beftet)tt, | ba§ bie ©tabt jevfi(>rt ttctic. What does the captain command ? He commands, that the town he destroyed. _1_ ^ _3_ _5^ I j_ _2_ 3 4 7 3. ir rief mir ju, | ic^ foUc feine SipfeC me^r ne|)men. He shouted to me not to take any more apples. Exercise. 1. I told you, you should (f Otiten) remam where you were. 2. His command was, that we should allow the men to enter (einzutreten). 3. Will you order me to punish him for (für) this? (X^ foüe . . . j^rafen). 4. He commands me (Dat.) not to lend you my book (see 3 above). 5. W^e shouted to them (that they should) to come here (f;erlommen) at once. QUESTIONS. 4 13 2 1 16 3 Siffen Öie, \ auf tveW;e SBeife er eö tat, I ober womit eß getan tuurt»e? Bo you know, in ivhat manner he dkl it, or wherewith it tvas done ? 12 4(12 2. / scarcely hnoio ivhere he is. 3d; mi^ faum, I WO er ift. Exercise. 1. We asked them, where they had (were) been the whole day. 2. The scholar asked, whether the Rhiue was (is) in France ? 3. They knew not, how (in what manner) the boy had done this yesterday, 4. He knows, what (WOÖOU) the teacher is-speaking about now (foeben). 8o German Grammar Reference-Page Y. Interjections. Practically speaking, interjections, or elliptical phrases used as such, are unlimited in number ; and it is not easy to give exact equivalents of the interjections in two languages. Moreover, as in English, certain parts of a country have always certain characteristic exclama- tions. The following are the most common, with their approximate English equivalents : — Ah! H^I (Si! O^! %W> Agreed! Sopp ! (So gilt I Alas! 2tc^! Selber! All right! ©lit! 9^ec^t! Come ! ^xif^ ! 9tiin benn ! Attention! 5(c{;tung! Bang! ^iff, ^aff! By Jove! (S)ott! ^^"»immel! ©Ott iin |5tmnict! Down! {to a dog) Seg'btC^ ! Äufd/ birf) ! Faith! 33ei meiner 2:reu! 2tuf3;reue! Fie! ^fiii! ©c^änbtic^! Foricards ! 2?0r»üärtÖ ! Gently! ?etfe! ©fl^te! Getaway! SScg ! gort! ©ef;cn ©ie mir! God be j>raised ! ®oH\ii% ! ©Ott fei ©an!! Good bye! SIbieu ! 3Uif ffiteberfe^en ! Good God! ©Ott! Good health! 3ur @efitnbt;ett! Hail! ^eit! Sßiüfommen! Hallo! |)oaa! Sao?! Help! ^ütfe! 3u^ülfel Humj)f! |5m! $em! Hurrah! ^urrat)! 3itc^|)e ! Hush! @t! ©ttße! Huzza! f)eifa! Indeed! 2Btr!ttc^! 9Zcin ! I say! |)Ot[a! ^m\ Long live..! (Jo tebelNom.)! Notothen! gjun! Stifo ! / OI; ! St^ ! (admiration) 2lu ! (pain) Odear! £)^ tve^! %<^\ On! SSorwärtö! 'S death! 3um Teufel! Stop! |)alt! |)attba! Talce care ! Sl^tUUg I SSorftc^t ! y/ia«^(?o(^./@ottfei2)anl! 7'a% ho ! %xaxa \ Very well! @e^r gut! Well! 5Run! SBo^fan! Well I never! S'ierfwürbig ! W^oe/ Se^e! Ugh! U(;! $fut! Zounds! 2)onnertt)ctter ! 25erbammt ! I. True Impersonals : Impersonal Verls. (a) Applying to atmospheric phenomena : eö bOnnert, it timnders; eö |)agett, it liails ; eö fc|)neit, it snoivs I These are regularly conjugated, but of eö blt^t, it lightens; i^ XiQlMi, it rains ; (^ taQt, itdanmsl course have only 3d person singular. (b) fein, to be ; and ßeBeit, to give, are often used impersonally. (i) e§ tft, ifAere is; eö ftub, there are; e^ iüav, ifAere was; e^ ivaven, ^Aere tccrö, etc. This is used with a Nominative after it; it applies to things, etc., taken in a Iwiited sense, and generally with the " place where " mentioned and referring to a small limit. N.B. — In questions, and in the Inversion, eö is omitted, as : 3ft etn ^ttabe ^tev ? (5ö ivaven tvet SSögd in bcm |)äus?d;cn. (ii) e§ ^Xtht, there is; eö gab, there loas, without a plural form, is always followed by the Accusative, and applies to things, etc. taken in a large or unlimited sense, either Avith no "place where" mentioned, or referring to a very large limit. N.B. — eö in eö ßt'ebt is never omitted, as : e^ gtebt Seute, \Xii\6)t . . . There are people ivho . . . ^at eö feineit Ävteg gegeben? TVas there no war? II. Other verbs used impersonally: (a) Ordinary verbs, as : e^ fängt an, it begins, etc. (b) Verbs Avith reflected pronoun (not true reflexive verbs). [See Reference-Page Q.] (i) With accusative of personal pronoun, as : eö fveut mid) (Hc^, tpn) / (thou, he), rejoice (it rejoices me). (ii) With dative of personal pronoun, as : e^ gettngt mir, it succeeds to me = I succeed. Notice the impersonal constructions : eö ßieng ein 3Wonn, instead of ein 3}?ann gieng, and in the Passive : eö wirb gefangen, instead of man fingt. German Graimitar. Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page Y. Exercise on the Interjections. 1. Forwards! Soldiers! There is the enemy ! Attention! Hurrah! 2. Woe ! The enemy has entered the town ! (are into the town broken (etn'bte(|)en). 3. He said: Well I never ! and went to the poor horse (gieng ^U, Dat.). 4. Good God ! you will surely (t>0(|)) not kill the unfortunate man. 5. Fie ! do not do that. Faith ! It would be shameful. 6. Hail ! Welcome, our emperor in (Dat. ) our town ! 7. All people (Seute) cried : Long live our good king ! 8. " Help ! " cried the poor woman. God be praised ! you came in time. 9. When he saw his dog, he cried to him (il;itl JU) : Down ! Lie down ! 10. 'S death ! you should have (fatten . . . foCfcil) gone forwards. On the Impersonal Verbs. Examples. 1. Bo you see, hoiv it snotvs ! ©e^en ©ie, ivte CO fc^iieit! 2. Yesterday it rained the lohole day ! ©eflerit rcßlicte CO ben gatljen Sag. 3. It is beginning to snoiv noiu. ßö fängt [t^i an JU [ebneten. 4. There ivas no hoy in school. @ö ivar fetn §ix\.oAt in t>er ®^ule, 5. There have been men who said that. @ö ^at Seute gegeben, Hi baö fagten. 6. Do you rejoice that he is ill? greut eö ®ie, fcaf et franf ifi 'i 7. No, I am very sorry, "^dn, iä tut mir fe^r UÜ. 8. In Germany they dance much. 3» Seutf(i;tanb ivntb »tet getanjt- Exercise. 1. See, how it lightens, and do you hear how it thunders ? 2. Day is dawning, the sun will rise soon. 3. Was there a bird in your cage? [N.B. e8 is dropped in Questions.] 4. In France they drink much wine. \^N.B. e^ is dropped in the Inversion.] (See 8 above.) 5. There were people who did not believe that I had been (was) in America. 6. Hurrah ! I succeeded (it succeeded to me) in catching the bird (JU fangen). 7. Some men went to that village (say : There (eö) went some men into). 8. God be praised ! There is (it gives, with Accusative) no war. 9. There were many people in the theatre (So IVaven . . .). 10. We rejoice (it rejoices us) that you have succeeded (that it to you succeeded is). L 82 German Grammar On the Assertion and Predicate. Special note on the exact meaning of these terms as used in this Grammar, In order to facilitate the study of " Sequence of Words " in every German sentence, the terms "Assertion" and "Predicate" are used here in a sense somewhat departing from that which they usually have in English Grammar, The student must therefore make himself thoroughly familiar with the meaning of these two words in German Syntax. A. The Assertion is always the conjugated Verb of the sentence, therefore in all tenses, formed by the aid of an auxiliary, it is this auxiliary which is called " the Assertion." Thus in ber ^uat^e f^teltc geftevn im ©arten, the verb f^JteWc is the Assertion; but in ber ^nak f^at gefterit im ©arten gefpielt, the auxiliary i)at expresses Person, Tense, Number, and Mood ; and is therefore the Assertion now. The Assertion is the only moveable part of the sentence ; its ordinary place is No. 2., i.e. immediately after the Subject ; but we see (page 83) that it can change its place, so as to be at the very beginning {i.e. immediately after the conjunction), or at the very end of a sentence. These are its only possible changes. In the following sentence the Assertion of every clause is printed in black type : — 25er S3ote Jam in mein 3immer, 1 akv i^) tuav au$3gegangen, | bennciMDav fet;v frfjoneö ^Better; | be^^alb f)aiit er ben 33vief, | wetc^en er mir übci*fivcid)te, | ouf meinem ^ifc^e jnrüdgelaffen, | tt)o tc^ benfetben vic(;tig fant», | aU \6^ yon meinem @))ajiergang ^nxMttlyxH \ ♦ B. The Predicate, in the sense used here, can only occur ((c.) below excepted) when the Vei-b of any sentence is one of the following : — fein, to be; tt)evben, to become; fc^einen, to seem ; ;^ei^en, to he called; Meiben, to remain; and some Passive verbs, as : genannt Werben, to be called ; tXWä^lt it)evben, to be chosen. The Predicate jnust always be : (a.) a Substantive in the Nomina- tive ; (h.) an Adjective, always invariable ; (c.) the separated prefix of a separable verb, used without auxiliary and in a principal sentence. In the following sentence the Predicate of every clause is printed in black type : — ^axl \V(IX legten Slbenb fe^r tväge | ; er fd;eint über^anpt fein ffci^tgcf ünabe ju fein | ; er fct;rei6t oft feine Slufgaben einfad; ai>, | nnb ift ba^er geu^ol^ntid; bee Se^tc in feiner ^(affe | ; bod; ^ofen n)ir t , er iverbe nid)t immer fo iiyöxi^t Meiben | » The above explanations should be carefully studied. German Grammar 83 Reference-Page Z. Complete Rules on the Sequence of Words in a Sentence. Subject to some modifications for the sake of emphasising a word by not placing it in its ordinary position, the following is the order of words in every sentence : Remember : The Assertion (No. 2) is the only moveahle member of any sentence. 1. Noun or Pronoun, Nominative of Verb ; together with their attributes, or their relative clauses. 2. ASSERTION. The conjugated Verb ; or, Auxiliary in Compound Tenses. Nouns or Pronouns in oblique Cases ; with their attri- butes or their relative clauses. If there be more than one Object, put Dative first ; also put Pronoun before Noun ; Person before Thing ; shortest Pronoun first ; Words governed by any Prepositions last. The reflexive Pro- noun of reflexive Verbs stands also in place 3. 4. ADVERBIALS. Put Time first ; often before the Objects even. Put Place last ; often after the Predicate even. The Adverb : mä)t generally precedes the words which it negatives, especially other adverbs ; excejDt in noc^ ntc^t== not yet. 5. PREDICATE. Only occurs if in connection with : tt>ert)en, to become ; fc|etncn, to seem; ^ei^en, to he called ; bleiben, to remain ; and some passives, as : genannt irerben, to be called ; iVcol^W werben, to be appointed. The separated prefix of a separable verb becomes also a Predicate, and stands in place 5. PAST PARTICIPLE, Invariable. If there are two Past Participles, that of the Auxiliary stands last. INFINITIVES, Invariable. If there are two Infini- tives, that of the Auxiliary stands last. JU is never separated from its Infinitive. There are only three classes of Sentences in German, viz. : Principal, Relative, Subordinate. In all these the above order 1, (2), 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 holds good, with the one exception of the Assertion (No. 2). A. This Assertion is placed before the Subject (No. 1) in the following cases : (a) If the sentence is a question (or a command, expressed without foKcn). (6) If a conjunction marked (2) on pages 74, 75, or any member of the sentence, not the subject (i.e. a 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 above), or a subordinate clause, precede the Principal Sentence, (c) If in conditional sentences the conjunction tvenn is omitted. B. The Assertion (No. 2) is thrown to the very end of the sentence : (a) In all subordinate clauses, introduced by a conjunction marked (3) on pages 74, 75. (b) In all relative clauses, introduced always by: »Deliver or ber; tX>iX, IVaÖ, and the oblique cases of these, to which belong : tvorin, it>orauf, iDobei, ii^omit, H)obur(|), tt)ofür, woran, tVOjU 5 n?ie, auf tt)eld)e 2Seife, mann, \V>0, warum, etc. [For complete list see page 78 at foot.] Remember : Nos. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 are not influenced by the change of place of the Assertion, nor by any relative or subordinate clauses inserted in the body of the sentence. N.B. — 1. Separable Verbs cannot separate in relative or subordinate clauses. 2. Subordinate clauses, when not introduced by any conjunction, have the assertion in its proper place, i.e. No. 2. 3. In relative claiises introduced by the Nominative case of the relative pronoun, this latter is the subject itself. 4. Conjunctions do not count in the sequence of words, nor do Interjections. 84 German Grammar. Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page Z. In analysing a sentence, remember carefully : The Subject is got in answer to the question: "Who'?" or "What?" (coupled with the verb). It is alivays in the Nominative case, and generally enlarged by article, adjective, Attributive Genitive or Relative Clause. The Ohject. (a) The direct object answers to the question: "Whom?" or "What?" (coupled with the verb). It is ahvays in the Accusative, but is also generally enlarged like the subject. (5) The indirect object answers the question: "To whom?" "By whom?" "With whom?" etc., and is either Genitive or Dative (unless after a preposition governing , accusative). The Predicate is got in answer to the question : " What is (becomes, is called) the subject ?" It is Nominative case if a noun ; and invariable if an adjective. The separated prefix of separable verbs, in Simple Tenses and Principal Sentences, is also a Predicate. The Assertion is always the conjugated verb or auxiliary ; never the Infinitive, nor the Past Participle. Example of Analysis of a Complex Sentence : Analyse : 2)er arme 3Äann I;offte, J bap ©ie il;m (Stivaö gefccn »üürben, I unb er fragte mic^, I ob ic^ 3 3 I 13 6 2 i G 2 3^nen baö 33uc^, | ml^iS er mir anvertraut l;atte, I übergeben ^tte. General Analysis. ®cc arme aWann Ijoffte; is the 1st Principal Sentence, order according to Reference-Page Z. baft @ic il^nt (StioaS sehen ttiütbcn: Subordinate clause, enlargement of I;offen, introduced by ba{5, a con- junction of 3d class (see pp. 74, 75), therefore Assertion, JVÜrben, at its end. unb er fragte miciö: is the 2d Principal Sentence, joined by mit, a Conjunction of 1st class, therefore no alteration in the order, oil i^ S^uen ia^ ^uä) [ . . . ] üöcrgeöen f)ätte: Subordinate clause, enlargement of fragen, introduced b> ob, a conjunction of the 3d claas, therefore Assertion, mti, at its end. tt>el(!öe8 er mir anvertraut Ijatte: a Relative clause, attributive to ba^ ©U^; has the Assertion ^attc at its end like all relative clauses (see Reference-Page V), but does not interfere with the order in the sentence in which it is interpolated. Minute Analysis. bcr arme S»iann: Subject(with attribute) of the 1st Principal Sentence; ftöffte: its assertion. Gie: Subject of 1st subordinate clause; iX)m: its indirect object; Cettoaä: its direct object (Accusative), gcftcn; its Infinitive; tuiirben: its Assertion, er: Subject of 2d Principal sentence, fragte: its Assertion ; miä): its direct object, id): Subject of the 2d su.bordinate clause; Sfjnen: its indirect object ; ba§ «U(^, its direct Object [toeld)c8 : relat. Pronoun, ace. Neut. ; er: Subject of the relative clause ; mir; its indirect object; anUcrtraut: its Past Participle; Iiattc: its Assertion], iiftergclien: Past Participle of the 2d Subord. Clause; Ijättc: its Assertion (Subjunctive). (Analyse in the same way, viva voce, any sentences met with in Translation, first giving a general analysis, and then a minute one of every word. ) German Grammar. 85 GENERAL EXERCISES. Analyse the following, giving reason for position of Assertion in every instance as shown on the preceding page. a 1 a2 a3 1 h\ b2 hZ s c 1 c4 c2_| hi 1. ©er @ en erat befaßt ten ©olbaten, j [te foUten t>aö S-orf, j [tt)eld;eö auf bent ^Jüget fiant),] ! angreifen, d\ d2 \ e\ e2 e5 e5 e5 I /I /4 /2 i>enn er fagte, | baö fei ber ©(^lüffel ber ©teCung ber geinbe, I bie bal;inter tagen. The general commanded the soldiers to attach the village, which stood on the hill; for he said that icas the key of the position of the enemy, who were lying behind it. al ai a2 \ b2 bl hi j c2 c 3 j 2. Sä^renb bie Änaben in bcm ©ofe fpietten, I fam ein Settler in baö ^f>a\iä ' unb fta|>t bie Äteiber, d4: d2 \ e 1 e 3 e 2 wetc^e im 3inuner t;iengen, I o^ne baf 3emanb it)n beobact)tete. Whilst the boys loere playing in the yard, a beggar came into the house and stole the clothes, which were hanging hi the room, ivithont a?iy one noticing him. Translate. 1. The enemies destroyed the town, which stood by the (am) river, and escaped over the river, Ijefore (i?or) the citizens, who were surprised (übcrraf^lt), could assemble (ftd; i.^'Crfanimetn). 2. Since the ship has sailed, I have often thought of (an, with accusative) my friend, who is now on the sea, and I shall be glad to hear soon that he has reached London (in ?. an'fommen, with to be) safely (glücfti^). 3. I asked him, why he had done this, but he answered nothing ; therefore I think he knows that he has done wrong (Unre(t;t tun). 4. When (ats) the ship came into the harbour, we hastened (eiten, reg.) to see whether Charles had (was) arrived, but alas we found he had not come, because he was ill when the ship left London. 5. Do you know whether your friend found the book, which he had lost, or whether he bought a new [one] ? 86 German Grammar Dictionary of Words {not on pages 12 or 58 and 59). For the Exercises of this Term. about {circa), adv., ungefähr; pre- position, urn (Ace.) to accept, an'ne(;mcn (irreg.) the affair, bie @ef^ic^te, — , — n ago, ÜOV (with Dat. after it) to allow, ertauben (reg.) alo7ie, allein (adv.) already, f(^on (adv.) to answer, antHJOrten (reg.) the apple, ber ?(pfet — ^, '-^ to arrive, an'fommen (irreg.) to ask, fragen (reg. ) to assemble, ftc^ üerfammetu (reg.) astonished (adj.), etfiaunt at once (adv.), fogteic^ away (adv.), fort Avfierica, Africa (unaltered) the beauty, fete ©c^ön^eit, — , —en before (prep.), tior (Dat. or Ace.) the bird, ber Soget, — Ö, IL. to blame, tabcln, rügen (reg.) the boot, ber ©ttefel, — ^, — both, bcibe or bie beiben brave(-ly), tapfer to bring, bringen (half reg.) the cage, ber Ääftfl, — Ö, — e teu, meine Sieben, id; mup ie^t gelten. 9. Äinber, fü|)rt cuc^ gut auf Jüä^rent» meiner 2lttt)efen|)eit. 10. 2)cr 3ug irartet fd;on. ©ie |)akn feine 3eit ju verlieren. 11. f^aBen ®ie 3()r 33ittct gctööt. Söfen ®ie eö fc^nelt. 12. 2)a pfeift bie Solcmotiöe; abieu, auf Sicberfe^en. 13. Sie fd)nea bcr 3ug fä|)rt! 3a, öierjig 3ÄeiIen ^jer ©tunbe. 14. 3f} bieö ein aJaudKOuvie V Sflcin, mein |)err. 15. ©e|en ©te baö f(|öne ©d;Iof bort oben? Sie ^ei^t eö? 16. ©aö ijl (S^renbreitflein, eine flar!e geflung. 17. So ^at eine grope S3efa^ung, unb ifi fe^r wichtig. 18. ©c^en ©ie biefe ©tromfi^netlen im 9i^ein? 19. 3a unb ba oben ifi ber Soreleifetfcn. 20. Stl; ! 3d; n^eifi ni^t waö foü ei bebeuten ! u.f.n?. 21. ©a ! ©et;en ©ie bie 3nfel im 3]I;ein mit bem Surm ! 22. 3a, bae ifi ber 3}Zäufeturm beö 33ifc|)ofö |)atto ! 23. Sie t;übf^ Singen fi^ öon i^ier aufnimmt ! 24. Saö für eine ^racf)tüot(e Srüdc über ben 9?|)ein ! 25. Saö ifi n)o^t ber 3)?ain bort? 3a, mein f)err. 26. So ge^t |e§t miebcr tangfamcr, nic()t n^a^r? 27. 30/ ivit finb ganj nat;e hü S)?ainj. 28. Sas^ für fiarfe 2>Zauern ! 3a, SWainj ifi eine gefiung. 29. ©el;en ©ie bie ©otbaten, bie ba ercrjieren! 30. 5Run fahren n?ir in ben Sa^n|)of ein. 31. ©teigen ©ie I;ier auö? 3^/ i^ gf^e nur biö SÄainj. 32. ©ie fal;ren »o{;t iveiter? 3a' iff) gf^f "öd; 3}?ann^eim. 33. Slbieu, mein .5>err, iA) bin ^i)\ur\ fe^r »erbunben. 34. Soöen ©ie eine Äntfi^e nef;men, ober nic^t? 35. 3^ Sief^f *^or, ju guf na^ bem ©afi^ofe p gel;en. 36. 3^/ i» fd;önem Setter gel;t man lieber ju gnf . 37. ©e|)en ©ie, bap mein ©epäcf abgegeben n)irb. John, fetch me a cab. Yes, Sir, I will go for one at once. At what o'clock does your train leave ? I think it leaves at ten minutes past five. It is high time ; it is already half-past fiour. Here is the cab ; carry the luggage out. It is all right, you may ie easy. Good-bye, my dears, I must go noiv. Children, behave well during my absence. The train is already toaiting ; you have no time to lose. Have you taken your ticket ? Take it quickly. There, the engine is whistling ; good-bye, au revoir. How quick the train goes ! Yes, forty miles an hour. Is this a smoking compartment ? No, Sir. Do you see that beautiful castle up there ? What is it called ? That is Ehrenbj'eitstein, a powerful fortress. It has a large garrison, and is very important. Do yoxi see these rapids in the Rhine ? Yes, and up there the Liirline-7'ock, Ah! " / knoiv not what it can mean," etc. There ; see this island in the Rhine ivith the tower. Yes, that is the mouse-tower of Bishop Hatto. How beautiful Bingen looks from here ! What a splendid bridge over the Rhine ! That is probably the Main there ? Yes, Sir. We are going slower again, are we not ? Yes, we are quite close to Mayence. What strong walls! Yes, Mayence is a fortress. Look at the soldiers who are drilling there. Now we are entering the station. Do you get out here? Yes, I am only going to Mayence. You are probably going further ? Yes, I am going to Mannheim. Good-bye, Sir, I am much obliged to you. Will you take a cab, or not ? I prefer to go on foot to the Hotel. Yes, in fine loeather one prefers to go on foot. See that my luggage is delivered. German Gram^nar. 89 POEM. {To he learnt by heart.) ^tt Ilctttc c^ijbriot (2Ö. ü)?üaev). 1. 3^ ivar ein Keiner Änak, flanb fefl faum auf bem 33ein ; ®a nat;ni mid; fc^on mein 35ater mit in t>aö 9}?eer hinein; Unb teerte teic^t mic^ fc|)ivimmen an feiner ftc^ern ^^ant», Unb in bie gluten tauchen biö nieber auf ben ®anb. 5. Sin ©ilberfiücfd^en warf er breimal in'ö SÄeer ^ina'6, Unb breintat ntugt' i^'iJ ^olen, ef/ er'ö jum Sof;n mir gat>. ©ann reici^t' er mir ein 3?uber, |)ief in ein Soüt mi(^ ge|)'n ; @r fetber blieb jur ®eite mir unöerbroffen f}e(/n. SSieö mir, wie man bie Sogen mit f^arfem @d)Iage bri^t, 10. 2Bie man bie Sirbel meibet unb mit ber 35ranbung fic^t. Unb üon bem fteinen Äai^ne gieng'ö flugö in'ö grof e @c^ifF ; @ö trieben unö bie ©türme um man^eö gelfenriff. 3c|) fa§ auf ^o'^em 3D?afle, f^auf über 2>?eer unb Sanb ; (5ö fcf;ivebten 2?erg' unb stürme üorüber mit bem ©tranb. 15. ®er 33ater f;ic^ micf; merfen auf jebeö SSogelö gtug, Stuf alter SBinbe Se^en, auf atter Sotfen 3ug. Unb bogen bann bie ©türme ben 9)?afi U^ in bie glut; Unb fpri^ten bann bie Sogen :^od; über meinen ^ut; ©ann fa^ ber Sater prüfenb mir in baö 3tngefic^t,— 20. 3(|) fa^ in meinem Äorbe unb rüttelte mic^ ni^it. S)a fpra^ er, unb bie Sauge warb ipm wie 55Iut fo rot : „ ®Iürf ju ! auf beinem 9)?afle, bu Keiner f)|)briot ! " Unb t;eute gab ber 5Bater ein ©^wert mir in bie fianb. Unb weihte mi^ jum Kämpfer für @ott unb 3?aterlanb. 25. Sr maf micf) mit ben 55Iicfen öom Äo^^f li^ ju ben 3c^'n ; 9)?ir war'^, afö tat' fein Stuge ^inab in'ö f5erj mir fe|)'n; 3^ ^ielt mein ©^wert gen f)immel unb fc^aut i^n jtc^er an, Unb bauchte mid; jur ©tunbe nic^t fc^(e4)ter aU ein SWann. ©a fpra<| er, unb bie Sänge warb i^m voxt 55Iut fo rot: 30. „ ©lücf ju ! mit beinem ©^werte, bu Heiner fjpbriot! " The little Boy of Hydrea. 1. / was hut a little hoy, stood scarcely firm on my feet {legs) When my father first tooh me to sea with him ; And taught me easily to swim with his safe hand, And to dive into the ivaters doion to the very sand. 5. A little silver coin he thrice threw dovm into the sea. And thrice had I to fetch it uj), ere he gave it me as a re- ward. Then he handed me an oar, and told me to step into a boat ; He hi^nself remained unwearied standing hy my side. Shoived me hoiv tuith sharp stroke one cuts the waves, 10. How one avoids the ivhirlpools and struggles with the surf. Andfj-om the little boat we soon loent on hoard a large ship) ; The storms drove us ai'ound many a rocky reef. I sat on the high mast, looked over sea and land ; Mountains and towers floated past us with the shore. 15. My father taught me to take notice of every bird's flight. Of the direction of every luind and the motion of evei~y cloud. And when the storms bent our mast down into the ivaters, And the waves sent their spray high above my hat, Then looked my father searchingly into my face, — 20. I sat in my basket {cross-trees) and did not move. Then said he, and his cheek became as red as blood : "All hail! upon thy mast, thou little hoy of Hydrea ! " And this day put my father a sword into my hand, And dedicated me as champion for God and Fatherland. 25. He searched me with his glance from head to foot {toes) ; I felt, as if his eye looked doivn into my very heart ; I lifted my sword towards heaven and firmly looked at him, And thought myself just then no worse than a full-grown man. Then said he, and his cheek became as red as blood : 30. "All hail to thee, with thy sivord, thou little man of Hydrea ! " Note : Hydrea, a small island oiF the coast of Argolis in Morea in Greece, south-east of Athens ; its inhabitants are known as brave and bold fishermen and sailors. M 90 Gej^man Grammar. POEM. {To be learnt by heart.) ^tt ©tWöttig (©ötfie). 1. SSer rettet fo fpät bure^ ^a^i unb SGSinb? So ifl t>er Sater mit feinem Äini»'; Sr ^at ben Änafcen it?of;I in bem Strm'; (Jr faf t i^n it^er, er ptt i^n »arm. 5. „ 2>Zein ®or;n, ivaö birgfl bu fo bang bein ©eft^tV" „ ©ief/fl, S5ater, bu ben grf fönig ni4)t? „1)en (Srlenfönig mit Äron' unb ©djiveif?" „SWein ®of;n, eö ifl ein 9ZebeIfireif." 9. „Du liekö ilinb, fomm', ge^' mit mir! „ @ar f(|)öne ©piele fpiel' i^ mit bir ! „9)Zand;' bunte Slumen ftnb an bem @tranb'; „Steine 3)?utter ^at mand;' gülben ©ewanb!" 13. „ SWein 5Bater, mein Sater, unb I;örefl bu nic^t „SSßaö Srienlönig mir leife üerfpric^t?" „ ©ei ru^ig, bleibe ru|)ig, mein Äinbl „ 3n bürren Slattern fciufelt ber Sinb." 17. „ Siltf}, feiner §.mU, bu mit mir ge^'n ? „ SWeine IHiitx fotten bi(^ warten fc^ön. ,, 2)?eine S;öd;ter füi;ren ben nä^tti^jen 0?ei^'n „Unb iviegen unb tanjen unb fingen btc|) ein. 21. „3Wein Sater, mein Sater, unb fie^p bu nic^t bort „(Jrtfönigö Söc^ter am büfler'n t)rt?" „ SWein ©o^n, mein @of;n, i^ fei;' eö genau : „ So fcf)einen bie alten Seiben fo grau." 25. „ 3c^ lieb' biet), mict) reijt beine fc^öne ©efiatt; „Unb bifl bu nic^t tviöig, fo braud/ id; ©eiDalt." „ 2)?c{n Sater, mein Sater, fe^t faf t er mic^ an ; „Srifönig 1^o§ (Solb, fl'oW; t>«8 Stbenbeffflt/ supper ; bcr 3lllt, Jidy. 6. Before verbals in -ing, as : hunting, bie S^'Q^j plC'Ving, boo ©picl. 7. In some phrases, as: in school, in ber ©(|)Ute; in church, in bec^irc^e; at market, aufbcm SJZarft; in tovm, in bcr ®tat>t; also with the word most, as : most men, bie metfien 3)Zenf(^en. B. Indefinite article in English rendered by definite article in German — In such phrases as : sixpence a pound = @e^Ö ^ence ba^ (or : per) ^funb. C. Possessive adjective in English rendered by definite article in German — 1. When the ownership is undoubted, as : er ^at CO in bcr §anb, he has it in his hand. 2. With some reflexive verbs, as : i(^ ivaf^e mir bic §)änbe, / tvash my hands. D. Article (def . or indef. ) used in English but omitted in Gerinan — 1. With the word all, as : all the hoys, o.\iz Knaben ; all the money, aöeö @etb. 2. With the word both, as : both the books, beibe Süc|)er (or : bie beiben S3üc|)er). 3. With relatives accompanied by nouns, as : the river, the beauties of which you admired, bet gtuf, beffen ®(^önt)citen ®ie beivunberten. 4. Before the words: 9?0rben, north; Oflen, east; ©üben, south; SQSefien, west; also before %hix(^ I evening ; 3Witternad()t, midnight; SWorgen, morning; if they are preceded by gegen, or natii [towards) ; as : towards the north, gegen S'Jorben. 5. In the phrases : many a, no less a, not so good a, to become a (soldier, etc.), as : manner ilnabe, many a boy ; he became a soldier, er IVUrbe ©Olbat. II. Notice that in German the article can never stand between an adjective and its noun, but must stand before the adjective, thus : » both the boys = bic beiben ilnaben; such a man = cinfoI($er 9)Zann; half an apple = einsalbet Stpfet ; all the world = bie ganje 2BeIt (= the ivhole ivorld). III. The Article in German must be repeated before each of a series of words, especially if these are of different genders, unless all the words apply to one and the same person (or thing), as : ber Äönig unb bie Königin, the king and queen, hid : ber Äönig unb f)err, the king and master [i.e. in one person). German Grammar. Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page A A Examples. 1 . / have, ofien told you that children should rever- ence old age. 2. Many animals, lohich live in very cold countries, have warm furs, which are very valuable ; most of these furs are white in winter. 3. Dijiner will he taken in the large dining-room, hut we shall have tea here in this little room. 1. 3^ ^at>c euc^ oft gefagt, ba^ i>ie Winter bad Sllter ef;ren folten. 2. 35iele 3;^iere, mid)t in fe^r fatten Sänbern Ickn, ^aben waxim 'JJelje, bie fe^t mxt^' »oil ftnb; iie metften biefer ^clje jtnb im Sinter mi^. 3. ^ttä SJZittagcffen ivirt» in bem grofen ©peife- ginnner jit ftc^ genommen tuerben, aber ben 2:^ce werben ivir ^ier in biefem ©tiibc^en nel;men. Translate. ®ttS @oIb unb b«8 ©über ftnb eble SWetatte, aber baS Sifen if} nü^Ii(f;er aU aKe anberen ^Ketatie. |)oben ®ie biefelben in bcr iiirc^e gefe^enV 3^ fa^ fie, atö fie in bic Äirti^e giengen. 3)ic SD?enf(^en fotitcn i^re ^flicf)tcn gegen ©Ott nie »crgeffen, bcnn Sr ^at unö 2l(Ie erfc^affen, unb er erhält unö. ®ie ücrbarben unö bie greube, aU fte unö fagten, er iverbe nicl;t fommen Wiii er !ranf fei. Exercise. 1. When we were in Berlin, we saw (the) prince Albert, who had (was) returned. 2. Were these cherries dear ? I believe they Avere sevenpence a pound. 3. August and September are the best months for a tour in (the) Switzerland. 4. He had the book in his desk (^ult, m.), whilst he was looking for it in school. 5. Poor Henry ! I believe (dat.) poor Charles and you. Examples. 1. Switzerland is bounded on the north by Germany and on the south by Italy. 2. All the world knows that such a man does not deserve any respect. 1. ©ie ®^tt>eij if} gegen ^lorben öon ©eutfc^Ianb begrenjt unb gegen ©üben öon Sf'iticn. 2. Sie ganje Sett »veip, t»ap ein fotc^er 2)Zann feine 5l^tung »erbient. Translate. Sir befuc^ten biefe ©tabt, beren ©ebäube ©ie fo fc^on fanben. ©ie 2tngetegenl;eiten beiber 9)?änner tvaren in einem fataten 3iif}anbe. @egen 3}?orgen fteng cö an ju regnen, unb eö regnete ben ganjen 3;ag; aber gegen Stbenb ^eiterte fic^ baö Setter lieber rec^t fd^ön auf. Exercise. 1. He lost all the money which we gave him in town yesterday. 2. Many a good man was deceived by this fellow (Äert) who sold these things. 3. Do you know what has become of him ? [aUiJ {dat.).'\ He has become a sailor. 4. Half a loaf [^cixb, m.) is better than no bread ; — a proverb (©prict)tt?Ort, ».). 5. " My good sword in my hand, I fear no foe," he exclaimed (aufrufen). [See page S3, A. b.} 94 German Grammar. Reference-Page BB. Some Remarks on Gender of Nouns. We have already given the rules by which the Gender of many nouns can be recognised (see Eeference-Page F., page 25). In speaking of living beings, we may say generally that in full-groicn beings the gender corresponds with the sex, whilst young undeveloped beings are of the neuter gender. Thus we have : bet Sater, the father ; bie SWutter, the mother ; ba§ Äint», the child. ber ©tier, the hull ; bic §.\\\)f the cow ; ba§ Äatb, the calf. ber f)Ctigf}, the stallion ; bte ©tlttC, the mare ; bo§ güKcn, the colt, filly. bet §a^n, the cock ; bie ^eiine, the hen; bag Äü^tein, the chichen. bet &iX, the hoar ; bie ^iit, the hitch. ber ilotf;, the cook ; bie Äöc(;in, the female cook. ber iTönig, the king ; bie itölligi«/ the queen. ber @raf, the count ; bie ©rftfin, the countess. bet Sauer, thepeasant; bie SSöueritt, thepeasant ivoman. ber Stan JO fe, the Frenchman; bie granjöfi«, the French- woman. The Plural of words in A\\ is ^tniieit (indeed the Singular had formerly ?tnn). {b.) By cutting off ?r of the masculine, as : ber SBitlVCr, the widov>er ; bte SitlVe, the widow ; ber S^auber, the male pigeon ; bie %ai\bt, the female pigeon. (c.) By adding such words as stxii}, cow ; sl^ettne, hen. ber ^irf(^, the stag ; bie f)ivfc(;hil^, the hind; ber ^fait, the peacock; bie^^fauficnnc, the pea-hen: These words must be learnt gradually by noting them when met with in translation. N.B. — ©er 25eittfcf;e, the German [gentleman), has feminine, bie ©eutfc^e, the German [woman). List of the most common words tvith two genders ivith different signification for each: — ber sup, the nightmare ; bie Slip, the Alpine meadow. ber S3anb, the volume ; baö 33cinb, the tie, ribhon. ber Sauer, thepeasant ; baö Sauer, the bird-cage. ber (Srbc, the heir ; baö Srbe, the inheritance. bie 9)?arf, « coin = one shilling ; baö 3)Zarf, the marro20. ber]©ec, the lake ; bie ©ee, the sea, ocean. ber ®(i;itb, ^Ae sAieM [in hattle); taä ®cf)itb, a,t.), acquainted lüith *bef^ämt über (Ace), ashamed of begierig naä) (Dat.), greedy after *frei »on (Da.t.), free from empfcinglicf; für (Ace), susceptible of *eifcrfü(J;tig auf (Ace), jealous of *eitil auf (Ace), vain of ermübet t»On (Dat.), fatigued with *froI; über (Ace), glad of ''^glei^güitig gegen (Ae), indifferent to *graufam gegen (Ace), cruel to ^öflicf) gegen (Ace), polite towards *rei^ an (Ace), rich in ='=florj auf (Ace ), proud of überzeugt l>on (Dat.), convinced of *i)erf0n:)enberifc|) mit (Dat.), prodigal toith jufrieben mit (Dat.), satisfied imth [and a few others rarely used.] N.B. All these, except those marked *, may by prefixing un . . . be changed into their contraries ; as : Itnortig gegen (Ace), uncvvil to. Those marked * require iti(t)t before the adjective for their contraries. German Grammar 97 Examples and Exercises on Reference-Page DD. Examples. 1. The man was conscious of his guilt and tired of life, ; he hanged himself. 2. How high ivas this tree ? I think it tvas fifty or sixty feet high. 3. / carinot believe that this nexus ivas unknown to the man ivho ivas in the house. 25er SlWann wax ftc^ feiner (Srf;ult) betüii^t, unb beö gebend mübe, er ^at ftc^ erf)ängt. Sie t;oc^ wax biefer Saum'? 3cf) Qiaixhi, er Wax fünfjig ober fecf;jtg guß l)Od). 3^ fann ni^t glauben, ba§ btefe 9iad)ric{;t bem Spanne, bcr in bem |)aufe wax, unbefannt wax. Translate. 1. dx wäxe beö ^reifeö tt^ürbig gewefen, menn er bie 3eic^nung öoltenbet ^ätte. 2. Ser ©tront wax an biefer ©teile jebenfattö jttJan^ig guf breit. 3cf) fürd)te, bsf e3 unö unntöglid; fein n^trb, biefes^ ^eute ju tun. Die 9'cad;ric()ten üon Stfrifa waren bem atten 2)?ann fe(;r miüfommen. Exercise. 1. Was this man suspected of theft (X;iebfia^I, m.), or only of a mistake ? {%i^Ux, m. \ 2. The sea is at this spot six fathoms (Älafter,/". ) deep, or more. 3. This ought to be useful to the boy, who must write that theme (^tuffci^/ m.). 4. God be (fei) gracious to us sinners {©üuber, m.). 5. He will be welcome to his friends in England, for he is worthy of their esteem. Examples. 1. The prince ivas jealous of his brother; he was convinced of the truth of the news, which arrived to-day. 2. One ought never to he vain of one^f knoivledge, for no one can know everything. 3. Be polite toivards your teachers and not indif- ferent to their admonitions. S^'er giir)^ wax eiferfüct)tig auf feinen Sruber; er wax »on ber 3Ba^r^eit ber 9?ac^rici^t über» jeugt, bie |)eute anfam. 2)?an foüte nie auf feine Äenntniffe eitet fein, benn S^iemanb fann 3(t(eö n)iffen. ©ei ^i)fli^ gegen beine ?e^rer unb nic^t gtcic|)* gültig gegen i^re Ermahnungen. Translate. ©er @^üter ifi unbefannt mit biefen ©a^en, er fann feine Slufgabe x\\^i rec|)t gelernt i^aben. Siefer Srbe n^ar fe|>r toerf^iüenberif^) mit bem @elbe, baö er erbte. 3c^ 'wax bange {or eö wax mir bange) üor bem (Sramen in ber ©^ute. ©ie foßten über bie guten 3eugniffe fro^ fein, bie 3^t ©o^n autJ ber ©^ule mit nac^ |)aufc gebraut \jai. Exercise. 1. He is jealous of his friend, who always loved him so much (fo fe^r). 2. Boys should be polite towards their teachers, for they desire only their good (i^r 23efleÖ). 3. The enemy was superior to us in this battle, which we lost. 4. Are you convinced of the truth of the news, (which) your son sent (to) you ? 5. Do not be cruel to that horse ; it feels pain (ben ©C^mer^) as much as yourself (like you yourself). 98 German Grammar. Reference-Page EE. Remarks on Prepositions. Distinguish carefully Prepositions from adverbs and from conjunctions. Prepositions are followed by nou.ns or pronouns, and must govern an Accusative, a Genitive, or a Dative. We give here (as an appendix to Reference-Page 0., page 52) a list of the most common English prepositions in alphabetical order, with hints as to their translation into German before nouns or pronouns. aboDQ — (a) indicating locality, is Ü6ce with dat., if there is no motion towards the noun implied, and with ace. in the sense of across, with verbs of motion, as : bet SSogcI fc^tt>et>t Über bent ^auö, but| ber SSoget flitegt Über i>a8 f^aui?. (6) =heyond-\(bn (as above) ; cr lebt Über bent 5D?eer; ge^t über bo« 2)Zeer. (c) =more than-ühiX, with accusative : et tiebt i\jX\. Übet 2tIIc§ {more than all). about — (a) -aroimd = nm. (ace.) : fte üerfammelten ftc|) urn i^n, they assembled about him. (6) -throu(jh = in (dat.) ...umtjer: er ge^ in ber ©tabt umt;er, he goes about the town. (c) =wUh-f)ei (dat.) : iä) 1)ahet (ace.) or tvcgen (gen.) : ic^ fpre^e über i^ll, 1 talk about him. (e) with nouns of number, weight, etc. = ungefähr : er ^at ungefähr brei ^funb, he has about £3. (/) idiomatic : um biefe ^iit, about this time. at— (a) locality : bet, an, in (dat.) : S3ei ber Äitc^e ; an bent ^auS ; in ^ariö. (b) time : itnt (ace), as : iim biefe ®tunbe = a(! this hour. (c) with some adjectives : pleased a< = üergnügt Über (ace), jufrieben mit (dat.); clever «« = gefd^icft in (dat.) ; astonished a<= ernannt Über (ace.) ; vexed o<=ärgertid; über (ace). {d) with some verbs: to rejoice at = \i(i) freuen über (ace.) ; to aim «< = 3ielen nac^ (dat.), auf (ace.) ; to laugh a< = Iac^en über ; to blush a< = erröten über; to moch o< = fpOttei1, with gen. [or über, ace.]; to tvonder at = ^ö) (üer)tt)unbcrn über (ace). (e) idiomatic: at any rate { = at all eve7its) = aüf jeben Satl; at chtirch = iri ber Äir^c; at cotirt = iei ^ofe^ at cla'ybreak='bn 2(nbru^ baö 3:ageö; cdhome=^n ^aufe; at play = 'btm ©piet; at school=in ber ©^ule; ai!sea=auf ber (See, auf bem 2Weer; attable = 'bci 2:if(^; at the arrival o/=bei (ber) Stnfunft (gen.) ; at the battle = in bcr ®c()tacf;t; at the beginning— im (am) Slnfang, at the command o/=auf (ben) 93efe!)I (gen.) ; at the ex2)ense = a\l^ ÄOflen ; at the house 0/... =bci (dat.) ; at the same time^^u gleicher ^iit ; at the time 0/... = jur 3ftt (gen.) [and a few more]. by- (a) agent, always =öon (dat.) : er ttJurbe üon mir beftegt (by me). {b) instrument, always =bur(^ (ace) : burc^ ben ®c^uf öertvunbet (by the shot). (c) locality, =bci, neben (dat.) : it stands by the tree=iß fle|)t in bem 53aitme. (d) idiomatic: by my honour =^1^ mtinn d^xe'y 10 feet by i = ^d)x\ guf lang unb öier breit; by the 2d of March=am britteu SWärj; by the tixd auf (um) ©tücf ; by boat-mit bem ©cf)iff; by the advice of -anf 3tat; by /ore = beiltt 3«piter ! day by day~Wn XaQ JU Sag, tägli^ [and a few more]. German Grammai-. 99 Examples and Exercises on Page 98. above and about. Examples. 1 am sorry to he unable to give you anything, but I have no money about me. Above this luoiid there lives a God, who knows our inmost thoughts. They were about this time on a journey in Eng- land and Ireland. 1. ^■i tut mir letb, 3^nen 9tic|)tö geben jit fonnen, aber tr^ I;abe fein ©elb bei mir. 2. Ueöcr biefer Sett lebt ein @ott, ber unferc tieften ©ebanfen fennt. 3. ®ie tvaren umbiefe 3eit auf Steifen in (Sngtanb unb Sictanb. Translate. SSenn i^r ü6cr biefe ev Stiva^ erröten fönnen. 2. (Jr ift biefeö 3a^r auf Sofien feineö ©efc^äft^^aufcö na^ Stfien gereift; 5tlte ?äbcn im Sorfe finb um biefe fpäte ©tunte gefcf;loffen. greuen ©ie fid; nicf)t übet baö Ungtücf ^1^xix ^ia^barn ; eö ift nic^t ä)xi^iii^. S8ci Siifc^e bürfen biefe 3??äbc|)en i^re Stufgaben ni^t lernen. 3. Saö ©^iff wax brei^unbert guf tang unb jn^anjig gu§ breit. 4. 3c^ öerfpre^e ^^mn bei meiner (5^re, ©ie öor aä)t U|)r in ^iixixn |)aufe ju befucf;en, wenn biefe 9Za^ric|)t US bann angefommen ifl. Exercise. 1. Have you aimed at that bird ? I wonder at you. 2. We were at any rate at home at seven o'clock. 3. The house stands quite close (na^e) by the church in the village. 4. The French were beaten by the Germans in the last war, 5. We have (are) travelled about in the world by land and water. lOO German Grammar. for Reference-Page '^^.—Gimthmed. (a) generally für, with accusative : for Äim=für i^n. (5) instead of=anj!att (gen.) ; Ae went for his so7i=ev gieng anflatt fcincö ©o^neö. (c) with some verbs, as: to beg /or = bitten urn (ace); j»^c^y /»»'^fpiclcn urn (ace); to care for =^6) Üimmern um; to ash for or a/ifer= fragen nac^ (dat.). (d) idiomatic : /or a en an (ace); to trust wt^^öertrauen (dative). (d) with adjectives rare ; rich m = reic^ an (ace); fertile «« = fruchtbar an (ace). (e) idiomatic: in a carriage = in Sagen; in the country = Oi\x\ t>em ?anb; into the country — (x\x\ "^ixi Sant»; in German — (XX\^ ©eutf(^ ; into German = in'ä Seutfc|)e; in a iuord = mit einem SSorte; in ti7ne — ^Vi rec|)ter ^tit, jur re4)ten 3eit; [in pity, etc., see ß-om, or of jnty] ; to tahe apart i?i=2;eit ne|)men an (dat.); m (rison ivith another prisoner. 1. ©ie (jiitten bem atmen ©oltiatcn urn meinet» wt((en fein Ietcf)teö 3Serge^en öerjet^en foUen, |)err |)auptmann ! 2. 2Baö befiimmert er ftc^ urn Äricg ober griebenV (So ifi i^m %{Ui gteic^. 3. 5)cr SWörber, ber jnm S^cbe »erurtettt n?iirbe, ifl gefiern oug bem ©efcingniffe mit einem an= beren ©efangcnen entflogen. Translate. 25cri©ettler gieng ton ®tabt ju ®tabt unb bettelte überall. 2Bir rieten i^m ernfltic| ob, nac^ 2(ufiralien auöjuivanbern ; jebermann riet i^m tu>n bem Unternehmen ab. 3c^ gtanbe, ber f)unb ifi ganj frei t)on Untu= genben (faidts); eö iflüberbie§ ein ^rciöf;unb. 3unge ?eute foüten fi^ gänjti^ beö 9^auc|)enö entf)altcn, benn biefe ©etDo^n^^eit ifi fofl- fpiettg unb ber ©efunb^eit fe^r f^äbtic|). Exercise. 1. For what did you play ? We only played for hazel-nuts, Sir. 2. He learnt German /or* some time at school, and was very diligent. 3. The boy did it only /ro?M fear of punishment, not /;-07?i pleasure. 4. The little girl said the whole poem (from memory) by heart. 5. They are seen /ro?« time to time in the town, but not often. in and of. Examples. We believe in God the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost. One shoidd hear one''s troubles in patience; im- patience will not make them better, and is of no avail. You (they) ought in any case to have come to me first. 2. 2Bir glauben nn @ott ben 35ater, ben ©o^n unb ben I;ciligen ©eifl. 3}?an fottte feine ©efc^iverben mit ©ebulb tragen- Ungebulb ma(^t fie nirf;t beffer unb ^ilft @inem 9tic{;tö. ®ie |)ätten auf leben gall juerfl ju mir fommen fotten. Translate. ©er (Solbat ifl in jener @cf)Iad;t om guf »er- ttjunbet iDorben. Sir fiengen bie '3^\ihi atle auf biefe ffieife in ac^t 2;agen. 3. Gr ift 3f;reö 5Sertrauenö untwürbig, benn er n)irb fid; nie beffern. 4. Diefer 5Wann war überbiep auc^ beö SWorbeö öerbäcitig. Exercise. 1. We often took drives ( = fpaj{eren fahren) in a carriage in the country. 2. Did this happen in the day-time or in the night-time ? 3. Was the thief not conscious of his guilt (®c^utb,/) ? He was innocent. 4. You must choose the smallest (masc. ace. ) of these red balls. 5. Boys ! You ought to be careful of all your books in school. I02 German Grammar. Reference- Page RR.— Continued. B. of, preceded by a Verb in English, and followed by Noun or Pronoun : /'(Ace. of Person) «^^"^^"•^'«""«9^"i(Gen. of Thing) assure of, Uerft^em (same as above) be afraid of, ft^ fürc|)ten ÖOr (Dat.) iL withGen. 2. with über and Ace. be aware of \iä) (Gen.) betDltft fcin become of, Uicrbcn auö (Dat.) be in want of bebürfctl (Gen.) beware of, \iä) |)Ütcn ÜOr (Dat.) boast of, ftc^ rü()mcn (Gen.) complain of, Üagen über (Ace.) consist of, befielen in (Dat.) /. "«• r..^ r Ace. of Person convict of, überführend ^, . „, . ^^Gen. of Thing despair of, ücrjweifetn an (Dat.) die of. . fierben an (Dat.) [an illness'] disjjose of, üerfügen über (Ace.) doubt of, jn)etfeln an (Dat.) bejji^eifeln (Ace.) get rid of, ftc|) (Gen.) enttebigen hear of, i^ören ÖOn (Dat.) make sure of, flcf) (Gen.) i)erft($ern remind of, erinnern an (Ace.) , „ ^ . (Acq. of Person rob of, berauben^ ^, „ „, . (Gen. of Thing speak of, fjjvtc^en ÜOn (Dat.) take care of, forgen für (Ace.) fic^ (Gen.) annel;men take piossession of, füc| bemäci^tigen (Gen.) 23eft§ nehmen »on (Dat.) think of, benfen an (Ace.) gebenfen (with Genitive) C. of, not after an adjective or verb, but followed by a Noun or Pronoun. 1. omitted in German, the following Noun being in the Nominative or Accusative. (i) Before names of towns, countries, rivers, as : tlie town of Paris, bie ©tabt ^artö. (ii) Before materials, when not particularised, but preceded by words indicating measure, weight, number, etc., as : a pound of sugar =m\ ^funb ^üdiX. [See 3, ii. below.] (iii) In the days of the month, as : the third of January — ti it brittc 3an«ar. (vi) In the following phrases : ivhat sort of . . , two kinds o/ . . , as : What sort of man .•? = 2Ba8 für ein SÄann. 2. omitted in German, the following Noun being in the Genitive without preposition, (i) Indicating Possession, as : the dog of my brother =iin $unb meineö SruterÖ. (ii) In answer to the question : When ? but only in indefinite time, as : of a morning -'Ota ?OTorgenÖ. (iii) In compound Prepositions governing Genitive, as : instead of him = attfiait feiner, (iv) In the phrases : to die of hunger = ^uriQiX^ ficrbcn ; be of good cheer = Qütiä SOTnteÖ fein. 3. translated by Siott ; with dative of the following Noun (and its attributes). (i) Before and after cardinal numbers, as : tivo of my brothers = yoii\ t»on meinen Srübern. a town often thousand inhabitants - eim ©tabt tJon jcl;ntaufent) (5inivof)nern. (ii) Before materials, when particularised (especially by a whole clause), and preceded by words indicating measure, weight, number, etc., as : ax)otmd of the sugar which I like = tin ^funt» öon fcem ^udiX, ben id) iicbe. (iii) After ordinal numbers, as : the tenth of these days = iix jel;nte öon biefen Sagen. (iv) After titles followed by the name of a country, town, etc., as : the Queen of England = 'i)k ilönigin t>on gngtanb. (v) Before materials showing the nature of the preceding noun, as : a ship ofu'Ood=ein ©($iff öOtt |)Olj. (vi) After demonstrative or relative Pronouns, as : this 07ie of my boys = 'S>k^iX öon meinen Änaben. 4. Kendered by turning the noun Avith of into an adjective, as : gloves of Paris=faxiUx |)anbfc(;n(;e; a ship of ivood=iin ^öljerneö ®c(;ifF. 5. Rendered by forming compound nouns, as : the art of poetry, bie Stci;t=tunft the desire of pleasure, bte ^Sergnü« gungöfuj^t the drop of rain, ber S^egentfo^fcn the field of battle, baö ©^tadjtfctt» a garland of ßowers, ein 23Iunien= the love of life, bie Sebenöluft a man of business, ein @ef(|)äftÖ» mann a matter of fact, eine Zdi^adit a sign of life, ein Sebenöäciiiften N.B. — The pupil must be careful not to indulge too much in any haphazard formation of such compound nouns. Let him gradually make a collection of them, as he meets with them in his reading. Gerinan Grammai'. 103 Examples and Exercises on page 102. Examples. 1. The criminal was not only not ashamed of his deed, but boasted even of his shameful cruelty. 2. I must almost despair of your good-imll to conclude this matter quickly. 3. Of what has the child died ? I believe it died of the measles, or rather of their consequences. 1. ©er 3>crbrec|)er f^ämtc ftc^ nt^t nur feiner %ai nic^t, fonbern rüf;ntte ftc^ fogar feiner f^änb- (icl;en ©raufamfett. 2. 3($ mufj an 3(;rem guten SBitlen, biefeö @ef(|)äft fc^neU ju öoCfenben, fafi 5?erjn?eifcln. 3. 2(tt ix^as? if! baö Äinb gef^orben? 3(^ glaube, eö flarb an ben 9??afern, ober S)ietmel;r an beren golgen. Translate. 1. 2Bann hörten ®ie jum legten ?D?at »on ^^xim §errn ©ruber? 2. 3c() glaube faft, er ^at mic^ unb atte feine greunbe ganj »ergeffen, benn er ^at fc^on feit jivei 3ai)ren ni^t me^r an unö gefc^rieben. 2Baö ^at ber '^izb i^m genommen V ®r ^at i:^n alt feineö ©epäcfeö beraubt, (Jr bemä($tigte fi^ feiner 3itivelen, feiner U^r unb überhaupt alter feiner ©ac^en ; bocf) batman i^n gefangen unb beö SBerbre(^enö überführt. Exercise. 1. Wliat do you boast of? You have not even (nt^t einmal) seen London. 2. Give me three pounds o/tea at two shillings, and one pound at (^u, Dat. ) three shillmgs and sixpence. 3. Have you any more (nOC^) o/that tea (0. 3 iii.), which you showed me (Dat.) last week (Ace). 4. My father died on the nineteenth o/ Janiiary ; he was fifty-one years old. 5. Are you speaking o/ Henry, or are you thinking o/my cousin Charles ? Of {continued). Examples. 1. / fear very much, that that one of your friends, whom you love most, has not remained faithf id to you. 2. The general rode over the field of battle, zipon tvhich the dead lay thickly. 3. This is a matter of fact, which no one doubts, ivho knoios him. 1. 3c^ fiir^te fe^r, berienige bon 3f;ten greunbcn ben ®ie am meiflen tieben, ifi (fei) 3^nen nic^t treu gebticben. 2. ©er ©enerat ritt über baö ©c^la(^tfelb, auf bem bie Sobten t}\^i lagen. 3. (fö ifi bieö eine Statfac^e, bie ^iiemanb bejiveifelt, ber if;n !cnnt. 1. Die fpanif^en Seine ftnb in ber ganjen berü|)mt. 2. Stefe grau tt^ar immer guteö 2)?uteö, obgtei^ fie t>iel (Sorge um i^re Äinber gelitten l^ai. Translate. Sett Sir fa^cn bie Äaiferin öon Oeficrreic!^, bie in (Snglanb ein 3agbfrf;Io^ befaf . D^ne 3^ve |)ütfe fönneu \v\x tro^ alter Stnflren» gungen bie (Sac^e faum gtüdli^ ju Snbe führen. Exercise. 1. Give me a sign of Wie, when you arrive in the town of Berlin. 2. What do you do o/"an evening? We often speak o/our old friends in England. 3. He was the fourth of those unfortunate kings, who lost their lives (singidar). 4. Was the "Victory " {not translated) not a wooden ship ? Yes, it was (a wooden ship). 5. We lived three months in Bale, a town in Switzerland o/ 40, 000 inhabitants. 1 04 Gerfyian Grammar Reference-Page EE. — Continued. on {upon) (a) generally with meaning of locality = auf [Dative or Accusative (motion)]. (6) after some verba : to revenge oneself on = ft^ rächen an (dat. ) ; to have pity on = MitUit) ^abcn mit (dat. ) ; to wait on = bct)ienen (ace.) ; to reflect on-waä)'tiinUn über (ace.) ; to live o/7 = teben ÜOn (dat.) ; to feed on = \id) mi)xen v>on (dat.) ; to play on an instrument = (in Snfirument fpiclcn. (c) idiomatic use : on (before a day of the week or the month) = am ( = an bem) dat., am 3)?0ntag ; on the ■ arriüal='bei bet 5lnlitnft; on the occasion^hü ber ©etegen^eit; on rjeiü=ausJgeflent; on this side of= bieöfeitö (gen.) ; on that side of =UnUitS ; on account of—WtQiW (gen.), für (ace.) ; on my honour='bii metner S^re = auf S^rc; on board=m Sorb; on foot=^ü Su^; on horseback-^u ^ferb; on this condition =ünUx biefcr 33ebingung; on the contrary =im ©egcnteil; on (a river) = an (einem 5tu^); on one's travels=ax\^ Steifen; on (about) me^hii mir. to (a) after verbs of mot ion = an (ace), JU (dat.), na^) (dat.) with towns or countries. (b) after adjectives, generally not translated, but followed by dat. ["see page 94, C.]. However : j^olite to — ^Ofli^ gegen (ace); cruel to = graufam gegen (ace); deaf fo = taub gegen (ace); indifferent to = gteicf)9ÜItig gegen (ace) ; charitable to=t>arm^erjig gegen (ace). (c) a/i!e?' ver&s, generally not translated, but followed by dative. However: a^nount to = ^i(l) belaufen OUf (ace); apjyly to = fi^ richten (tvenben) an (ace); to attend to = ^^ abgeben mit (dat.); consent to = beiflimmen (dat.) = ft(^ fügen in (ace) ; to direct to=abref('{ren an (ace) ; pay attention to = achten or %^t geben ouf (ace) ; speal fo = fprec|)en ju (dat.) ; %vrite to = f^reiben an (ace). (d) idiomatic use: to church=in bie ^ird;e; to the marJcet = an^ ben 2)?ar!t; to school-in bie @c|)ute; to a house=xn ein f)aUÖ ; to the'country (rus)=:anf baö Sanb ; to the concert-in'^ (5^0njert ; to the toivnhall = auf'ö 3Rat^^au6 ; to thepost^aw^ bie f of! ; to put to flight = in bie glu^t f^tagen. with (a) generally = mit (dat.), especially speaking of the instrument or means. (b) =on account o/=ÜOr (dat.) as : to die ivith cold = 'OOX Äälte flerben. (c) =among, near=hü (dat.), as : ivith the English, hii ben Snglänbem. (d) after some verbs ; to agree ivith, =to suit = n:>Oi)littcmmin (dat.) eg belommt mir IVO^I; agree with (in opinion) beijlimmen (dat.); entfpred;en (Adi,t.) = Correspond with or to something, but: corresp)ond — ivrite ?o = correfponbiren mit (dat.) ; part with-\iö) entf(^tagen (gen.) = fc|)eiben i?on. The following have Dat. of person and Ace of thing: provide u//fÄ = liefern ; present ty/t/j = f^enfen ; meet with = begegnen; reproach u;/tÄ = S)or'ttjerfen; trust u//fÄ = anvertrauen; — it is all over with him=t^ ge^t ju @nbe mit i^m ; with all my heart ='oon ganjem ^erjen. N.B. — The other prepositions do not present much difficulty ; they will be foiind on page 52 with their German equivalents. The pupil must carefully remember that prepositions must be followed by Nouns or Pronouns ; otherwise they become adverbials. As to verbs in -ing after prepositions, see page 116, iv. d. iii. German Grammar 105 Examples and Exercises on Page 104. on and to. Examples. 1. It is not Ckristian-like, to revenge oneself on one''s enemies ; one ought rather to have pity on the misguided ones. 2. Do think of my question ! Where did you go on Ms arrival ? 3. / will 'pardon you, on [the) condition, that you promise me never to do it again. 1. ©Ö ifl nic^t c|)nflli^, ft^ an feinen geinben ju rä^en, man foltte e^er mit ben ^Berblenbeten 53?ttte(b ^aben. 2. Senfe bo^ üöcc meine grage na^! So^in giengfi bn ftci feiner Slnfnnft? 3. 3c^ ii>it( 3f;nen unter ber 23ebingnng öerjci^en, ba^ ®ie mir üerfprec|)en, e^ nie it^ieber ju tun. 1. ^ariö an ber ©eine unb ?onbon an ber 2;^emfe finb je^t bie größten ©täbte ©uropa'ö; einft tt)ar eö 9tom on ber Siber. 2. ©er gürfi giebt ft^ mit S)Zanc^cm ab, gegen ben er, wenn er noc^ ^riüatmann wäre, gtei^gültig wäre. Translate. 3. @eib nic^t graufam gegen Heine Spiere; manmu^ nie taub fein gegen bie ©timme beö @c|)merjeö. Senn ®ie näc^fienö an mi^ fc|)reiben, fo bitte i^ ®ie, 3^rc ©riefe an mi^ 9iumero breifig, Subwigfirafe, S)Zünc|)en, Sapcrn, ju abreffiren. Exercise. 1. On this side of this mountain lies France, on that side Italy. 2. One often meets men on (his) journeys, whom one least expects (am Wenigjlen). 3. Boys, pay attention to this sentence : Be polite to your superiors (33orgefe^ten). •4. While you went to school, we were at church, and he went to his uncle. 5. This picbui'e is on view now ; it was carried to the town hall yesterday. with and other prepositions. Examples. 1. «ei ben römifd)en iilaifern war es? ber 33rau^ bem ^öbel große gefie ju »eranfiatten, urn fi4) ben* fetben günftig ju ftimmen. I. (So tut we(;' bon feiner f)eimat ju f^eiben unb tjun 2(Kem, baö man tiebt. 1. With the Roman emperors it ivas the custom to arrange great festivities for the populace, so as to gain its favour. 2. It grieves one to p>art with one's home, and all that one loves. 1. 21B i^ Urn begegnete, gab' i^ i^m 3^r.(Smpfe^{ungö' fc^reiben, unb er ftimmte «tit mir barin überein baß eö am S3eften wäre, fpät im §)erbfi nac^ SRom ju ge^en. Translate, 2. Sie 5Racbrid;tcn öon tjerfc^iebenen Seiten ftimmen mit bem ^ri»atbriefe, ben ©ie ermatten :^aben, barin überein, baß er fc^on Dor mehreren Sa^i^en in S^icago geflorben ifi. Exercise. 1. You may trust him with your secret ; he will never betray your trust. 2. We waited, but, as he did not come, we went away to school. 3. On account of the arrival of these guests, our excursion was postponed (auffc^iebcn), 4. The king reproached his general with this negligence, and we think he was right. 5. This corresponds with my expectations ((Erwartungen) ; he is ruined (ruinirt). io6 German Grammar Reference-Page FF. Remarks on some of the Pronouns. I. Personal. (a.) The genitive of Personal Pronouns is rarely used, except with verbs and prepositions which govern the Genitive, as : anftatt fctlier, imtead of him; id; erinnere nttci; ^i)XtX, I remember you. N.B. urn ... tv in en and tu eg en have a peculiar alteration of r into t in the Genitive of the Personal Pronoun, um fetnetJinncn,/o?- Ms sal-e ; i^retipegen, on her (or their) account. (h.) fid^ is both dative and accusative; thus: fic|) (Dat.) ÖOrWetfen, ^o reproach oneself, makes: i(|) tüCtfe ntiv »or, bit tinrfft tiv ÖOr, etc ; but fid) (Ace.) tljafc^en, to toash oneself, makes : id) Waf^e ntii^, bit n?äfcl;efi bid;, er iväfd;t fid;, etc. ftiJi has often the meaning of iina\it)ix=one a?iother, as: fie tieben fic^, they love one another. II. Possessive. (a) mine, thine, his, ours, after to he, to become, to remain, to call, are sometimes simply and invariably mein, bein, fein, unfer, as : this pen is mme = biefe geber ifl: mein. (b) Such expressions as : a brother of mine, both of us, all of you, cannot be rendered literally ; they are translated: einer meiner trüber ; irirbeibe; öie aüe. (c) ber (bie, baö) meinige, etc. ; ber (bie, baö) meine, etc. ; and meiner, meine, meinet, can never be used before a noun ; they have exactly the same meaning, and may be used one for the other ; euphony alone decides which to use in translating mine, etc. (see page 60, I.). III. Relative. {a) Remember that the relative pronoun m.ust in German stand first in the relative clause (except it be accompanied by a preposition), and that the Assertion must be last in the clause, thus : the town, the public buildings of which you admired so much, lies in my native country — tiie Stabt, tiercn öffentlid)^ ©ebäube ®ie fo fcl;r beivnnbcrten, litQt in meinem ^eimatlanbe. Therefore such expressions as: both of which, all of which, some of which, cannot be literally translated ; we must render : both of which I saw, by : H)eld)e ic^ beibe fa|) ; all of which I hioiv, by : bie id) aöe fenne; some oftvMch he gave me, by : i)on bcnen er mir einige gab. (b) Relative pronouns must introduce the relative clause, though in English the relative be omitted, thus : the man J saxo must be rendered by : bet SWann IVelc^cn (or ben) i^ fa^. (c) There are two relative pronouns in German, tQc((t)et (etc.), and bet: (etc.); they have exactly the same meaning = wÄo or which, and may be generally used indifferently, but if preceded by a Personal Pronoun of the 1st or 2d person, in the Nominative, ber (and not ivelci^er) must be used ; in this case the personal pronoun is often, for the sake of emphasis, repeated after the relative, as : / who went there=id), ber i^ bal;in gieng; ive who sent you this present-wit, bie wix 3^nen biefeö ©efc^enf fc^idtcn. (d) Remember that the interpolation of a relative sentence in any clause does not in any way alter the sequence of words in this latter Clause, as : Seil ber ^Wann, ben i^ ^i)mn empfal;!, ^^mn ni^t l Because the man, ivhom I recommended to you, did gefiel, fo tt^erbe id^ 3^nen einen Stnbcren f^iden. I notj)lc-asc you, I will send you another. German Grammar 107 Examples on Exercises on Page 106. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE. Exam'ples. 1. The. messenger tvent for the sake of this letter to the post once more; it was only on your account, dear cousin (f.). 2. Do not iynagine, that you will ever obtain a prize, if you do not apply yourself more to the study of German. 3. We lost one of our sticks on the icay hither, ive think. 1. Ser 33ote gieng urn biefeö Sriefeö toiOcn no^ einmal auf bte ^ofl ; eö wax nur ^^vettoeqen, meine (iebe 5?afe. 2. 33ilbe bir nid^t ein, ba§ t»u je einen ^reiö et« langen n^irft n?enn bu biOf beö ©tubiumö beö Deutfc^en nic^t mel;r befleifeft. 3. 2Bir verloren einen unfcret ©töcfe auf bem SSege ^iev^er, glauben mir. Translate. Um eincö 3Dan!eömorteö mitten jlürjte fi^ biefer junge Tlann in^ß Baffer, um bie Slume ju ^olen. ®ie mußten rec^t mo^I, baf biefe geber ni4)t mein mar, lieber Äarl. (Sä tut mir leib, einen meiner $anbfc^uf;e bort üertoren ju :^aben. Erinnern Sie fic^ noc^ meiner? O ja, ic^ !ann mic^ 3^rer noc^ fe^r gut erinnern. Exercise. 1. Is thi J a friend of yours ? Oh, no ; it is one of my enemy's brothers. 2. The man, whom you saw, came to you /or my sähe. He is a messenger of mine. 3. We remember him ; he went once with us to London in the train (Sifenba^n,/.). 4. We saw both of them at the theatre last night ((jefiern 5(bcnb). 5. Is this my stick ? No, it is mine, you know you have lost yours. 1. These tioo men, both of whom I hnoiv tvell, are Americans. 2. We received the letter you lorote to us from Munich. 3. We who are Englishmen ought to learn the English language also. RELATIVE. Examples. 1. Siefe jmei Scanner, t>ie id^i 6cit>c fe^r gut fennc, it'nb Hmerifaner. 2. Sir ^aben ben Srief er{)alten, ben ©ie unö öon 3Äünc(;cn fc^rieben. 3. 2Sir, bie twir Snglanber finb, fottten (x\x6) bic englifc^e ©praise lernen. Translate. I. 2Str fo|)en »{etc Änaben, t>on bcncn toiv einige fannten, im glufe baben ; eö mar »erboten. 2. 2)Zein greunb fc^rieb mir, bag id;, t>cr ici^ Sufi ^abe, 2J?atrofe ju merben, mi^ nac^ Siöerpoot begeben foüte. 3. Sie Äteiber, meiere ®ie gepern auf ber 3agb trugen unb bie ganj nag unb fc^mu^ig maren, itnb ie§t mieber ganj trocfen, unb ber ©iener, bem irf; fte gab, t;at fie au^ mieber gereinigt unb gebürflet. Exercise. 1 . We saw the dog you bought yesterday, and we think it is beautiful. 2. Thou, who (thou) art in the house all day ( = the whole day [ace.)), art not in good health. 3. This is the horse, the beauties of which you admired ; but it is ill now. 4. Rome, whose armies conquered the world, was [passive) itself (felbji) conquered by those barbarians, whom the Romans despised as (atö) barbarians. io8 German Grammar. Reference- Page FF.— Continued. IV. Remarks on some Indefinite Pronouns. {a) ma», one, peoj^le, they. Do not confound this with bet 9)Zann, ungen finb beut 33aterlanbe geivei^t all my love, all my endeavours are dedicated to my native land. (iii) All in the sense of the lohole is ber (bie, baö) ganje, or: ganj invariable before towns or countries, as : all the loorld, bie flanje Söelt; all Germany, gan^ S)cutfc{;lanb. (iv) All tl]at = atiiS ivaö, where tt)aÖ has the force of a relative pronoun, as: StKeÖ, wa^ i^ U befeffen ^ahe, ifl verloren, all that I ever possessed, is lost. (v) All in the sense of ere?-?/ = jeber (jebe, jcbeö), as: at all hours, ju jcber otlinbe; every day = jcben XaQ or alte 2;age [cf. French ; tons les ]o\iYS = every day]. (c) Much, little, before materials, ai'c invariable, Diel, ivenig, as: much sugar ='01(1 (not öielei*) 3ucEer; little gold = \vemQ (not ivenioeä) @olb. (d) Many, few, are declined [as well as both and all] in the Plural, thus ; N. and A . fiele, many it)cnige,/ew beibe, both alte, all Genitive t)ieler, of many iDeniger, of few beiber, of both aüer, of all Dative fielen, to many ivenigen, to few beiben, to both alten, to all manege, several, many manner, of several manchen, to several As : (Sr glaubt ivenigen 2cuten=Ae believes (d&t.) few j^eople. (e) A few, einige, met;rere, is declined like 'okU'^ but ; a little, ein ifenig, is invariable : icf) 1)aie ein mnxQ ffiein ; Einige Knaben :^abcn ein iüenig 2)eutf(| gelernt = a/e(r boys have learnt a little German. if) Another in the sense of " a different one " is ein anberer, eine anbere, etc., declined like an adjective in the second form (see Reference-Page G), as: biefeö Suc|) ifi fct;mu^ig, gieb mir ein anbereö = iefe Sl^^fel fct;r gern, geben ®ie mir nod; n\Kn = IUke these ajjples very much, give me another. ig) (Some) more = woä) (mel;r) (invariable), as : Do you like these cherries? Yes, give me some moj'e=f)aben ©ie biefe Äirf^en gern ? 3a, bitte geben @ie mir nod; mel;r (or nod; WiW). (h) No /?70/e = feiner mef;r, feine mcl;r, etc. ; decline feiner as adj. of 2d Form: He has no more [money] = er t;at fcineä mct;r; er l)at fein (Selb met;r. German Grammar 109 Examples and Exercises on Page 108. 1. ''Tis indeed true, one must look to one's affairs oneself, if they are to be i^roper^ly done. 2. All his 2^ossessions and property the prince lost in this battle ; all his hopes he buried there. 3. It is not yet the end of the world ; one shoidd never despair, hope remains still always to us. On (a), (b), (c), (d). Examples. 1. Q^ ifl in t>cr Zat iva^r, «tan ntuf feine @efd;äftc felftcr bcforgcn, ipcnn fte gut beforgt fein foüen. 2. ata fein @ut unb Sefi^tum »ertor ber gütfi in t»iefcr ®d)tac^t; nitc feine Hoffnungen ^at er ba ^u ©rabe getragen. 3. ©ö ifi no^ ni^t «Her Seit ©nbe, man ntuf nie »erjagen, benn bie fjoffnung hkiit unö ia immer noc^. Translate. 1. dß ifi ni^t 2Cac« ®otb, twoS gtänjt, unb boc^ jagen bie 3)?enfc^en fo oft atöem nac^, t«o§ üon Seitent glänjt. 2. 3d; fürcf)te öor atHcm, er tt?erbe mit ott feinem Siffen eö nie n)eit bringen. 3. 2((l fein Siffen ifl nic|t weit :^er, obfc^on er auf allen Uniüerfttäten jlubirt I;at. 4. «ic^c ge^en öott |)Offnung in bie grembe, aber assc'niflc feljren glücflicf) wieber I;eim: icl;fage: 33(eif)' im Sanb unb nä(;r' bi^ reblid;. Exercise. 1. We remained ten years in America, but were unlucky in all our enterprises. 2. These men had indeed much luck, yet they made little money in two years. 3. He has forgotten all that he ever knew ; he is now ill in body and mind. 4. One should be charitable to one's neighbours, for sooner or later one may need charity oneself. 5. There is vi^ich money in England ; but no (niäft) little poverty and misery also. On (e), if), (g), (h). Examples. He spoke of a few people, tvhom 1 knew formerly personally. Give me another towel ; I tvant another ; this one is luet and dirty. There is no more hope ; he is dead. 1. dx fprac^ »on einißcn Seuten, bie id) fetbfi früf;er perfönlid) fannte. 2. Oieb mir ein anbcrcö ^anbtu^; i^ Ua\ieS)i noc^ cineö ; biefe«^ i^ na|5 unb fi^mu^ig. 3. So ift feine Hoffnung mel;r ba ; er ifl tobt. Translate. 1. ©eben ®ie mirnocfi ein wenig Sutterbrob, bitte ; iä) ^ahi fcine§ mci)v, unb eö ijl »orjüglid;. 2, |5aben @ie noi^ö (mc^r) »on biefen digarrcn? SS5enn ®ie noc^ »on biefer ®orte I;aben, fd;iden ®ie mir gefätligj^ ein ^ifiä)itt k 25 Tlaxt ^eute no0. 3. Sr »erlangte nod) einen Sipfel unb bann nocfi einen ; eö fd;eint aU ob er bie fipfel fct;r gerne ä^e. 4. asscnige Seute finb wirüi^ glücfiic^ ; ^aben fte öiel, fo wünfci|)en fie me^r; :^aben fte nur toenig, fo ftnb fie mit bcm SSJenigen, baö fte I;aben, ni^t jufrieben. Exercise. 1. We like these apples ; please send us a dozen more to our house. 2. He has spent (ausgeben) all his money ; now he has not any more (no more). 3. We often wish we had chosen another town ; but we have no more choice now. 4. The king has added (I;inju'fügen) another country to his kingdom. 5. The merchant had a few boxes (Äi|len) (of) books ; he has learnt a little German now. I lO German Grammar. Reference-Page GG. On the Government of Verbs. Verbs may be followed in German : I. by Nouns or Pronouns ; IL by other Verbs in the Infinitive or Past Participle ; and, III. by subordinate clauses with a verb finite in them, I. Verhs followed hy Nouns or Pronouns. A. Noun or Pronoun in the Nominative (see page 82) after these six verbs only : bleiben, to remain ; ^eipen or (jel)eifen iverben, to he called ; fc^eineit, to api^ear ; fein, to he ; and jverben/ to hecome. As : er ifl ein S'önig geblieben = Ae has remained a king. B. Noun or Pronoun in the Accusative after a verb. [See also page 102, top.] (a) After all verbs, which in German coalesce with a preposition governing accusative, as : to ansiuer a question = antn^orten auf eine grage ; to declare him a rascal=i^n für einen Q^nxten erflären ; to consider one a /ooZ=®incn für einen Starren l;atten ; to recollect a name-\i6) an einen 9Jamen erinnern. (b) After all transitive verbs, as : einen Stpfet ^oten, to fetch an apple ; i.e. all verbs which can be turned into the Passive Voice, as : ber Stpfel ivirb gei^Olt. (c) After the following (and a few more) the direct object (generally the thing which is ...d) is in the Accusative, and the person to whom the thing is ...d, is in the Dative. [N.B. Dative before Accusative, see p. 83.] [approach, (jt^) nähern] bring, bringen dedicate, mibmen, ireipen give, geben grant, gett>ä^ren impute, ju'fc^^reiben lend, leiten offer, an'bieten owe, ban!en, fd^ulben imrdon, üerjei(;en present (loith), fc^enfen recommend, empfehlen refuse, ab'f^Iagen relate, erjagten send, fc^icEen shoiü, geigen [submit, (ftc|>) unterwerfen] spare (save), erfparen take aioay, jveg'ne{;men tell, fagen as : er braute bent ÄiJnig einen Se^er=Äe brought {to) the king a cup. {d) After the following (and a few more) the direct object (the person) is in the accusative, and the indirect object (the thing) in the genitive. [N.B. Person before Thing, see p. 83.] absolve fj-om, cntbinben accuse of, an'ftagen assure of, Derfic^em convict of, überfül;ren dismiss from, entfe^en deprive of, entljcben favour with, tpürbigen rob of, berauben C. Noun or Pronoun in the Dative after a verb. [See also p. 102, to,'\ (a) After all verbs, which coalesce in German with a preposition governing the dative, as : to fpre^en öon (dat.). (b) After the following (and many more), with prefixes : Wx, entgegen, ÖOt, nac!^, JU ; and : ent*, tvibcr«) of= command, befc(;Ien communicate, niit'teiten escape from, entflie(;en flatter, fc|)meic^etn follow, folgen advise, raten allow, erlauben answer, anttvorten avoid, auö'i»eic(;en belong to, gel;(>ren (c) With some impersonals, as : it is ofuse=tä Wü^t '-, it hap2:)ens = i& gef4)ief;t; it occurs {to me) — Zi faßt (lUir) ein; I succeed- z^ gelingt mir (bir, i^m, etc.). hurt, fc^aben meet, begegnen obey, ge^orc(;en p)lease, gefallen reproach, i)Ortt)erfen seem, fc|)einen serve, bienen thank, banfen threaten, broken trust, ju'traucn D. Noun or Pronoun in the Genitive after a verb. [See also pp. 100 and 102.] (a) After : cr aJeruntceuung ange- t(agt unt) ^alte it)n für einen Sicft. 2. 33itte, leiten ®te tocm Jlnaftcn SOren 9iegen- f c^irm, benn ei3 regnet (iarf. 3. ©rinncrte er it^ an jene Gegebenheit? Translate. SBer immer ein ef;rti^er Mam\ bleiben Witt, mitf ber 33erfnc()nng auö bem SÖege gel;en, fo öiel er fann. 2Bir erftären ben 2)Jann für einen bummen Äert, ber ftc:^ ben ©efe^en bcö Sanbeö, worin er lebt, wiberfe^t. 3. 33itte, lieö biefen ©rief; er ifl üon beinern alten greunb in @t. ^etcröburg. 4. 2)ie 5(ntme erjäl;(te ben ilinbern eine ©eifler- gefc|)ic^te ; boi^ ber Später oerbot i^r, bieö je wicber ju tun, benn er :^atte eö für ungeraten (imadvisable). Exercise. 1. They offered him a post (©tefie,/. ) in South Africa ; but he did not go. 2. I favoured him with my confidence, but I found he betrayed it {t>erraten). 3. Tell the boys they ought (foUen) to bring me their exercises to-morrow. 4. That good son sent his parents every Christmas (2ßei(;nftC^ten,/.) some presents. 5. He owed it to me, that he was recommended to the piincipal of this school. On I. C. and D. Example. 1. Of what are yoib speaking ? I spealc of the clergyman 1. SQon Waö fpred;cn ©ie'^ ^^ fprecfje tiiin bent loho preached last Sunday. 2. It loas of no "use to the lawyer that he called up this witness in the laivsuit. 3. We say it serves the fellow right [it happens right to the f.) for he has deserved heavy punishment. ©eifiti^en, ber legten ©onntag prebigte. 2. (iö nü^te bent 2tböofaten nic^tJ?, baf er bicfen 3eugen in bem ^roceffe aufrief. 3. Sir fagen, eö gefcf;ie^t t»em ütvi xidji, benn er M fc^were ©träfe öerbient. Translate. 1. Sie beftnben ©iefic^? S«!» t'Ctnfe, i^ erfreue mic^ 3. ©iefe 2trt unb u^i guter @efunb{)eit feit einigen 2>?onaten (dat.). 2, Obglei^ biefer gc^Ier iitm S)erjiel;en würbe, wür» bigte i^n ber ^rinjipal ber @c|)ute boc^ nie wieber feinet ganjen 95ertrauenä voiz üor^er. eife ju leben, wirb nur Sftnen fetbfi f(i;aben, unb i^ empfe|)Ie 3^uen, 3^re Sebenöweife ju änbern. 4. 2)?an fotfte jtc^ fletö feiner SöJitmenft^cn erbarmen wenn fie im Unglücf finb, benn eö ifl mcgiic^, ba^ Wir i^ter, frü(;er ober fpäter, fetbfl: bebürfen. Exercise. 1. Do not accuse this boy of the theft, if you are not quite sure. 2. Children should (foüen) follow the advice of their parents and teachers. 3. You may (lonuen) threaten me as much as you like (WOKen) ; I am not afraid. 4. Permit me, my friend, to (JU) tell you, that I think you are wrong. 5. Whom did you meet ? I only met two children, who were going to school. 1 1 2 Ger^nan Grain^nar. Reference-Page GG.— Continued. II. Verbs followed by other Verbs. [Infinitive or Past Participle.] A. The ten auxiliaries, and a few other verbs sometimes used like auxiliaries. 1. fein, to be, (a) with the Infinitive Passive in English, is rendered by ju with the Infinitive active in German, as : it is to befeared = e^ ifi JU fürc|)ten. [N.B. — In questions and in the Inversion this c8 is omitted.] {b) with the Past Participle of another verb forms the Compound Tenses of the latter, as : he has {is) gone=tx ifi gegangen. 2. I) ab en, to have, (a) with the Infinitive Active of another verb, is rendered by JU and Infinitive : he has to do it = er ^at eö ju tun. [h) with the Past Participle of another verb forms the Compound Tenses of the latter, as : he has done it = n ^at eö getan. 3. toetbett/ to become, (ft) with the Infinitive, without JU, forms the Future, as : YOit Werben eö fe^en = tüe shall see it; er tt)irb eö gefe:^en ^a^m = he will have seen it. {b) with the Past Participle of another verb, forms its Passive voice, as : he was (became) pu7iished-iX ivurbe beftraft. [In Compound Tenses with another verb, use tdoctien —no ge=.] 4. The seven auxiliaries of mood : bürfcn, to be alloived ; tonnen, to be able; taffen, to let; mögen, to like; muffen, to be obliged; fotlen, ought; and ttJOtlen, to be willing, take Infinitive luithout ^u after them, as : er burfte !ommen, he was allowed to come. J^ote. — The English Infinitive Passi^'e after to allow, laffen, must be rendered by the Infinitive ^ ciü'e in German without JU, as : / cdlov) it to be brought = id) laffe eö bringen. _^.2?. The Compound tenses of these seven auxiliaries, if used with other verbs, are formed with their Infinitives and not their Past Participles, as : er ^at fommen biiuf ctt, not geburft. 5. Some nine verbs may be used as auxiliaries (besides the ten above), viz.: bleiben, to remain; füllen, to feel; :^eifen, to order; |)ctfen, to help; ^öxcn, to hear; fet;en, to see; Ie{;ren, to teach; lernen, to learn ; and mad;en, to make, force, as : er bleibt fielen, he remains standing. N.B. — These, however, form their Compound Tenses with their Past Participles as all ordinary verbs do, thus : ift er fielen gel&licbcn? = Aa.s (is) he remained standing (has he stopped) ? B. All other verbs require ju before the Infinitive which may be governed by them, thus : i(| befall t^m ju ge|)en = / comma?! fZerf him to go. Remark, however, the idioms: fpajieren ge(;en, to go a toaih ; fpajieren faT;rcn, to take a drive; fpajicren reiten, to take a ride on horseback; fc^Iafcn gc|)en, to go to bed; betteln ge^^en, to go a-begging ; and a few more with ge^en, as : trinfen ge^en=«o go to drink, etc. III. Verbs governing subordinate clauses. (a) Verbs of saying, asking, etc., introducing indirect speech, either with or without bflft (see page 78). (b) Verbs of wishing, fearing, doubting, are generally followed by Subjunctive in the subordinate clause, as : id; fürrfjte, er fei tObt = //ear he is dead. JV.S.— Verbs connected with fcamit, so that; tvenn, if; alö Ob, alö tvenn, as if, require Subjunctive in the subordinate clause ; the last two always Imperfect Sidyjunctive. Gerniaii Grauunar. '13 Examples and Exercises on Page 112. On II. A. ExarrvpUs. What 07ie hau to do, one ought to do soon and well ; it is no use to delay it. Wlien the beggar came to our door, it toas to he expected that the dog would bark. Peace has at last been concluded, after this long and terrible loar. 1. Sao man ju tun ^ai, fott man batb unb gut tun; eö nü^t nid^tö, eö aufjufc^ieben. 2. 5((ö ber Setttcr an unfere 2;üre fam, toat j« tvxoatten, baö ber |)uub beute. 3. ^^ \^ enblic^ grteben gef(^lofTen VDOtben, nod^ biefem langen, fc^redlic^en Kriege. Translate. 3)?cin ®o:^n \)Cii lefen fönncn, als? er »ier ^(kf)xt a\{ war ; ic^ ^abe i^n felbji tefen flclciitt; benn er tt>ar ju f(|)tt)äc^Iic^ um in bte öffentliche cr ^öt mic^ eingraben, il;n ju befugen, aber ic|) fonnt« ni4)t frü:^er fommen. 2. „Saf' fie betteln ge^en, n?enn fte hungrig finb." Ser nic^t arbeitet, foH nic|)t effen. 3. 9[>?an fagte mir, ®ie tt)ären le^teö ^a^x in ber ©c^iveij unb im Sirol gen^efen. Translate. 2)er S3ote jtreifette, ob er bie ©tabt jur 3ett erreichen fönnte, benn eö tvar f^on fe^r fpät am Sage. gürc|)ten ®ie nid()t, er ttjürbe fi^ in grofe ©efa:^r prjen, ujenn er mit biefem ^ferbe auf bie SagbgicngeV 3c^ ^abc eine Sl^nung, ixU ob mir etmaö fe|r Unangenehme^ guftof en (happen) ivürbc. Sir f^rieben 3^nen, bamit ®ie auf ber |)ut fein foüten (takecare) Wenn er S^nen begegnen würbe ; benn er ifi ein ©cftwinbter, unb man barf i^m ni^t trauen. Exercise. 1. We do not fear, that you will meet with [any] thieves ; but take care (see 4 above). 2. Has any one (3emanb) commanded you to go to their neighbour this evening ? 3. I do this, so that you may know, that you have one friend in the old countiy. 4. They tell me, that you went for a walk during this rain ; it was very foolish (törit^t). 5. The horses go to drink, and that boy leads the first of them. 1 1 4 German Grammar. Reference-Page HH. On the Translation of the English Infinitive. The English Infinitive may be used as a substantive, or it may be governed by a verb, an adjective, or a noun. I. The English Infinitive used suhstantivehj : (a) As Subject, translate it by an infinitive with neuter article, as : To lie is disr/raceful—tdS Sügen i^ »erabft^euungöJvürbtg. To sit too lonf/=ia^ p lange ®i^en. N.B.—The article is sometimes omitted, especially in proverbs : 33eten unt> SttbcttClt, To jn-ay and to loork. (b) As Object : (1) dependent on another verb, as : lie is used to work, er ifi an t>aÖ iUcfieiten gett)öf;nt. (2) hoiv to..., wJiat to..., ivhere to..., after such words as to know, must be resolved into subordinate clauses introduced by Wii, tt>aÖ, TOO (TOO^in, etc.), as : he knoivs hoio to write=ix lt>eif, tt)ie man fc^retbt (or fc|)reiben foüte). (3) The English Accusative and Infinitive after to knoio, to believe, to loish, etc., must be resolved into a subordinate clause with or without baf, that, as : We knew that man to be a thief— wix mitten, ba^ jener Tlann ein ©teb HJor— or : jener Tlann wax ein ©teb. II. The English Infinitive governed by a Verb. [For this, see page 112.] III. The English Infinitive governed by an adjective. (liememhcr : Infin. at end of sentence) : (a) Such adjectives as curious, neugierig; difficidt, fc^TOer; easy, teid;t; eager, begierig; possible, mögticl; impossible, unmög(irf), require in German the Infinitive with JU : it ivill be easy to do that — t9 trirb leicht fein, baö 511 tun. (6) Adjectives preceded by too, ju ; and adjectives followed by enough, genug, require the Infinitive with um...ju, as: He is too good to do this loicked deed =zx \^ ^ix o,\xi, um biefe f^Ied;te %tc %Xt\^t\{\ the courage, bei* 9)?ut; the necessity, bte 9^ottt)enbtgf ett ; a desire=a mind, ?u|i (without article); the duty, bte ^flt^jt; the pleasure, baö SSergnügeit; the wish, ber äßunfc^, must be rendered by Infinitive with ju in German, as : It loill be a pleasure for me to write to you=(p, wixi mix ein SSergnügen fein, an ©ie ju f tfjtciften ; I had a mind to go to London = id) ^atii Sufl, nac|) Sonbon 5U gcfic«. Idiomatic : He is just about to go there=tx tviü eben ba^in ge^en. Purpose is indicated by um...JU with Infinitive, as : He gave me money to buy the books=ix gab mir @elb, um tie ©lieber JU faufen. GevDian Grammar 115 Examples and Exercises on Page 114. On I. and II. Example. 1. We scarcely know how to act ill this affair; at any rate it is advisable to wait a little longer. 2. Of what use is it to hunt after money and wecdth 1 3. He hated to ride in a railway carriage ; he iiref erred to ride on horseback. Sir iinffen faum, toic wir in biefer Stngetegen^cit ^anbetn folten ; jcbenfaKö ifi zva. längere^ a33ar= ten geraten. 2öaä nü^t t>oS ^afd^ctt nac^ ®etb unt> @ut? Sr ^a§te bas3 ga^ren in ber Sifenbafin ; er jog baö Breiten ju '^Jferb öor. Translate . 1. 2Ber baö Säen [sowing seed) üemac^Iäffigt, fann nic^t auf reic|)Iic|)eö ernten (reaping) hoffen. 2. 2)aö|fpäte 3«=«ett=ge^cn unb baö fpäte 2tuf fte^en am 9)?ürgen ftnb ber ©cfunb^eit nachteilig, ivenn eö ju oft gefc|)iel;t. 3. 9J?an braucht ftc^ über fein Stcfjlen nit^t ju üer= »runbern, benn fein |)ang jum Sügen »var ja n?o^Ibefannt. 4. 3itm Sauaensen [idling) ^oibi ic^ feine 3cit; ber ganje 2:ag ifl bei mir mit Slrbeiten auögefüCtt. Exercise. 1. To-walk-too-rapidly or to-run-too-much is injurious to one's Iiealth. 2. My clear mother always told me : " To-pray and to-work bring blessing. " 3. To-read in the dusk (©ämmerung) is injurious to one's eyes (say : to the eyes). 4. Do you know where to go (whither you should go) and what to say (-what you should say) ? 5. The king believed him to be a very capable soldier ; but he proved himself to be rash. On III. and IV Example. It is scarcely possible to let Louisa have this letter before she goes away. He had not the courage at all, to stand up to his accuser; he ivas too cowardly to face public opinion. We should like [should have a mind) to hear him sing once ; but it cannot be to-day. 1. So ifl fauni möglich, Souifen biefen Srief jufommen 5u laffen, öor fie fortgebt. 2. (ix ^atte gar nic^t ben 9)?ut, üor feinen 2(n!iäger ju treten; er irar jn feige fic^ ber öffentlicfien 9}?einung cntgegenjuf^etlen. 3. Sir Ratten Sufl, iW einmat fingen jn |ören, aber eö ge^t ^eute nic&t. 1. t)iefer 9??ann wax vn^ genug, um ben SSerlufl nic^t JU füllen. 2. Siefer gute Skatet gab feinem (So^ne ®elb, um brci 3)?onate in fRom jujubringen, unb ft^ bafetbfi mit ben Serfen ber alten 3Weifler befannt ju machen. Translate. 3. So würbe unö wirfiic^ fe^r t»iet 3Sergnügen matten, (Sie mit unö ju nehmen, aber wir fürcfjten, ®ie feien nicfit fiarf genug, um bie Slnprengungen auöju^alten. 4. |)atte er nic|t Suf}, ©olbat ju werben? D ja, aber fein SBater ertaubte eö ni^t. Exercise. 1. Will you give us the pleasure to come to (ju) us to-morrow evening ? 2. The little girl was curious to see the nest, which her brother brought home (nac^ f)aufe). 3. You see, you have the choice to go to London or to (uac!)) Bristol. 4. We gave you this watch, in order to re-ward you for your diligence (Jlei^ in.). 5. When the messenger arrived, we were just about to leave the town. 1 1 6 German Grammar Reference-Page KK On the Translation of the verbal in -ing. I. The verbal in -ing used substantively, whether subject or object in a sentence, is always translated by an Infinitive unthout ju, but with the article, in German, unless the German idiom has a real substantive for the same idea, thus : hunting, t>aö ^aQtw or tie 309*' J P^f^u^ng, baö (Spielen or baö ©piel. IL The verbal in -ing in apposition to a noun or adjective is rendered by an Infinitive with JU in German, as : the necessity of doing this = 'tii ''Rctmn'tiQUü, bietJ ju tnu; it is easy of acquiring = iä ifl Uii^t ju lernen. Ill The verbal in -ing used as an adjective is ahvays translated by the Present Participle in German, and declined like an adjective in the three forms (see Eeference-page G) if used before a noun, but it remains invariable if used after to be, to become, etc., as : ein licöenbcS Äinb, a loving child ; I have a iiuing dog, i^ I;abe einen Icftcuben §)unt) ; ber S5rief ift tintetljaltent {invarlahle), the letter is amusing ; thus: laughing, iai^tnti. IV. The verbal in -ing used in its verbal character, i.e. as a verb, — (a) when completing the signification of another verb, as: to go on doiiig & thing, etc., is translated by Infinitive with ju, as : er ^örte auf, ju fingcn = /te stopped singing. (6) after instead o/and vntlioid, it is translated by Infinitive with JU, as : roe went there instead of remaining at home = mx giengen t)af;in, anflatt ju f»nufe ju ^reiften. (c) When after a noun or pronoun, with a relative force, it is translated by a relative clause in German, as : the man bearing the iveigltt-\}n 2)knn, ber bie Sajl trug, . . . N.B. — Distinguish this from the next following meaning of the verbal in -ing. {d) In all other cases the verbal in -ing is resolved into a subordinate clause, introduced by a subordinate conjunction [generally ba^, or one compounded with ba^, except in iv. below]. (i.) Verbal in -ing preceded by a possessive adjective, as : he heard of my doing this = ix ^örte, bflft iH) bicö tat. (ii.) Verbal in -ing preceded by a Genitive, as : his father's knoioing this does not seem to disturb him = ba^ fein 3?ater bieö mi^, f^eint i^n niä)t ju bcfünimern. (iii. ) Verbal in -ing preceded by a preposition (except instead of and witiioiU, and sometimes on or of [see IV. b above] ; with these latter the Infinitive with JU is preferable) : he is jmid for playing = ix ifi bafiir beja^It, bafj cr fpielt [for that, that hex>lays]. (iv, ) Verbal in -ing not dependent on another word, indicates reason, or time. (aa) reason: translate the verbal in -ing by subordinate clause introduced by t>a or twcil, because, as : he coidd do it, being rich = tx fonnte eö tuu, ba (Jveil) er rei^ ifl. (bb) time: (A) referring to a past event, use aid, ivhen ; thus : arriving at the river, he hesitated to cross over=ali er am gtu^e anfam, jögerte er f;inüberjufe^en. (B) referring to an action taking place at the same time as another, use inbcm or t»äf)ven^, ivhilst, as: eating his dinner, lie conversed with me = tuäl)ten'o (or inbeni) er JU SKittag fpcifle, fpract; er mit mir, (C) referring to an action completed before another action, use nat^bcnt/ after, thus : having done this, he went aicay=na6)'{>cm er bieö getan f;atte, gieng er n>eg. Ge7'uian Gra^umar 117 Examples and Exercises on Page 116. On I. II. III. Examples. 1. Riding is very condiicive to health, if it is not con- tinued to complete exhaustion. 2. Cultivating the earth is an old and honourable occupation. 3. Do read instructive books, instead of these stiqnd novels, ivhich are so exciting. 1. Saä 9icitcu ift ber ©efunb^eit fc^r günfiig, ivcnn tä nic^t bio jur üoüflänbtgcn Srmübung fort' gefegt irtrt». 2. SaS Schauen ber Srbe ijl ein alter iinb e^rcn* werter Seruf. 3. Sefen ®ie bod? öctc^renbc Sucher flatt biefer bummen 9iomanc, tiie fo aufvcgeni» [inb. Translate. 1. ©einen SWantel fefier an ft^ jie^enb, trotte er bem (Sturm. 2. X>n Sunf^, ©ie triebet ju fe^en, betvog mi^|)eute ju fommen. 3. Saä Srinfcn unb ©pielen ^at f^on fo Siele ju ©riinbe gericf;tet. 4. Waffen ©ie boc^ baö Seiten ; man öerliert jute^t ja ioü) immer babei. 1. He loves hunting so much, that he neglects his business often. 2. The child possesses two birds, one [a] singing [one], and [the other] a speaking one. 3. A shrieking (gettenb) whistling (''Pfiff m.) announced the arrival of the train. 4. Let us understand that there is a need of going, and we will go at once (fogIet(^). 5. It is easy to spend money j it is not so easy to earn some (iüelc^eö). On IV. Examples. 1. Cease playing on that violin; hearing it all day long is disagreeable. 2. We saw two men bringing a heavy box np-stairs. 3. Without seeing it, ice believe it. 1. ^ören ©ie auf, bie @eige ju f^iclen; eö ift unan* genehm baö ben ganjcn 2:ag ju i^ijrc«. 2. 2Bir fa^cn jwei S)?änner, tocli^c eine fc|)TOere ^ific bie Sreppe |>inauftrugen. 3. £)I;iie eö 5U fc^cn, glauben »vir eö. Translate. 1. %U tc^ ben Tlann fa^, rief icf> if;m ju, er folic mir bie 3eitung fogteicf; ^erbringen. 2. 2)a biefeä S5u(| Syrern greunbe gehört, ifl eö 3^re ^flic^t, eö i^m juriirfjugeben, fobalb ©ie eö ju (Jnbc gelefen laben. 3. 3nbem er mit ber einen f)anb einen ^wiQ ergriff, flrecfte er bie anbere bem (Srtrinfenben (drouming one) entgegen. 4, 9?ac|)bem ber 3ug (train) fd;on angefangen |atte, fic| JU bewegen, fpraiig ber 9Äann in ein Soupä [com- piartment) unb »erlebte [hurt) fic^ am S3eine. Exercise. 1. Believing [cause] this news, I sent at once to (nac^) my friend. 2. We heard of your having passed (beflc^^en) this exammation (Sramui, n. ). 3. Did you see that woman selling (who sold) apples in the market ? 4. He often read a book, smoking his cigar, whilst we wrote our letters. 5. You were speaking of his playing the piano, (thereof that he . . . played. ) 1 1 8 German Grammar Reference- Page LL. Remarks on the Past Participle. The Past Participle— (a) used as a vtrh, is invariable, as : ic^ |abe fte jjef e^c«. Idiomatically the Past Participle as a verb may replace a whole sentence, as : @efe|t/ er fei (xXVCl — Ltt us suppose, he is poor ; 3U9egeben, = i grant you, etc. ; or it may imply a command, as : 5tufgejlanben ! Conie, get up, etc. {h) used as an adjective, the Past Participle may be — (i) an attribute, declined like an adjective, as : bet QiUitiite Tlin^i^ ; etn geliebter 3Äann. (ii) a predicate and invariable, as : er ifitgebilbet, he is educated. (c) used as a noun, the Past Participle changes like an adjective, as : ber ©efaiigeile, the prisoner (caught- one) ; ein ®iU^Xtev, a learned man. N.B.—tommen and gc^cn sometimes form idiomatic phrases with the Past Participle of kufen, fliegen, »erlieren, etc., as: er fotnmt QC^OQtn = he comes flying ; fea^ 23u^ ifi Detloven flCflangen^i/te book has (gone) been lost. On the idiomatic use of some Tenses. As a rule, English and German agree with each other in the use of the Tenses ; it must however be remembered that the English : / am —ing ; I ivas — ing ; I shall he — ing ; I Jiave been — ing, etc., are quite inadmissible forms in German. The want of these descriptive forms is supplied by such words as ekn, gerabe, etc., as : I was writing, i^ \d)xkh tUn, i^ f(f)rtcb gerate; and so also in the other tenses. Emphasis, as in I do write ; I did go, must in German also be expressed by adverbials, as : tc^ f(|)reibe ftJtrfltJ^ ; td^ gieiig in bcr 'Xai. (i) The Present, often with no^, fogtetc^, etc., often stands for a near future, as : er fic^t t^n nod^ ^eutc, = he will see him to-day ; i^ ge^c fogIetcf) = / 7^ go at once. (ii) The Imperfect in English must be rendered by the Perfect in German, when an action completely past is referred to and not in relation to another past action, as : / was in Paris. How long were you there? 3^ bin in ^ariö getocfcn. 2Sie lange flnt» ®ie bort gctoefcn? (Implying that the stay in Paris is past and over. ) a. If, however, the time is fixed by reference to another past action or event, the two languages agree in the use of the Imperfect, as: He was in Paris daring the siege -^xtaav in ^ariö it)ä^renb ber 33elagerung. b. In mentioning actions recently passed, and in colloquial sentences, the Germans prefer the Perfect to the Imperfect, as : / was there yesterday— iH^ 6in geflem bort gettiefen. (iii) The English Perfect, referring to an action distinctly understood as tmcoinj^leted at the time of speak- ing, must be rendered into German by the Present tense, with fc^on (already) or feit (since) ; as : How long have you been in Rome .?=2Öie tange ftnb ®ie fc^On in 3tom ? / have been here two years = 3^ bin feit jn?e{ Sauren ^ier. (Implying that he is still in Rome.) [The other tenses present no difficulties.] German Grammar. 119 Examples and Exercises on Page 118. On I. Exam'ples. 1. Take care! There is a carriage coming I Let it 1. atufge^o^t! t>a fommt ein Sagen gefahren. drive past. ?a^t ii)n i)orüberfaf;ren. 2. Granted, that he is on the road to recovery, it tvill be 2. «Hngcnommen, cr fci auf bcm SÖege bet Sefferung. a long time before he is quite well, as be/ore. fo TOirb eö bo^) nO(^ lange ge^en, btö er ganj gefunb if}, tt)ie frü^r. 3. T'Ae peo2)le have not yet received the promised \ 3. X)k Seute ^aben baö bcrf^roc^cnc ©efc^ent nod; present. nid;t erhalten. Translate. 1. grif4) in'ö Saffer gegangen ! So iji ni^t ju fait. 2. 33ertoren! So bleiSt mir nic^tö übrig, aU nacf) ^aufe ju gelten unb bem (Spiele ju entfagen. 3. ©ie ©ete^rtcn ftnb nic^t einig, oi biefe S^iünje »on ben ©rieben ober ben ^crfern abflamme. 4, StufgefefTen ! (To horse !) 55or»rärtö ! frifc^ in bie ©(^Ia4)t geritten. Exercise. 1. These parents have lost three of their beloved children. 2. " Loved and Lost " is the title (2;itel, m.) of a much-admii-ed waltz (SÖaljer, m.). 3. Alas ! one of my gloves has been (gone) lost at the ball ; I am ashamed. 4. Don't beg always, why not work ? (Use Past Participle. ) 5. Granted that he is rich, he should not forget that he may (can) become poor af'ain. On II. Examples. Although J do not know the people, yet I HI see if I cannot help them. She came into the room as he was sitting doivn to (his) dinner. We do admire the singer ivhom we have just been hearing. 1. Obglei^ ic|) bie Seute ni^t fenne, «jitt ic^ bodj fe^en, ob i^ 3^nen nid^t Reifen fann. 2. ®ie fam in baö 3imnter, aU er fi'^ c6cn jum Tlit^ tageffen niebergefe^t ^atte. 3. Sir ben)unbern ben ©cinger in t>ev Sat, ben mx fdeiben gehört ^aben. 2Bie lange finb @ie f(|on in ^ariö? ^ä) bin f4)0n feit brei Sofien ^ier, aber id) langn^eile miH). Saren ©ie je in ©t. Petersburg n)ä|)renb beö Sinterö? 2D?an ma^t ji^ feine SSorPeüung (idea) öon bet Äätte. Translate 3 9?eifen ©ie ^eute no^ ah"? 3a, iH) mug morgen in ^omburg fein. 4. ^ann ber |)err (Jnglifcb? 9Zein, unb boc^ lernt er eö fc^on feit jn)ei ^a^ren; er if} fc^on me^r aU iWii 3a^re in ©nglanb unb nimmt ©tunben im (5ngltfc|)en. Exercise. Where were you? (Perf). I was in my room (Impf.) when you arrived. I do like to hear the cuckoo (^ufuf, m.) ; I am often listening to it (ju'^jjren, dat.). How long has he been learning German ? He has been learning it for a whole year (ace). Were you in Paris at the time of the Exhibition (Siuöftetlung, f.) of (i)On) 1878 ? We should have seen you, if it had not been such a (a so) dark night. I20 German Grammar Some Idioms and Proverbs. To speak at random. To eat Jmmble jne. He is ruined. This man is very conceited. To try to lay aside the idea of a thing. It is not tecoming to say this. I am sorry j I like to dance. They condemned him. It is customary with us. You came off second-best. We assist our friends. This uniform suits him. To put aside childish things. You did not get on well, Sir. He has brought his pigs to market. Every one has his hobby. He is badly off: he is very ill. They live in fine style, indeed. He attaches importance to it. We will pass it over. Things may take a turn. That is of no importance. You must put up with it. He ivas loell liked here. What (whom) do you take me for ? Be careful of your clothes, children. 3n ben Stag hinein rcben.— Dummheiten fagcn. 3u ^reuje friec^cn (lit. craiol to the cross). . @ie ^aben ben Äürjcren gebogen. aSir greifen unferen greunben unter bie 2lrm«. jDiefe Uniform fle^t i^m gut. ©ie Äinberfc^u^e öertreten. ®ie ^aben eö nic^t n^eit gebraut, mein |)err. Sr ^at aßeö au ben 3}?ann gebra4)t. 3eber |at fein ©terfenpferb. Go flc(;t f^Iec^t mit i^m ; er ifi fe|)r franf. ©ie leben auf ^ot;em guf e in ber 2;at. So ifl i^m öiel baran (an ber @a^e) gelegen. Sir n^oüen 3l>nen burc^ bie ginger fe^en. ©aö Slatt !ann fi^ ttjenben. 2)aS ^at 9?ic^tö ju fagen. — (Jo ifl atteö dim. ©ie muffen fic^ barein fc^icfen. dx tt)ar |)ter n)ot;I gelitten. gür ivaö (gür n^en) |)alten ©ie mtd^? ®iU %^t auf euere Kleiber, Äinber! Some very common Proverbs. All is loell that ends ioell. More haste less speed. Birds of a feather fiock together. Practice makes perfect. Nothing venture, nothing win. Lightly come, lightly gone. Like father like son. With the Romans do as the Romans do. The early bird picks ujy the worm. To-morrow is soon enough ! (Excuse for procrastination.) (Jnbc gut, Slßeö gut. dxU mit Seite. @Ieic|) unb gteic^ gefeßt fic|> gem, Uebung ma^t ben SWeifler. Ser nicf)tö »»agt, gewinnt nic^t^. Sie gewonnen, fo jerronnen. ©er 2ipfel faßt ni^t Weit öom ©tamme. ^\i ben Sölfen muf ma« Reuten. SWorgenflunb' ^ni @oIb im SDZunb. „ , 2)?orgen, morgen, nur nic^t ^eutc/ ©agen otte faulen geute!" German Gravimar 121 POEM. {To he learnt by heart during this Term.) %xt ^rei ^ni>trtttec (Öenau, 1802-50). 1. SJZä^ttg jürnt ber |)immet im ©emitter ; ©^mettcrt manc()e 3?tefencicf)' in ©ptitter; Uebertont beö 9itagara'ö ©ttmnte; Unb mit feiner Sli^e gtammenrnten ^eitfc^t er fc|)nclter bie fcefctiäumtcn gtnten, ©ap fie f^ürjen mit en^jörtem ©rimme. 2. 3nbianer j^e:^'n am lanten ©tranbe, Sauften nac^ bem iviiben SBogenbranbe, 9Zac^ beö Satbeö bangem ©terbgeflö^ne. ©reiö ber Sine, mit ergrautem |)aare, Siufre^t, überragenb feine ^aö er fc^afft, 2)aö banft er biefer ^immelöfraft. 5. 2)oc^ furchtbar n^irb bie ^immel^fraff, Sßenn jte ber geffel jtc^ entrafft, ein|)ertritt auf ber eig'nen ©pur, 2)ie freie Soc^ter ber S^iatur I 9. SBe^e, tt)enn fte toögelaffen, Sa^fenb,'o^ne SJSiberjlanb, 25ur^ bic »otfbelebten ©äffen SBätjt ben ungeheuren Sranb ! 13. ©enn bie ©temente i^affen Saö ©ebilb ber 3}?enfc^en^anb. 2luö ben SBoÜen quiöt ber ©egen, ©trömt ber9?egen; 17. 2tuö ber SBoHe o^ne Sal^I 3u(ftber©tra^II ^ört i^r 'ö ivtmmern ^oc^ öom 3;urm ? 5DaS ifl ©türm I 21. 3fiot tt)ie Slut 3fl ber f)tmmel. ©aö ifl nic^t beö Sageö ©tut! 3GBeIci^' ©etümntet 25. ©trafen auf I ©am|3f n^atttauf! gtad ernb flctgt bie geuerfäute ; J)«rc^ ber ©träfe longc Z^\\z 29. Säc^^t eö fort mit Sinbeöeile. Äo^enb, tt)ie auö Ofenö 3f?ad^en ©lü^'n bie ?üfte; Salfen frad^cn ; ^foflen fiürjen ; genjler flirren ; 33. ^inber lammern ; SWütter irren; Siere tt)immern unter Krümmern ; Sllteö rennet, rettet, filü^tet; 3;ag^ea ifi bie 5Rac^t gelichtet ; Schiller's "The Bell." Uarnt hy heart.) Literal rendering. 1 . Beneficent is the strength of fire As long as man restrains and watches it; And whatever he fashions, whate'er he creates. He owes to this heavenly power. 5. But aivful is this heavenly power, When she casts off her fetters And strides onward in her own tracks The released daughter of Nature! 9. Woe, if unrestrained, Ever growing, unopposed. Through the populous streets She rolls the monstrous conflagration ! 13. For the elements do hate The creations of human hands, Down from the clouds flows blessing. Pours the rain ; 17. Doionfrom the clouds without favour Flashes the lightning. Hear ye the wailing from the high steeple ? That means : ' ' Fire ! " 21. Red like blood Are the heavens. That is not the Sufi's glow ! What crowding 25. All along the streets ! Steam rolls upwards ! Flickering ascends the column of fire ; Through the street'' s long roio of houses 29. Onwards it moves with the speed of the wind. Red hot, as from the mouth of an oven The air glows ; beams are crashing ; Pillars falling ; windows rattling ; 33. Children wailing j mothers straying ; Beasts are whining under ruins ; Each one hurries, saves, rescues ; Darkness is illumined to broad daylight. German Grammar. 123 37. 2)ur4) ber |)änt)e lange Äette, Um bie Bette e^Hcgt ber Simer; ^oc^ im Sogen ©prt^en Guetten, Safferroogen. 41. f)eutent> fommt ber ®titrm geflogen, S)er bie gtamme braufenb fuc^t. ^raffelnb in bic bürre gruc^t gättt fte, in beö ©petc^erö Stäume, 45. 3n ber ©parren bürre Säume; Unb atö tt)OÖtc fte im SBe^en ^xi ftc^ fort ber @rbe Suc^t 9?eif en in gematt'ger g^u^t, 49, SBäc^öt e in beö f)tmmelö ^ö^en SRiefengrof !— fsoffnungäloö Sei4)t ber 3Wenfc^ ber ©ötterflärfc! SJZüf ig jte^t er feine SSerfe 53. Unb bettjunbernb untergeben.— Seergebrannt ifi bie Stätte, SBitber ©türme rau|eö 33ctte. 3n ben oben genfier^ö^len 57. So^nt baö ©rauen, Unb beö ^immetö SSoÜen fc^aucn |)o^ :^inein.— Sinen SlicE 9?a(i^ bem @rabe feiner §abe 61. ©enbet noc^ ber SWenfc^ jurüd; ©reift frö^lic^ bann jum SSanberfiabe. Saä geuerömut^ i^m auc^ geraubt, ein füper S;rofi iji i|)m geblieben : 65. (Jr jä^tt bie |)äupter feiner Sieben, Unb fiie^'! i^m fe^lt fein teurem f)aupt. 37. Through long chains of hands. In eager rivalry. Fly the fire-huchets ; up in high arches. Fountains are rising, floods of water. 41. Howling the storm-wind comes rushing. That, roaring, seeks the flames. Upon the dry crops, hissing They fall, and into the rooms of the storehouse, 45. And the dry beams of the ivood-work ; And as ifioith their breath they loished Heavenwards to tear the lohole earth's weight In one mighty rush, 49. They grow into the heights of heaven Giantlike. — Bereft of hope, Man yields to divine force! Idle and yet admiring, he beholds 53. His loorks being destroyed. — Burnt out is the homestead, Of wild storms now the rough bed. In the empty window-caverns 57. Horror du^ells, And Heaven's clouds gaze in From on high. — One glance only Toioards the grave of his possessions 61. Does man cast back ; Then he cheerfully seizes his loanderer's staff. Whatever the fire's fury may have deprived him of, One sweet consolation remains to him : 65. He counts the heads of his loved ones. And, lo, not one dear head is missing. Ste bm bebeutenbften beutft^en 2)tc^ter waren : &ömt (3o^ann ffiotfgang »on), geboren ju granffurt am S)?ain, ben 28*'" 5Iugufl 1749; geflorben ju Seimar ben 22'^« Wäx^ 1832. «S^iUet (griebri^), geboren ju 3??arbac|) ben 11*'" 9loüember 1759 ; geflorben ju Seimar ben 9*'« Ttax 1805. Seffing {©ott^olb gp|)raim), geboren ju ß^amenj ben 22««" Januar 1729; geftorben ju Sraunf^n^eig, ben 15"" gebruar 1781. 124 German Grammar. Short piece for Composition. 2^otice. — Do not omit to refer to the pages mentioned for reference liere. A young man had for several days been suffering i from^ severe' toothache* and resolved^ at last^ to go to a dentist^ and have his tooth drawn I He went slowly ^ to the dentist's house but came outi" again very soon. One of his friends seeing him coming out from the dentist's house, and observing ^^ that he looked ^^ quite" happy, said to him : " Ah ! I see, you have got rid of" that tooth at last ; you look quite happy ; I congratulate 1^ you !" "Oh no," answered the young man, "what makes me look so happy is, that the dentist was not at home ! " Wards to above. 1. to SM/er=Ieit»en, irregular. See p. 50. 2. from-aXi (dat.). See p. 98, /row (e). 3. severe = fiar!. See p. 28. 4. toothache = ^(k\jX[XOt^ (n.). 5. to resolve^S\^ (ace.) eiltf^tiepen. See p. 51 (fc^Iie^en). Q.lat ?as< = ent)Iicf;, xule^t, 7. the dentist =:in 3a^n'arjt, — eö, -ü-c. 8. have drawn ^ii nana' ^ii^in laffeu. See p. 51 (irregular). 9. slowly =\anQ\am (adverb). 10. to come out {agai7i) = (wiiUx) ^erauö'fontmen, separable verb, irregular. See fomnten, p. 50. 11. to observe — htoiad^tiXl, regular and inseparable. 12. to look=a\X^'^t^tn, separable, irreg. See p. 51. 13. quite = Qaxl^ (adverb). 14. to get rid o/=IoÖ'n>ert>cn, separable (like tverben) with accusative. 15. to congratulate = ®lüä VOÜnfi^iH, regular, with dative. Order of the above in German. jV.i?.— Study the reasons given here very carefully. By referring to Page 83, the numbers above the various parts of the Sentences will be understood. [The order of words will be found strictly adhering to the rules given on page 83.] 1 2 4 6 2 3 4 A young man had several days * from severe toothache suffered — and resolved himself at last, — 4 _7 3 7 J 2__ 4 to (JU) a dentist to go — and his tooth drawn to have. ^ — He went slowly <= to the house of^ the dentist, 2 4 5_ 1 3 4 \)xx\, came very soon <= again out. — When "^ one of his friends him out-of the house of the dentist 7 2 2 j_ 4 __5 2 2 J_ 3 1 2 come™ saw, 6 — and'i observed — that he quite happy out-looked,^ — said heg to him: — "Ah! I see, — 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 4 5 1^ _2 3 you (have) are your tooth at last got-rid-of ; — you look quite happy out; I wish you^^ luck!" — 3 2 1 1 3_ 5 7 2 2 1 "Oh, no," answered the young man, — "what me so happy out-look makes,i — is, — that the dentist 4 2 not at home was."^ a Adverbials of time precede others. b Of two infinitives put that of the auxiliary last. [See p. 83.] Of two adverbials put that of place last, and that of time first. ^ Seeing and Coming must be resolved into sub- ordinate clauses. [See p. 116, IV. d. iv. bb.] e Assertion at end of subordinate clause. f In subordinate clause no separation can take place. g The principal clause must have a subject, and it stands after the Assertion, when a subordinate clause precedes. ^ Of two objects the Pronoun comes before the Noun. ' In relative clauses the Assertion stands last. k In subordinate clauses the Assertion stands last. 1 [See p. 112, note to A. 4.] m [See p. 112, A. 5.] German Gravimar. 125 Longer Sentences. Exercises for Analysing. Carefully divide each long sentence into its constituent parts, considering apart each Principal, each Subordinate, and each Relative sentence, and referring to Pages 83 and 124 as to the sequence of words in each clause. Example of analysing a longer German sentence : ^Sit^etm Don Oranten gel;örte ju ben Magern unb Maffen 2>?enfcf;ena, "^xoxi (Eafar ite nennt^ <=t)ie beö '^(x'^ii x\.\^i fc^tafcn unb ju öiet ben!en<=, ^»or benen ba^ fur^tlofefle atler ©emüter geiranft ^at"*. eT)te pitfe 3flu|e eincg immer gleiten ©efi^tö üerbarg eine gefc^äfttge, feurige Seelen fbie ou(|> bie |>üöe, 8|)inter njelc^er ite f^ufe, ntc^t tettjegte, unb ber Sifi unb ber Siebe gleich unbetretbar irar^; ^einen öietfa^en, fruchtbaren, nie ermübenben @eifl^ >n)ei^ unb bilbfam genug', i^augenbltrflic^ in ade gormen ju fcfimeljeni^; "benjä^rt genug', ^'in feiner \\^ felbfi ju uerlieren^ ; iflarl genug', i^jeben @Iücfött)ec|)fet ju ertragen!^. Schiller. (Translate the above carefully.) [a-a] Principal Sentence ; [b-b] Subordinate, therefore Assertion nennt at the end ; [c-c] Compound relative clause to 3)?enf4)en ; Assertions f4)Iafen and benfen at the end of each component ; [d-d] Relative clause to 33?enfc^en 5 Assertion ^oX at the end. [e-e] Principal Sentence ; [f-f] Compound relative clause to ©eele. Assertions betvegte and irar at the end of each component ; notice : the first part not disturbed in its sequence of words by the interpolated relative clause ; [g-g] Relative clause to ^üße with the Assertion f^uf at its own end ; [h-h] direct object to the verb öerbarg in [e-e] ; [i-i] predicative adjectives, enlarged by Infinitive clauses [k-k]. (See page 114, iii. h, for these [k-k] clauses.) Analyse the above sentence in detail, also as shown on Page 84 (at the foot). Translate and analyse in the same way, both generally and minutely, the following : i. 33ieten proteflantifc(;en ^rcbtgern, bte urn ber ^Religion ividen SSerfoIgungen auöjuj^ef;en fatten, tiefl Äat^arina »on ®c^n?arjburg ©c^u^ unb Unterflü^ung angebei^en. Unter biefen njar ein ge«)iffer Äafpar Slquila, Pfarrer ju ©aalfetb, ber in jüngeren 3a|'ren ber 2(rmee beö itaiferö atö gclbprebiger nacf) ben ^iiecerlanben gefolgt irar, unb, tt)eil er ft^ bort geireigcrt ^attc, eine iianonenlugel ju taufen, »on ben ouögelafTcnen ©otbaten in einen geuermörfer gelaben würbe, um in bte Suft gefc^offen ju tverben; ein ®c|)icffal, bem er no^ gtiicfli^ entfam, iveit baö Quitter ni($t jünben IVOttte. Schiller. ii. ^ann giengen ttJtr in bie ©irtinif^e Äapette, bie n?ir au^ ^ett unb Reiter, unb bie ©emafbe trotter» \z\x^zi fanben. 2)ag »jüngjle ©eric^t," unb bie mannigfaltigen ©emälbe ber Secfe, i)on 5Kt^eI Slngelo, teilten unfere §3ett)unberung. 3t^ fonnte nur fe^en unb anflaunen. ©ie innere ©i4)er^eit unb 3Wönnti(|)!eit beö S)?eifierö ge^t über allen 5tuöbrucf. 9Ja^bcm ivir 5(ffeö tt)ieber unb hJieber gefe^en, verliefen wir biefeö fjeiligtum unb gtengen nac^ ber ©t. ^etcröür^e. Goethe. 126 German Grammar. Longer Sentences for Composition. Carefully divide the English first into the clauses, and refer to page 83 for the sequence of page 124, and pages 76-79.] separate Principal, Subordinate, and Eelative words in each clause separately. [See also Example : English. Having heard, that your friend possessed some very rare^ specimens^ of butterßie.'i,'^ and knowing that he is always pleased'^, to show his collections^ to the friends of his friends, / took the liberty^ of callings upon him last Saturday, when I was in town ; I was delighted ^ with all that he showed me, and in fact^ almost envied^ him his treasures, some of which were really ' magnificent ™. W (ace.) unt ©tttjaö (ace.) benetben. 1 really =mxU\^, J» magnificent = '^ta^i''O^U. Order of words in German. As I heard had°^, that your friend some very rare specimens of butterflies possessec?," and asl hnoui°^, that he always pleasure has°, his collections to-the friends of-his friends to P shoiv, so took * I to-me the liberty, him last Saturday % when I in the town was, o o!at {lawyer), etc. Money, Weights and Measures : 3Wünje (money), ^funb (pound), 9)?eile (mile), etc. N.B. — Many of these may be further traced back to Greek, of course, and many will also remind the student of French, which is based on Latin. Of French origin in modern times, and to be distinguished from those Latin roots which entered French and German at almost the same time, are many nouns connected with military matters, such as: (Sergeant, ^a))ttän, Dfftjtev, ©eneval, 3nfantevte, etc etc., and many m-6s, which in German end in ÄXtW, as : ftubiveu {to study), pvobiveu {to try), pottveu {to imUsU), besides many more quite recently introduced. [This AxtW, by the by, has become so much a favourite in modern German that it is added even to Teutonic roots to form new verbs, as : ^au^ treu {to go from house to house) and some others, a practice which is however condemned by the best modern writers.] In addition to the above sources, which are by far the most prolific, the most modern German has borrowed and incorporated some words — From English, as : Sccfei;, ©port, 2öf;tfl, triefet, ^yi^ji, etc. from Russian, as : Srüf4)fe (cab), 3it^t (a kind of leather), itnute (whip), etc, from Polish, as : ©urfe (cucumber), Ulau (Ulan, light-horse soldier), ©rcilje (frontier), etc. German Grammar. 133 From Bohemian, as : 2)oW; (dagger), Äutfc^e (cab), ^etf(|)aft (seal for letters), etc. from Turkish, as : ®rf;avlacl; (scarlet), Q(i)abxah (trappings of a horse), etc. from American Indian, as : Sabaf (tobacco), dtgarvc (cigar), etc. from ^as« Indian, as : ^lltlfcf) (punch), 'üxcä, 3?ltm, etc. These words, however, are now cosmopolitau, i.e. adopted into all languages. We refer the student to the short Etymological Dictionary appended for the etymology of many of the most common root-words in German, and will now proceed to a statement of the laws which have governed Vowel and Consonant changes from the earliest periods of the Indo-European languages, without a knowledge of which laws, at least in their broad outlines, etymology is impossible. I. VOWELS. [See the Notice below.] The oldest of the vowels is a, of which the others are all variations, / and u being the earliest. The Indo-European idioms knew only these three, and we have still some curious remnants of this ancient '^to7iic cJmxl" as it were, of language. Compare English Fee-fa-fum, tit for tat, snip-snap-sn{u)orum ; and German piff^paff^puff, btm-bam^bum, and a few others. From these three original vowels sprang first of all e between a and i, and between a and u, so that we may put the ascending scale of vowels, down thus : u, 0, a, e, /. A. Ablaut (or change of sound). The Ablaut and its laws form a most important chapter in the tracing back of modern words to their roots in the original Indo-European, and must be very carefully studied and distinguished from Umlaut or Modification. Ablaut is the oldest change of vowel-sound, and it is generally impossible to give reasons for the vowel-changes which it includes. All we know is, that the oldest languages have only three vowels : ä and i and u. From these all other vowels and diphthongs spring : ä being weakened into i and u, and strengthened into ä and uo ; % being strengthened into e, e, i, ei (the latter =i in thine). Ü being strengthened into ü, 0, ö, iu (eu, it), io (ie), ou (au), (as ou in thou). This Ablaut is moreover obscured by vowel-changes due to Umlaut, Brechung, etc., still we may always assume that owing to Ablaut, (i.) Modern ä, ä point to uo in 0. H. G., and to ä in Sanskrit or Indo-Germanic. (ii. ) Modern I (ie), e, e, ei point to i in 0. H. G., and to t in Sanskrit, etc. (iii.) Modem ü, ö, ö, eu, au point to ü, ou, iu (io, ie), y in 0. H.G. and to ü in Sanskrit, whilst modern I (often falsely written ie) and ü are more doubtful, for i may come from Indo-Germanic ä or t, whilst modern ü may come from Indo-Germanic ä or ii. In these two cases some cognate words generally decide the question. Notice. It must be clearly understood, once for all, that in speaking here of a we refer to the broad sound of this vowel, as in father (never the a as in lane) ; in speaking of e we refer to the sound of e in ten (neuer to e as in he) ; in speaking of i we refer to the sound of i in hi7n (neuer to i as in mine) ; also that u refers to the sound of u in 7'ule (neuer to any other) ; and that refers to the sound of o in alone (and no other, unless stated). [Note: — means long ; — means short, in the following explanations.] 134 German Gr^amtnar. Exam-pits of Ablaut. [N.B.—Fov the meaning of Gr., E., M. H. G., etc., see " Abbreviations," Note on page 143.] (i.) G. D«ch. E. thätch. M. H. G. ditch. A. S. thäck. Lat. tßctum (accidental e) (ii.) G. We/n. E. wine. M. H. G. win. A. S. win. Got. wein ; Lat. vinum . (iii.) G. 'naus,. E. house. M. H. G. hfls. A. S. hyd. Got. hüz ; Lat. cQs-tos . CG. Blut. E. blood. M. H. G. bluot. A. S. blöd. Got. bloda i. or iii. Ig. Log. E. lie. M. H. G. liic. A. S. lyge. Got. liugn rG. s/tzen. E. to sit. M. H. G. sizzan. A. S. sittan. Lat. sedeo ; Skt. sad — . i. or ii. \G. Frj(e)de. E. peace. M. H. G. fride. A. S. frithu. Indo.-Germ. pritu-s . ä class. i class. Ü class. ä class. Ü class. ä class. i class. Mot ice : ie (i) if derived from in, io as in Knie, always points to ü class. Besides the above organic Ablaut, German admitted of a non-organic, accidental change of a into 0, as in joU, ÖOlt, ü)?Onl), tt>0, ^oleit, etc. ; rarer is an accidental change of a into e Avithout apparent cause, as in 2lt>eI=?io5itö^, t'^ti=noble ; and e into t, as 33erg — ©ebivg. These latter two changes approach the Umlaut, and are more modern. B. Umlaut must be carefully distinguished from Ablaut. It is the modification of a root-voivel due to the attraction exerted upon it by an added derivate syllable ivith t {later e) in the latter. Thus d^ngil became engil (M. G. (Snget, E. angel). The Umlaut is of comparatively modem date, whilst the Ablaut is as ancient as Indo-Germanic itself; indeed, Gothic does not yet know the Umlaut : it was only in the seventh century after Christ that it first appeared. It affected then only a in the root, but soon the modification spread also to other root-vowels, as : gruoni into grüni (M. G. grün, E. green). At a later period, though the inflecting t in the derivative syllable sank into an unaccented e, or was dropped altogether, the Umlaut remained, as in tragen — er trägt (for trägit or traget) ; sconi changed into fdjön (E. beautifod). At a still more modern period the root-vowel became regularly modified, Avhen derivative syllables containing i or e were added to a root, as ©raf — ©väjtn, grau — gräufetn, etc. Notice that only a, 0, u, and au can be modified or suffer Umlaut. The change er tieft — tcfen is not an Umlaut, but Brechung, and has a much deeper and older etymological origin. The modern mode of writing, for example, ä for ae is merely conventional, and an abbre- viation for a. e as Umlaut of a often became o, as in : G. ^ööe E. hell. M. H. G. helle. 0. H. G. halja. Goth, halja. to root vowel (i.) ä. G. 3toö((f) E. after all vowels [and after t also] or some- times by doubling of vowel. As to this Dehnung there has been a reaction within the last two decades, and Germans begin again to write more correctly : 2)htt for ^?ut^ (courage), c\,iht for giebt (gives), S^at for X^al (valleij), @c^af for @cl;aaf (sheep), etc. N.B. — In the examples on "Inner or Root-vowel changes," see pages 137 to 139, many instances of Ablaut, Umlaut, etc., will be found. II. CONSONANTS. The present system of consonants presents but little variation in the Indo-Germanic idioms except in the so-called Lautverschiebung, or change of consonants in the Mutes. We may, according to Jacob Grimm, distinguish three classes of consonants. A. Spirantes. Of these the most important is ^. Grimm reckons among Spirantes also : (i.) |) in inter- jections, as ^a ! |)0 1 (ii.) \, which is t turned consonant, and appears before vowels only, as in \U\\^ = ijoung , or is changed into !^, as blühen, from blüejien, to bloom, etc. (iii.) n?, which is u turned consonant in front of a vowel, as jttiet [cf. Lat. duo]. The organic spirans ^ remains unaltered from the earliest times, but it changes often with r, as in X)txlkvtn — 3SerIuft (loss), U)a§ = ivat (he was), ö as spirans combines readily with other consonants, and these combina- tions present some interest, thus : 0. H. G. sk becomes sch in M. G., as fJvtban = f (^reiben, etc. ; si, sm, sn, sw become in M. G. schl, schm, sehn, schw, as fina(=f(^wa(, etc. [This spirans ö must not be confounded with the dental mute ö ; the latter, though now indistinguishable in writing from the former, sprang from 0. H. G. 2;, a "dental."] B. LiQUIDAE. These are \, m, \\, r, and present still less change from the earliest idioms than the Spirantes. Notice also : (i.) I often combines, as in tm, lb, (p, (g, M, H, x\, etc. It sometimes interchanges with r, as : Lat. ^r^mtm, G. ^^flauinc, K phtm; Lat. pevegrinus, G. ^pilgrim, etc. ; (ii.) m and n often interchange, m replacing n before labials or dentals, as entftnt)en = emp- ftnben; entfa|)en = em)3 fangen; (iii.) n is perhaps the most used consonant in German, and combines readily with almost all other consonants ; among these combinations ng is perhaps the most usual. We may say \, m, n, V govern the whole inflexion of words, and play the most important part in Word-derivation or Word-formation. 136 Ge7^man Grammar. 0, MUTAE. These are the most important of the consonants in Etymology, and their changes often furnish the principal light by which Ave trace back words to older idioms. They are divided thus, with respect to their production by the organs of speech : Notes. — (i.) |)f is really only one consonant. (ii.)'(!^ is really only one consonant, pronounced hard, guttural after a, 0/ and u {au) ; but sounded soft in all other combinations now. Jacob Grimm was the first to point out that between the soft, the hard, and the aspirated mutes of each class (labials, dentals, and gutturals) a more or less regular change took place, so that a soft labial had a tendency to become hard ; a hard one to become aspirated, and an aspirated one again soft, etc. The mnemonic word has will remind the student of these changes, beginning with the oldest idiom ; has : Äard, aspirate, soft ; ash : aspirate, soft, /iard ; sha : soft, Aard, aspirate. In these changes the Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin form the first period ; the Gothic, Anglo-Saxon, and Low German the second period ; and Old and Middle High German with Modern High German the third period. Soft. Hard. Aspir Soft. ated. Hard. Labials, Ö, 6 V f(ü) Pf Dentals, b t ii^s),n) i{ = is) Gutturals, g (c) f (c) ^ c^ Thus, tracing a mute consonant back we shall find that Modern German, (etc.) Anglo-Saxon (etc.) Latin (etc.) ^b f(Ö)/^f P - — b f, h m t — ' — ^,* f p b — — s {th) t d -i- h k(f) p b f — — t d s [th) — — k(c) g(c) f (C) point to g (c) and to : h {ch) However, these changes are but seldom found without exceptions or leaps ; and, generally speaking, they are more recognisable in initials than in final consonants, and also better preserved in dentals than in labials or gutturals. Examples of this change of Mutes. Zd Period : High Oerman. Mod. Germ. English. ftefien * seven S-euer /ire f)au^t *hea(/)d brei * thvQQ iviffen [*know](wiO Sure *f?oor öcfletn 2/ester(day) itf) I ^unl) Aound lönnen (to) can 0. H. Germ. siiun /iur houJit dvl wis2an t\X\'\ ^estaron ih Aunt cÄunnan [Notice* that English often belongs to the 2d period, i.e. the Low-German idioms.] It will be seen from these examples, which are among the most perfect, that the three steps of changes of Mutes are very rarely perfect or all present ; still they prove the general 2d Period : Lovo German. Ist Pi .riod: Classic %l, etc. Anglo-Saxon. Gothic. Latin. Greek. SansJcrit, seo/on si6un Septem eirrd sa^jtan /yr (/uir) /on (/un— ) (/oc~) trvp [pu-l hea/od hau&ith [ca^Jut] [K€^a\7}] [kuWt— ] thrl thveis ires rpeXs , &, or g, as in fanb, gaft, %C [the bandage) ; ber 33 anb (loughed fields). i^vennen, E. to burn : ber 93ranb (the conflagration) ; bte Sranbung (surf) ; ber Srunnen (fountain). [N'.B. — 0. H. G. brinnan = the phenomenon when water and fire come in contact.] bvingcn, to croivd, p)enetrate : ber ©rang (the oppi^ession) ; baö ©ebränge (the crowd); bie Srangfal, trouble. f a^^tcn, to drive : bie %a\)Xi (the drive) ; ber @cfä|)rte (the companion) ; bie '^'ä^xU (the ford) = 'tk gurt. flnbcn, to find : ber gunb (the find) ; ber ^inber (the finder) ; ber ginbting (the foundling). geben, to give : bie SWit^gift (the marriage portion) ; baö ®ift (the poison) ; bie ®abe (tn, to dig : bOÖ ®X9) ; ber |)etfer («Äe AeZ^jer) ; ber @e{;iife (the helj^mate). Iftc^Ien, to hide : ber |)elb (the hero) ; bie $ö((e (hell) ; bie .^üüe (^Unft (theßUure) ; baö (Sinfommcn (income). liegen, to lie : bie ?age (the situation) ; baö ?ager (the camp) ; bie @clegen{;eit (the occasion). malen, to grind : baö 3)?e^t (the flour) ; baö 9)?a^I (ioÄ;e) ; raitc^en {to smoke). ^dfieben, to shove, push : ber aÖ Äinbtcin (little (dear, x>retty) child). 8. :ung forms (fern.) abstracts from verbs, as: ^anbctll — bie f)ailbtltng (trade, business); it has sometimes a collective force, as : bcr 2öalb — btC 2Batbung (forest-district). 9. :ci forms feminine abstracts out of Person's appellations, as : bct Jräumcr — bic ^^räumcret (dreaming) ; ber ®cf)äfcr— btc ®4)äferei (sheep-farm). [N.B. :ei in bte 3Wetobet (or 9}?etobic), etc. = ie fromLat. -ia.] 10. :ni^ forms abstracts from nouns, as : bcr Slttlb — baö 33ünbnt§ (treaty) ; or from adjectives, as : fttljlcr — bte (^inPernip (darkness) ; it has also sometimes a meaning of locality, as : gefangen — baö ©efängnip (prison). [Most words in sjitf are neuter.] [=ni^ now often spelt «niö.] 11. :^cit (after =g = Icit) [0. H. G. die 'H.eit = qualiti/, manner] has (a) a collective force, as : bie S^rif^en^eit (Christendom) ; (h) an abstract meaning, as : franf— bie Äran!f;ett (illness). 12. :tum [0. H. G. das twoni =2:>oiver, dignity] has generally a collective force, as : baö SJitter^tunt ( = body of knights) ; taß ^rtefter^tum (priesthood). 13. :f(^aft [0. H. G. die ^c\\a.it = hodily form, quality] may be added to nouns, adjectives, or participles, and has (a) a meaning of " connection with," relationship, as : tie SSruberfdjaft (brotherhood) ; (h) an abstract force, as : lüiffenb — bie 2Siffcnfcf;aft (science). (c) Adjectives. 1. -en or --n forms adjectives from nouns implying materials, as : baö ®otb — golbcn 5 baÖ ©liter — jllbem , bie ^öljcr (pi.) (woods) — ^öljcrn (ivooden — ofimod). 2. :evtt, by false analogy with above [«et + n], as : baö (Sifcn — eifern (iron). 3. 4g forms adjectives from almost any noun, adjective, verb, pronoun, as : ber ©anb — fcinbig (sandy) ; Icute— ^eutig (of our days) ; fatten— fäüig (due). [N.B. It often implies possession, as : mntiQ = havi7ig SWut (courage) ; l>äxtiQ = having a 33 art (bea7-d).] 4. iiä)i implies "full of," as: fleillic^t (stony); fetftc^t (rocly). [N.B. 46)t is often interchanged with «ig, as: j^einig = fieini($t, etc.] 5. nfcf) applies to persons [whilst =icf)t generally applies to tilings] ; finbif^) (childish). 6. -lid) [0. H. G. =g-lich = gleich = ?«Z;e, similar] forms adjectives implying (a) quality or origin, as : fi?n{gli(^ (kingly) ; angjlli^ (anxiously) ; (b) Diminutives, often with contemptuous sense, as : ärintic() (rather poor) ; füf Iic|) (rather siveet). 7. =fam [0. H. G. samo = <Äe same] implies inclination, as : fc(;lt)eig'fam (taciturn, inclined to keep silent) ; furc^tfam (inclined to fear) ; aufmertfam (inclined to attention, attentive). 8. soot [connected with bir = aÖ ©Hcb— jergltebem {to dismember). 6. exit-. [0. H. G. ant as in StntWOrt {ansiver), connected with Gk. ävH, against]. It has the force of (i.) im- plying the creation of a new condition, and (ii.) the leaving a former condition. cnt= forms verbs from verbs only, as : füfjren— entführen {to lead aivay) ; f(!^minben— entfc^Wtnben {to disappear, vanish). [iV^. 5. —Before f, ent becomes em, changing f into ^f, as : ent=fangen = empfangen {to receive) ; ent» fint)en = empfünl)en {to feel).] 7. miftv with meaning of badness, as : mi^faHen {to displease) ; mi^antÜW {to ill-treat). (b) Substantives. 1. ge= forms collectives, either of persons, as : bic @ebrüt»er (pi.) {brethren) ; or of things, as: baö ©ebirge {collection of mountains) ; baö (55ef]irn {collection of stars). Added to verbs, Qe- has no special signifi- cation, as : t>er ©efang {song) ; baö ©effect {face, sight). 2. utt; is the opposite of lein or (^en; it has a meaning of largeness, and often of badness or enormousuess, as : ber Unmenfd^ {monster) ; baö Unfraut {bad weeds). 3. mift= [0. H. G. die Misse = <Äe want, defect, miss] implies error, badness, as : baö 2}?if ia|r {a bad year) ; baö S'Jif Vergnügen {displeasure, bad enjoyment). (c) Adjectives. The only prefix which is used to form adjectives is utt=, which is added to adjectives having a good, pleasant meaning, and which changes such adjectives into their opposites, as : ttJeife — nntt?eife {unwise) ; gliicfltC^ — unglütfUc^ {unhappy). III. Composition. Distinguish this from II. (Derivation). By Composition we mean here the more modern putting together of words, each of which may be still used independently ; whilst in Derivation we treated of prefixes or suffixes which have now lost their independent meaning, and are no longer used by themselves. {a) Verbs. Verbs can combine with prepositions or adverbs only ; and the new forms thus obtained are called separable verbs ; indeed, the preposition or adverb has the accent, and clings to the root verb always, except in the Present and Imperfect tenses, and in the Imperative, and only in Principal Sentences. [See the Grammar, p. 54.] 142 German Grammar. There are only six prepositions which may give up their accent to the verb entirely, and form inseparable verbs with it (as do i)er, i^ev, ge, etc.). These six prepositions are : burtf), as : bltr^bftcfcn [to look through) ; bitri^benfen {to think over), f)intet, as : ^intergc(;cn (to cheat) ; ^intevlaffen [to bequeath, leave behind). y ilticr, as : überfc^cn [to translate) ; übergeben {to omit, leave out). «m, as : umgeben {to siirround) ; umfd;iffen {to sail round). vinHt, as : unterbrüden {to oppress) ; unterhatten {to entertain). toibcr, as : JViberfpreclen {to contradict) ; Wiberfte^eu {to withstand, oppose). Of these all {except ttJibct) can also form separable verbs, as : liur4)'fe^en, to look through ; |){nter . . . gef;cn, to go behind, etc., though some of these can scarcely be called compound verbs, and are rather verbs governing prepositions. Notice also, that when the above prepositions form inseparable verbs, these are transitive, i.e. require a complement, and are conjugated with l^aBctt in their Compound tenses. [See also p. 54.] But with almost all other prepositions or adverbs, verbs can combine to form new verbs, separable, and having the accent on the preposition or adverb, which in fact gives its peculiar colour or signification to the root-verb, as : an«fangen {to begin) ; auf=ge^en {to rise) -, ab*ge^en {to depart) ; »vicber^fommen {to return), etc. etc. N.B. — Itjieber* forms only oHe inseparable verb: ivieber^olen, to repeat; iviber« cannot form any separable verbs at all, {b) Substantives (the Substantive being the last component). (i.) with 2)reposition or adverb, as : bie Stb-fa^^rt {dejmrture) ; bet 35orfaö {event) ; bcr 2(uÖ'tt)eg {the ivay out, excuse) ; baö iDber4;aupt {the chief), etc. etc. (ii.) with verb, as: baö galjr-jcug {the conveyance); bie ®c|)retb-feber {the pen) ; baö Sßo^n^aUÖ {diuelling- house) ; bie ©enf=fraft {the potcer of thinking). (iii.) -with substantive, as: baö '^ii'^iX'hW'i^ {the picture-book) ; bcr 33(umen*tif^ {the flower-table) ; baö ©aittpf» fc^iff {the steamboat), etc. etc. (iv.) with adjective, as: bie ^unS'frclU {the virgin)', bCt greintut {the candour); bic 9?CU»biIbung {the new formation) ; ber Sigen-ftnn {obstinacy), etc. etc. (c) Adjectives (the Adjective being the last component). (i.) Yfii\\ preposition or adverb, a.s : über»t)Ott {overfull); ü\X^m6^i {upright) ; m^iX'=utd), E, through ; O, H, G. duruh ; A, S, thurh, [Cf. E. thorough.] S>ui;enb, n., E, dozen (from French douzaine) ; Lat. duodecim. &i)e,f., E. marriage ; M. H. G. ewe ; A, S. aew = time, eternity, law ; Lat, aevum ; Gk, alwp, ®i, n., E, egg ; 0, H. G, ei ; A, S, aeg, [Cf. Lat. ovum ; Gk. yöi/.] eitfic/,, oak ; 0. H. G, eih ; A, S, äc, ©ib, m., E. oath ; M, H, G, eit, eid ; A. S. äth ; Got. aiths. Perhaps connected with @^e above. ein, E. one, a ; 0, H, G. ein ; A. S. an ; Got, ains ; Lat, unus {communis). @i§, n., E, ice ; 0, H. G, Is, Perhaps connected with is, to glitter ; see next word. ®ifcn, n., E. iron ; M. H. G, isen ; A, S, isern, iren ; Lat. aes = ore (Ind. G. is, to glitter). etent)/ E. [miserable]; M. H, G. eilende living in banishment, foreign. Cf. Lat. alius, other; Gk. ÄXXos ; E. alien [Got. alilandi = foreign, other lands]. (Snge(, m., E, Angel ; 0, H. G. Angil ; A. S, engel ; Lat. angelus ; Gk, ^776X0?, a messenger, ©tic,/., E, earth ; 0, H, G. erda ; Got. airtha ; A, S, eorthe (perhaps Lat, arvum, cultivated field), tvft, E. first ; 0, H, G, erist ; A, S, aerest, superlative of ehe = early, [Cf. gürf} = prince.] cffcn, irr., E. to eat ; 0. H. G. ezzan; A, S, etan ; Got. itau. [Cf. Lat. esus, part, of edo ; Gk. ^5-ofj,ai]. etoig, E. eternal, for aye ; 0. H. G, ewig [Lat, aevum ; Gk, aW;' = eternity. See @^c]. Stt^ne,/,, E. flag, vane ; A, S, fana=:cloth, [Perhaps Lat, pannus = piece of cloth ; Gk, irrjpos.] foftten, irr., E, drive, fare ; 0. H, G, faran ; Got. farjan. [Lat. per-itus = erfaßten, versed; Gk, nSpos, as in BöcTTTo/jos, a ford for oxen ; E. Bosporus ; also Gk. Tropevu), to go, lead, get on.] frtlf«!^, E. false ; Lat. falsus [connected with fallen, to fall ; Lat. fallo ; Gk. tr^dXXw]. (The =f(^ being the Got. ska, as adjective suffix.) fangen, E, catch (cf, fangs of an animal) ; 0, H, G, fahan ; Got, fähan [Lat. pango, pax ?], faul, E. foul, lazy ; 0, H. G. fül, root fu with derivative la, al [Lat, püteo, pus ; Gk, ir^Ou']. fcrfjtcn, E, to fight ; 0, H. G, fehten ; A, S, feohtan, [Cf, Lat. pugnare.] fein, E. fine, beautiful ; M. H. G. vin, fin from Lat, fiuire, etc, hence fine = finished, beautiful. Geinnan Graimiiar. 14^ 2fcinJ>, m., E. euemy, fiend ; 0. H. G. fiaiit ; A.S. feond; Goth, fijands (Lat. hostis is uot related). 3-cnfter, n., E. window ; 0. H. G. venstar from Latin fenestra introduced in early Gothic times. ftubcn, Irr., E. to find ; M. H. G. vinden ; 0. H. G. findan ; Goth, finthan [Lat. in-veuio]. '^'\\ü), m., E. fish ; 0. H. G. fisk ; Lat. piscis. fticftc«, irr., E. flow, fleet(-ing) ; O. H. G. fliozzan ; A. S. fleotan (compare flood, fleet) [perhaps also Gk. -rrXew to sail, and even Lat. pluere, to rain, French pleuvoir]. ^(ot'tit, m., E. florin ; late Latin from Florence in Italy, connected with flos, etc., a flower. glut,/., E. flood ; 0. H. G. fluot ; Got. flödus ; A. S. flod from root flö or plö (see fltcf^en). frogcn, r., E. ask, pray ; 0. H. G. frähen. Connected with Lat. precari, to pray, beg. Srau,/., E. woman ; M. H. G. vrouwe ; 0. H. G. fronwa [fro = lord, frouwa its feminine]. S-rcunlt, m., E. friend ; 0. H. G. friunt ; A. S. freond (from frijon, to love ; hence also frei = free). SfU(^t,/., E. fruit ; 0. H. G. fruht from Lat. fructus (C before t = i, as in French nuit). fünf, E. five ; 0. H. G. fünf, finf ; A. S. fif ; fi-om Lat. quinque (for pinque) ; Gk. irivre. @algcn, m., E. gallows ; 0. H. G. galgo ; A. S. gealga (from Got. galgan, a rod, beam). [Cf. Golgatha?] ®oft, m., E. guest ; 0. H. G. gast, gesti from old ghostis from Lat. hostis = a stranger (enemy). getien, irr., E. give ; 0. H. G. geban ; A. S. gifan ; Got. giban [from it @ift, ®abt, etc.]. ge!)en, irr., E. to go ; 0. H. G. gän ; A. S. gan with gang. [Perhaps ge + aim, with Lat. eo, Gk. ei>t]. geredet, E. just, right ; 0. H. G. gireht from Lat. rectus, directus. geftctn, E. yester-day ; 0. H. G. gestaron ; Got. gistra ; Lat. heri for lijesi ; Gk. x^^ey. glcic^, E. like ; 0. H. G. gilih ; Got. galciks = [ga(ge)+] lika = a body ; hence gleich = with (similar) body. Giolt», n., E. gold ; Got. gulth [connected with gelb = yellow ; A. S. geolo and perhaps Gk. x^w/)6j]. &ott, m., E. God ; Got. güth. Perhaps Skt. deva ; Lat. deus ; Gk. Atos? @C(if, VI., E. Count, —grave ; O. H. G. gravo, gravjo. From root gref, to command. :^a&en, E. to have ; 0. H. G. haben ; A. S. hsebban ; Got. haban ; Lat. habeo. ^a^n, m., E. cock (hen) ; 0. H. G. hauo ; A. S. hana, cocc ; from Lat. cano, to sing. Ijalft, E. half ; M. H. G. halp ; A. S. healf [Got. halba = on one side, hence : one half]. l^avt, E. hard ; 0. H. G. herti, harti ; A. S. heard = brave ; cf. Gk. /cpar^s = strong for Kaprvs. ^aupt, n., E. head ; 0. H. G. houbit, houpt ; A. S. heafod (perhaps Lat. caput, Gk. Ke(pa\r] ?) $rtut,/.,|lE. hide, skin ; 0. H. G. hut ; A. S. hyd ; Lat. cutis, as in scutum, a shield of hide. $eibe, m., E. heathen ; O. H. G. heidan ; A. S. haethen ; (Lat. paganus = wild, country) Got. haithi= field. 1)cil, E. hale, hail ! whole ; A. S. häl ; Got. hails = Hail ! [Lat. augurium = luck]. $eU>, m., E. hero ; 0. H. G. helid ; A. S. hreleth ; [to Got. root : hal in hehlen, hüllen, to cover, protect], ^evf>^, m., E. harvest, autumn ; 0. H. G. hervist (perhaps to Lat. carpo, to pluck, gather fruit ?). $err, m., E. gentleman. Sir (hero) ; 0. H. G. herro, comparative of her=proud, noble ; A. S. här. ^cüjog, m., E. duke ; 0. H. G. heri-zogo ; A. S. heretoga= leader of army (^cer). I^etttc, E. to-day ; 0. H. G. hiuta ; A. S. hes-dceg = this day (cf. Lat. hodie = hoc die). ^irfc^, m., E. hart, stag ; 0. H. G. hiruz, hirz ; A. S. heorot (cf. Lat. cervus and Gk. /c^pas = a horn). l)Od), E. high ; 0. H. G. höh ; Got. hauhs ; A. S. heah (connected ^ÜßCf, hill, etc.). $ölle,/., E. hell ; 0. H. G. hella; Got. halja ; A. S. hell (to root : hal in hüllen, to cover). $mtb, 771., E. dog, hound ; 0. H. G. hunt(d) ; Got. hunds [Lat. canis ; Gk. kw- from kuujv). I^unbett, E. hundred ; Got. hunda ; A. S. bund ; Lat. centum ; Gk. iKardv). [N.B. — the --vt in ffunie-vt belongs to Got. rathjan, to count, read.] id), E. I ; M. H. G. ich ; 0. H. G. ih ; A. S. ic ; Got. ik ; cf. Lat. ego ; Gk. ^701 ; Skt. aham. Snfel,/., E. island, from Lat. insula. [Not to be confounded with^(5ilant) = island, from einplant, i.e. a land by itself.] ja, E. yes, yea ; A. S. geä [cf. Gk. •^^ indeed, really]. I^a^t, n., E. year ; 0. H. G. jar ; Got. jer. [Perhaps Gk. wpa = season, spring]. je, E. ever ; M. H. G. ie ; 0. H. G. io, eo ; E. aye, connected with Lat. aevum, aud Gk. aldjv. juug, E. young ; 0. H. G. junc ; A. S. geong ; Got. juggs (Jungs) ; Ind. -Ger. yuwen ; Lat. juvenis. T 146 German Grammar. ^am^f, E. battle (camp) ; O.H. G. champf ; A. S. camp (connected Lat. campus (Martins)). J^a^eHe, E. chapel ; from Lat. capella, dimin. of capa, a cloak, then the place where the cloak of Saint Martin was kept, then generally a sacred building (cf. E. cape). ^flC'(freitag) or (5^ar= = E. Good-(Friday) from 0. H. G. chara = sorrow, mourning. faufcn, E. buy ; M. H. G. koufen; 0. H. G. chouf on =: trade, sell or buy ; A. S. cypan, E. cheap, connected. fed, E. bold, quick; 0. H. G. chec, qu6c = living, quick; Lat. vivus for gwivus ; Gk. /3ios, life. Compare E. quick-silver ; " the quick and the dead " [wick, for quick]. JJcrl, E. fellow, churl ; 0. H. G. Karal ; A. S. ceorl = serf ; [cf. ^art, Charles]. ^int), n., E. child ; 0. H. G. chind (connected with genus ; Gk. "^^0%, also with gens, etc.). Sird^c,/., E. church ; 0. H. G. chirihha : A. S. cyrice ; a Greek word KvpMKbv (Ki'^/jtos, the Lord). Sirfri^c,/., E. cherry ; 0. H. G. chirsa ; Lat. cerasius {adj.) ; Gk. Kepaala, cherry-tree. Stfte,/., E. chest ; M. H. G. kiste ; 0. H. G. chista ; A. S. cist ; Lat. cista ; Gk. /c/o-tt;. f teilt, E. small (clean) ; M. H. G. kleine ; A. S. claene. The G. borrowed from Frisian. Sloftcr, E. convent, cloister, from M. Lat. claustrum (cf . claudo, to shut up). jlnabe, E. boy, knave ; M. H. G. knappe ; 0. H. G. chnappo (perhaps to root gen ; Lat. genus, etc. ). Sucii)t, E. man-servant (knight) ; A. S. cniht ; 0. H. G. chneht (see above word). Snte, n., E. knee ; 0. H. G. chniu ; Got. kniu ; Lat. genu ; Gk. '^bw ; Ind. G. gnu, gnew. Sno^f, TO., E. knob, button [A. S. cnopp], connected with itnofpe, a bud. {od^en, E. to cook ; 0. H. G. chohhon, from Lat, coquere, French cuire. fitmmen, E. to come ; 0. H. G. choman, queman ; Lat. venio for gvenio. Sönig, E. king ; M, H. G. kiinic, kiinc ; O. H. G. chunig ; A. S. cyning, from A. S. cynn = race, noble birth. fönnen, E. can ; M. H. G. kunnan ; 0. H. G. chunnan ; Lat. gnosco ; Gk. ^-yvwv. Jlo^jf, TO., E. head (cup) ; 0. H. G. choph, chuph ; A. S. cuppa. [Lat. ciipa, a barrel ; Gk. KecpaXj].]^ Sör^JCt, m., body (corps), M. H. G. körper, körpel, borrowed from Lat. corpus — corporis. foftfl^ieUg, E. dear, expensive, from fofl = victuals, expense, and spilden (0. H. G.), to be prodigal. Srrtft, E. force (craft = force of mind) ; 0. H. G. chraft [perhaps Gk. Kpärvs, strong??], ^eu5, «., E. cross ; M. H. G. kriuz ; 0. H. G. chrflzi, from Lat. crucis (crux), Uvtu^iv, TO,, E. , penny, etc., a small coin with a cross on it originally, hence the name. Sjronc,/., E, crown, borrowed in 0. H. G. from Lat. corona ; M. H. G. kröne, krön, Su^,/., E. cow ; M. H. G. kuo ; A. S. cu ; Got. kos (cf. Lat. bos ; Gk. ßovs ; Skt. gaus). Jlu^jfer, 11., E. copper ; 0. H, G. chupfar, from Lat. aes cyprium, from Ki;7r/)os = Cyprus. furs, E. short, curt ; 0. H. G. skurz ; A. S. sceort ; from Lat. curtus. loffen, E. to let ; 0, H. G. läzzau ; A. S. Isetan ; Got. letan [cf. Lat. lassus = tired], lebtn, E. to live ; Got. liban ; A, S. libban (cf . to leave ; Seib and bleiben, to remain). Scillae,/., E. corpse (cf. Lich-field, corpse-field) ; 0. H. G, lih ; Got. leik, lika = body. [See cjletc|),] InO^t, E. easy, light ; M. H, G. liht ; 0. H. G. lihti. [Perhaps Lat. levis and Gk. e-Xaxi'S.] (ciben, E. to suffer ; M. H. G. liden ; 0. H. G. lidan, connected with Got. leithan, to go, i.e. IeiDeu = go into strange lands, hence suffer. See ©teilb. lernen, E. to learn ; 0. H. G. lernan ; A. S. leornian ; from Got. lais = I know. lefen, E. to read ; 0, H. G. lesan ; Got. lisan. [Perhaps Lat. lego ; Gk. Xiyu), to read.] leift, E. latest, last ; M. H. G. lezzist. Superlative to laz = tired (Lat. lassus). licö, E. dear (lief) ; M. H. G. liep ; 0, H. G. liob ; A. S. leof ; Skt. lubh = desire eagerly. Perhaps to Lat, libido, libet (lubido, lubet). liegen, E. to lie down ; 0. H. G. licken, ligen ; A. S. licgan ; (Lat. lectus, a bed ; Gk, \iKTpov.) Sötoe, TO,, E. lion ; M. H. G. lewe ; 0. H. G. lewo [borrowed from Lat. leo ; Gk. \ed}v~\. maiden, E. to make ; 0. H. G. mahhön ; A. S. macian [connected with M. H. G. gemach = comfortable]. SJJrtgb,/., E. maid, servant ; 0. H. G. magad = virgin. [Perhaps to Ind. G. mag = be able.] 5Diflfjt ("I'Zal), E. meal (times), both from 0. H. G. mäl = a fixed time, a fixed point. SDJann, m., E, man ; 0. H. G. man ; Got. manna ; A. S. mon ; Skt. manus ; Ind. G. manu. German Grammar, 147 iVMtf^an, m., E. marshal, from 0. H. G. marah = horse, mare, and schalk = servant. S)2aultuurf, m., E. mole, from 0. H. G. molte = mould, earth, and werfen = to throw uji. 2)lou8,/., E. mouse ; 0. H. G. mfls ; Lat. mus ; Gk. /iCs ; Skt. miis (mus-ay, to take, rob). me^c, E. more ; 0. H. G. Comparative merre (cf. Lat. major) ; Got. maiza. aWeiftce, to. , E. master ; 0. H. G. meistar, from Lat. magister ; French maitre. SWeffc, /., E. mass (Christ-mas) ; 0. H. G. messa, missa, from Lat. missa est, etc. (concio), the words with which the diakonus dismissed the assembly, if no communion took place. aWoIir, m., E. black(-a-moor) ; M. H. G. mör, from Lat. Maurus (North Africa). S^tönd^, E. monk ; M. H. G. miinech ; 0. H. G. munich, from Lat. monachus, Gk. ixova.xo'!. SOtonb, TO., E. moon ; M. H. G. mäne ; 0. H. G. mäno ; Got. mena ; A. S. möna (Lat. mens-is ; Gk. ij.r]v). müWtf., E. mill ; M. H. G. mill ; 0. H. G. miili ; A. S. myln ; Lat. mola. SJliirtftcr, 11., E. minster ; 0. H. G. munustiri, borrowed from Lat. monasterium = convent. 2Jtünjc,/., E. mint, coin ; 0. H. G. munizza ; borrowed from Lat. moneta = coined money, SDJutter, /. , E. mother ; M. H. G. miioter ; A. S. müddor ; Lat. mater ; Gk. tirjrrjp [Skt. root, mä]. filaitiibax, to., E. neighbour; M. H. G. nachgebür ; 0. H. G. nahgibfir [ = na()C (near) .ind baiter = bflr]. [See bniicn.] 9J«»(^t,/., E. night ; 0. H. G. naht ; A. S. niht ; Lat. noct- ; Gk. wkt-. yiaxat, TO., E. name ; 0. H. G. namo ; A. S. noma ; Lat. nomen ; Gk. 6-po/j.a. 9lebel, to., E. mist ; 0. H. G. nebul ; Lat. nebula ; Gk. ve^^Xr] ; Skt. nablias. SJlcffc, TO., E. nephew ; 0. H. G. nevo ; A. S. nefa ; Lat. nepos = grandson ; Gk. i'^7ro5es= brood, little ones. nen, E. new ; M. H. G. niuwe ; 0. H. G. niuwi ; Got. niujis ; Skt. navus ; Lat. novus ; Gk. veos. neun, E. nhie ; 0. H. G. niun ; A. S. nigun ; Skt. navan ; Lat. novem ; Gk. ivpea. Most likely connected with neu, new, as nine is the first or new number of the 3d tetrade (or series of four things). nUii^tcrtt, E. fasting ; 0. H. G. nuohturn (perhaps Lat. nocturnus, nightly [night's fast?] ). ^iuftz/j E. nut ; 0. H. G. nuz ; not from Lat. nux ; for A. S. hnutu. [Skt. knud.] O^f, n., E. ear ; M. H. G. ore ; 0. H. G. üra ; A. S. eare ; Lat. auris ; Gk. o5y, ©ct, 71. , E. oil ; 0. H. G. ole, ol, borrowed from Lat. oleum in the Sth century. opfern, E. to offer, dedicate ; 0. H. G. opfarön ; A. S. offrian, from Lat. offerre (for ob-ferre). O^crn,/., E. Easter ; 0. H. G. ostarim ; from Teuton goddess Auströ, of the Dawn ; East ; connected with Skt. usäs, Lat. aurora (for ausos-a) ; Gk. -^ws = morning, dawn. $(l(tr, «., E. pair ; 0. H. G. par, borrowed from Lat. par = equal (E. peer). $a{aft, TO. , E. palace ; M. H. G. palast, borrowed from French palais, Lat. palatium. ^iapiev, n. , E. paper, from Gk. and Lat. papyrus, a vegetable, furnishing parchment (in Egypt). iPfoIj,/., E. palatinate ; M. H. G. phalenze ; Lat. palatium; or perhaps more correctly connected with ^fa^I = palings, pales, upon which houses were built in marshes (Lat. palus). $fau, 771., E. pea-cock, -hen ; 0. H. G. pfawo ; Lat. pavo ; Gk. raws (perhaps onomatopoetic name). ?Pfctfe, n., E. horse; M. H. G.tpfert ; borrowed from M. Lat. paraveredus, parifredus, a hybrid word from Gk. Trapd and Lat. veredus = a horse. Compare E. palfrey, French palefroi. ^Pfingften,/., E. pentecost, Whitsuntide ; M. H. G. pfingsten, from Gk. TrevTeKocrrri = 5Qth. (day), i.e. after Easter. ^Pftaumc, /. , E. plum; M. H. G. pflfime, from Lat. prunum (PI. pruna). ^funb, 71., E. pound; 0. H. G. pfunt; A. S. pund, from Lat. pondo. ^Ji(grim, ^itgcr, ???., E. pilgrim; 0. H. G. piligrlm, from Lat. peregrinus, French pelerin. 5Poft,/., E. post, from Latin posita, the place (where the horses stood). ^rebigcn, E. preach; 0. H. G. predigön, from Lat. praedicare, to speak before others. ^prieftcr, to., E. priest; 0. H. G. prestar, from Gk. wpeffßvTepos, Lat. presbyter. ^Sulöcr, 71., E. powder; M. H. G. from Lat. pulvis (-eris). dust, ashes. Cuarffalöer, m., E. quack-doctor. Ouarf from 0. H. G. quacken, to boast; ©atbe, salve, ointment. Ckuelle, /. , E. fountain. New word from 0. H. G. quellan ; Skt. root gel, jala = water. 148 German Grammar. 9{ab, n., (E. wheel); 0. H. G. rad (a word missing in E. and Got.); Lat. rota. atrtuc^, m., E. smoke, reek; M. H. G. rouch; 0. H. G. rouhh; Ind. Germ, root, rfik, to smoke. 9tegcn, m., E. rain; 0. H. G. regan (Lat. rigare, to water), cf. also to irrigate = water. Otcltl^, «., E. empire; 0. H. G. rihhi; A. S. rice; Got. reiki (Lat. rego = to rule, lead). rcid), E. rich, connected with above, originally = powerful, ruling. 9äeuc,y^, E. repentance (cf. to rue) ; 0. H. G. riuwa; A. S. hreowan = to repent, be vexed, be sad. 9äoß, n., E. horse; 0. H. G. ros; A. S. hors. [Perhaps Lat. (curso) curro.] tot, E. red; 0. H. G. rot; Goth, rauds; A. S. reod [cf. Lat. rubido, Fk. kpvepb%\. Oiubct, n., E. rudder, oar; 0, H. G. ruodar; A. S. rother (Lat. ?-e-mus, j-a-tis, Gk. ep^rr;s). ^«•^c,/., E. thing (-sake); 0. H. G. sahha; A. S. sacu = quarrel, cause; Got. sakjo. fcgcn, E. to say; 0. H. G. sagan; A. S. sagjan, secjan. ©alj, n., E. salt; 0. H. G. salz; Got. salt; A. S. sealt; Lat. sal; Gk. äXs. iSainftag, m., E. Saturday; 0. H. G. sarabaz-tag (-tac), from Lat. sabbati-dies) (cf. French samedi). ^avi,/., E. sow; 0. H. G. sfi ; A. S. sü (sugu); Lat. sü(s); Gk. crC(s) (Skt. sü = bring forth). ©d^of, ?i., E. sheep; 0. H. G. scäf ; A. S. sceap (E. ewe, from Lat. ovis, not connected). Städte,/, E. scale; 0. H. G. scäla= shell of fruit. ®il)0^, m., E. treasure; 0. H. G. scaz = money, fortune; A. S. sceatt. S^cecc,/., E. shears, scissors; 0. H. G. sc.äri; A. S. sceran = to cut in two. Schiff, n., E. skiff, vessel; 0. H. G. scif, scef ; A. S. scip; cf. French 6-q"ip6i'> to equij}. @(I)iUtng, m., E. shilling (-ing= derivative syll.); 0. Germ. skellan = to sound metallic. ©ff)Iof, m., E. sleep; 0. H. G. släf ; Got. sleps; A. S. sLTjp. fc^lcrfjt, E. bad; had formerly only the meaning straight, even; 0. H. G. sieht; Got. slaihts, straight. fdltic^cn, E. to shut; 0. H. G. sliozan. (Probably, Lat. claudo-sum for s-clausum.) ^iS^xaXt't) , m., E. smith; M. H. G. smit; 0. H. G. smid; Got. smi- applies to hard wood, metals. ©d^nec, m., E. snow; M. H. G. sne; 0. H. G. snGo; A. S. snäw; Got. snaiws. The Latin (nix) nivis, and Gk. j't^fi, it snows, have lost s before the n. fi^ön, E. fine; M. H. G. schoene; 0. H. G. sc6ni = glittering, brilliant; Got. skauns = form, originally only meaning "with a form " [cf. Lat. forma for beauty]. fi^teiden, E. write (cf. scribe); 0. H. G. scrlban, from Lat. scribere. [Connected with E. shrive.] ©tl^ulc,/., E. school; M. H. G. schuole; 0. H. G. scuola, from Lat. scöla, schola. ^^WstXn, n., E. swine; M. H. G. swln; A. S. swin; Got. swein [connected with Salt, which see]. ©ti^hJcftcr,/., E. sister; 0. H. G. swester; Got. swistar; A. S. sweostor; Skt. swasr; Lat. soror. fi^tüörcn, E. to swear; 0. H. G. sweren; Got. swaran; A. S. swerjan [cf. E. an-,s!w?-]. fcd[)8, E. six; 0. H, G. sehs; A. S. six; Got. saihs; Lat. sex; Gk. ?^; Skt. sas. fe^en, E. to see; 0. H. G. sehan; A. S. seohan, seon [cf. Lat. sequi=follow (with the eyes)]. fein, E. to be; M. H. G. sin (from various roots, cf. Lat. sum, sunt; es, est; fio, etc.). ft(f), E. oneself; 0. H. G. sih; cf. Lat. se; Gk. e; Skt. sva = own. Sicfl, m., E. victoi-y; 0. H. G. sigi, sigu, from Skt. root sah = to conquer. [Perhaps Gk. ^-ax-of.] fiijen, E. to sit; 0. H. G. sizzian; A. S. sittan. Cf. Lat. sedeo; Gk. ^^ofiai for a-ed-jo-. Sflatie, m., E. slave, from Slavus; a Latin term, from the Slavonian war-prisoners. ©oljn, m., E. son; O. H. G. sun, sunu; Got. sunus; Skt. sünü [sü = bring forth in Skt.]. Solb, m., pay (cf. soldier), from French solde = pay, reward, wages; Lat. solidus, a coin. ©ommcr, m., E. summer; 0. H. G. sumar; A. S. sumor [Skt. sama = year]. Sonne,/., E. sun; 0. H. G. sunna [cf. Lat. sol; Gk. ijXios; Skt. svar, sü, to shine]. Spiegel, 7n., E. looking-glass; 0. H. G. spiagal; Lat. speculum. Siaat, m., state; and Stabt, E. town, from Lat. status; Lid. G. sta = f^c{;cn, to stand. fte^en, E. to stand; 0. H. G. sten, stän; Got. standan; cf. Lat. stare; Gk. l-aTa-vai. ftcrtictt, E. to die (cf. starve); 0. H. G. sterkän; A. S. steorfan. ©teen, m., E. star; 0. H. G. sterno; Got. stairnö; A. S. steorra; Gk. a-crrrjp; Lat. stella. ©tieafte,/., E. street; 0. H. G. sträza; A. S. straet, from Lat. via strata = paved way. German Granmiar. 149 Studc,/., E. room (cf. stove); 0. H. G. stuba; A. S. stofe=room with heating contrivance (?). Sub, m., E. South, with loss of n from 0. H. G. sundan; A. S. silth [connected with sun(?)]. fiift, E. sweet; M. H. G. siieze; 0. H. G. swuozi, suozi; A. S. swete; cf. Lat. suavis; Gk. rfi\i%. Sttfct,/., E. table; M. H. G. tavel; 0. H. G. tavala, from Lat. tabella, tabula. Sag, m., E. day; 0. H. G. tac(g); Got. dags; A. S. daeg; Skt. dah = to burn \iiot Lat. dies]. Sftlcr, ??i.j E. dollar, a new G. word from 3oa^imÖtater, a florin from the 3oac^il«ötal, valley of J. Soufc,/., E. baptism [dip] ; 0..H. G. toufa; Got. daupjan; A. S. dopian (to: tief, deep). Saufcnb, E. thousand; M. H. G. tusent; 0. H. G. tusunt; A. S. thusend; thusundi. Scif, TO., E. share (deal); Got. dail; A. S. dael. Seller, ??i., E. plate, from Italian tagliere, connected with tailler, to cut (cf. E. tailor). Scufel, m., E. devil; M. H. G. tiuvel; 0. H. G. tioval; Lat. diabolus (in 6th century). Sod(tcr,/., E. daughter; O. H. G. tohtar; A. S. dohtor; cf. Gk. evyaryjp. (Perhaps Skt. düh = to milk.) Sot», m., E. death; M. H. G. tot; Got. dauthus; cf. E. die (root lost for G. flctbeil, to die). treu, E. true; M. H. G. triuwe; A. S. treowe [cf. E. truth, troth; French treve=: truce]. tun, E. to do; M. H. G. tuon; A. S. don; cf. Lat. de-di; Gk. 6e in Tt-0i]-/xt, to put; Skt. dha. Sure,/., E. door; 0. H, G. turi ; A. S. duru ; Ind. G. dhur; Gk. dvpa; Lat. fores. Sugcnb,/., E. virtue ; M. H. G. tugend [to verb taugen, to be worth]. Sumt/ m. , E. tower, from Lat. turris ; A. S. tür, torr. (Unexplained change of r into m. ) Ü6en, E, to practise ; 0. H. G. uoben [cf. Lat. opus = work ; operari, to work, sacrifice]. lt^r,y., E. clock, hour ; from Lat. hora, French heure (silent h). SJcild^en, n., E. violet, a diminutive ; M. H. G. viel ; from Lat. viola (cf. Fr. violette). SJic^, 71., E. [fee] beast ; 0. H. G. fehu ; A. S. feoh, from Lat. pecus, cattle [cf. pecuniae money]. SSJagcn, m. , E. carriage, wain ; A. S. waegn ; Ind. G. root wegh, to pull, drive ; Lat. veh-iculum. toa^r, E. true ; 0. H. G. wäri ; connected with Lat. verus [but A. S. soth, E. sooth]. aS.*affcr, «., E. water ; 0. H. G. wazzar ; A. S. waeter ; Ind. G. ud = wet, in Gk. Cdup, water ; Lat. udus. SSJeiö, 71., E. woman, wife ; M. H. G. wib ; A. S. wif. [Perhaps Skt. vip = to be enthusiastic (?)] ^ein, on., E. wine ; 0. H. G. win ; A. S. win ; Got. wein ; Lat. vinum ; Gk. olvos. foelc^-., E. which ; 0. H. G. wie-lih ; Got. hwi-leiks ; A. S. hwylc [ = tt»er + gletc!) (whe + liko)]. aSJelfd^, E. Welsh; 0. H. G. walhisc = romanic [the Keltic "foreigners," the Volcae]. [Cf. E. Wales, Corn- wall ; G. it» el fc^ = French or Italian ; also Wallachia.] tocrbcn, E. to become ; 0. H. G. werdan ; Got. wairthan. Perhaps Lat. verto, to turn, change. aSJeften, ?«., E. west ; 0. H. G. westan. [Cf. Lat. vesper, Gk. e(r7re/3a = evening, west.] toilb, E. M-ild ; O. H. G. wildi = going astray (scarcely with Lat, silva or G. SSall», wood). toiffcn, E. know (wit, wot) ; 0. H. G. wizzan (cf. Got. -wait — id) ttjet^, I know) ; Lat. \adeo. SSJort, n., E, word ; Got. waurd, from Ind. G. wrdho-. (Cf. Lat. verbum.) jä^Ie», E. to count, tell ; M. H. G. zaln, zeln ; A. S. tellan ; Got. talzjan, to instruct. geigen, E. to show ; 0. H. G. zeigön ; Ind. G. root dik ; cf. Lat. dico, Gk. BeiKPVfii. i'ivan^xQ, E. twenty ; 0. H. G. zweinzug ; A. S. twentig [-tig from Got. tigu ; cf. Lat. decem]. jtoci, E. two ; M. H. G. zwene (fem. zwo, neut. zwei) ; A. S.fem. two ; Lat. duo ; Gk. dvo ; so that J^Wei, two, is really the neuter form of the word A, S. twegen ; Skt. dva. 5tuifi^en, E. be-tween ; O. H, G. zwisken, between two ; connected with ätt?Ct, above. Note. — The above short Dictionary contains, as a rule, only root-words, and the intelligent student mil easily connect a great number of dex-ivatives with them, especially after he has studied the preceding sections on Derivation and Word-formation. Some words also, the derivation of which from Latin is very self-evident, or which entered straight and unchanged from Latin or Greek, such as ^^ilologt'e, 31fironomte, etc., Slcctcr, ^JattOn, etc., have been omitted. APPENDIX B. [yV.ß.— These Lists might be learnt with advantage very early in the Student's course.] In order to assist the pupil in that most essential and also most difficult part in the study of any foreign language, namely, the speedy acquisition of its vocabulary, we append here the most important words which are, with slight modifications, the same in German and English, Eoots only are given as a rule, but the intelligent student will find little difficulty in grouping some derivatives round each root ; for example : sleep — @c^Iaf, m. (given) : from this come fd)Iafen, to sleep; einfc^täfcrn, to send to sleep; üevfd)Iafen (jtd;), to oversleep oneself; @(i;tof== Jiinmev, bedroom; @cl)laftntnf, sleeping draught; frf)Iäfrtg, sleepij, etc. In almost all cases the etymologically related word in the one language is also the equivalent in meaning of its fellow in the other language ; where this is not so, the modern meaning of the word is given in brackets, as, for example, English town (hedge), a walled-in or hedged-in collection of houses, and German 3>*wn, a hedge. Unchanged, or only slightly changed, Latin or Greek words are not given in the following lists ; many of them are spelt the same way in German and English, as ?Jatton (f.), ^pn't (m.), (September, l^ecemkr, etc. ; others are only diff"erent in their terminations, thus, English -^?/= German ^i'äi; as university =X[\\\'i)ix[iiai, faculty ='^oX\xWiit, etc, English -?/= German At, as j9/w/osqp/t^=^^t(cfop^fe, i/eof/rajp%=@eogvapf»te, etc. English -ics= German -At, diS, politics ='^i)\'\iii, physic s='''p\)'i^^it, etc. Proper names of persons, towns, or countries are not given here. I. Words exactly alike in form and meaning in English and German. all aU butter Sutter,/. mast 2)?afl, m. still (quiet) jltU altar Sirtar, TO. fall faU-en, irreg. mild milb stink fünften, irreg. ball S3aa, m. fast fafi^en, reg. moor 3)?oor, n. strand ©tranb, to. balsam S5alfam, m. find finb-en, irreg. name S'Jame, m. tiger Siger, to. band S3 ant», n. finger ginger, m. nest 9?ef!, n. wall SffiaU, TO. bank 55anf,/. gas ®aö, n. pack pfld=en, reg. wander n?anber-n, reg banner banner, n. gold ®Olb, n. pause ^aufe,/. ware Söare,/. baron S5aron, m. hack ^acf=cn, reg. post ^ofl,/. warm warm begin begin»n»en, irreg. hammer jammer, m. ring Sting, TO. warn irarn=en, reg. bind binb^en, irrey. hand |)atib,/. rose atofe,/. wild ivilb bitter bitter hinder ^inber=n, reg. sand ©anb, TO. wind SBlnb, TO. blind btinb horn f)orn, n. send fe;ib-en, half reg. winter 2Btntcr, to. brief «Brief (= letter) hunger |)unger, m. sink ftnf^en, irreg. wolf SBoIf, TO. bring bring-en, halfrcfj. land Sanb, n. stand ©tanb, TO. . and a few others German Grammar 151 II. Words nearly alike. alms 51tmofcn, n. hole (cave) |)öf)le,/. pair ^aar, n. span ©panne,/. bake bacf=Cn, Irrerj. hell ^ööe,/. palm ^atme,/. star ©tern, to. bible Sibel,/. king Äöntg, TO. paper papier, n. state , TO. new IICU sole ©o^Ie,/ wiU StUe, TO. grass ©ratJ, n. nine neun son ®of)n, TO. woe ! iüc^ ! grim grtnim[=tG] often oft soul ©eele,/. wool SoUe,/ [These could not be classified in the following lists.] III. Vowel Variations. 1. English a generally = German leaf 2n;re,/ nmger mtrei9, TO. (v.) English ea= German (o), as in dead tobt Easter Oi^ern, «. to hearken ^orc^en, re^, death 3; Ob, m. flea gtO^, TO. stream ©trom, TO. ear £)^r, n. great gro^ to swear fc^tt)ören, «Vre^/. east Ojlen, m. to hear ^örcn, reg. 4. cheese deed free beer creep fleet to feel green (i.) English ee = German a (ä), as in : Ääfe, TO. I sheep ©Ci^af, n. %QX,f. I sleep ©C^Iaf, TO. (ii.) English ee= German et, as in : frei I three bret (iii.) English ee = German t'e, as in : S3ier, n. \ deep tief friec^cn, irreg, \ deer [animal] Sier, n. (iv.) English ee= German O, as in : glotte,/. I need ^cOt (v.) EngHsh ee= German (ii) U, as in : füllten, reg. grün heed [guard] keen [bold] f)Ut,/. fit^n steel sti'eet keel knee to seek sweet ©träfe,/. Äiet TO. i^nie, n. fuel en, reg. 5. English ei(= German au, as in to brew dew brauen, reg. to hew to mew ^aucn, irreg. miauen, reg. 6. English ^= often German t, as in milk, 9)?i(cf) (f.), etc. ; but, (i.) English i= German au, as in : bride 23raut,/. I to dive tau(!^en I fist dip (baptize) taufen, reg. \ to drip traufen I to sip (sup) ©^raube,/. faufen German Graim^iar. 153 (ii.) English i = Geri iian e, as in : field gelt, 71. liver Seber,/. slight (bad) felled; t to fight fed^ten, irreg. to milk melfen, irreg. to stick flcc^cn, reg. to give geben, irreg . quick (bold) fed to strive ftreben, reg. knight (groom) ÄilCC^t, m. right 3tec|)t, n. to think benfen, haJJ reg. to live leben, reg. (iii.) English /=Gei six man ei, as in : ^i6)ä to bite beißen, h-reg. to grip greifen, irreg. to smite fc^meif en, irreg. to drive treiben, irreg. mile 5KeiIe,/. stiflf fteif ditch, dyke (pond) %%\^, m. pipe ?^feife,/. swine @c{;n)ein n. ice diä, n. prize, price ^reiö, m. tide (time) 3eit,/. idle (vain useless) citet rich reic^ twig 3»veig, m. iion Sifen, n. to ride reiten^ irreg. white tueif fig geige,/. ripe reif wide i»eit tile mi^.f. side Beite,/. wife Sßcib, n. fine fein to shine fc|einen, irreg. wise tt?eife to glide gleiten, irreg. (iv.) English /=Ger man u (u), as in birth ©e^nrt,/. hip ^üfte,/. sin (Sünbe,/. öripple Ärüppet, m. kiss Auf, m. thin bünn to fill füllen, reg. mill Tim^.f- thirst 2)uvf}, m. flight gluckt,/. minster Tlixnficx, n. tinder 3unber, m. to gird gürten, reg. mint Wlixni«,/. 7. (i.) English o = Geri nan a, as in : cold falt long tang to throng \id) brängen, reg. to fold fatten, reg. nose 9Zafe,/. wold (wood) Salb, m. to hold Ratten, irreg. (ii.) English o = Ger old man e, as in : alt more me^r snow ©c^nee, m. worth aBert, m. roe 3?el;, n. (iii.) English o=Gei work -man et, as in : 2öerf, n. bone S3 ein, n. holy heilig stone ©tein, 7)1. both hiiic home ^iim, 11. stroke ©treicf), m. cloth (dre ss) Äleib, ?j. hot f)ii^ token 3eic^en, n.' ghost ®eift, m. most meifi two jmei (iv.) English ö = Gei ^man u (Ü), as in ' bosom Sufen, m. fodder gutter, n. over über box 33üc^fe,/. for für to prove prüfeuy 7-eg. brother ©ruber, m. ford gutt,/. shot (Bd)U^, m. copper Äupfer, ?i. fox gU^Ö, m. storm ©turrn, ni. to do tun, i?-reör. to hop p^fen, reg. wonder Sunbcr, n. -dom ==tum mother abutter,/. worm SBurm, in. as: kingdom ilöntätum U 154 German Grammar. 8. English ort= German et, as in : broad oak breit eic^e,/. oath Sit», TO. soap (Seife,/. 9. English oo= German u (ii), as in blood SSdtt, n. cool \m foot guf, TO. bloom (flower) S3(ume,/. door Sure,/. good gut book S3u^, n. flood gtut,/. hoof §Uf, TO. booth S5ube,/. floor grur,/. stool ©tu^T, wi brood S5rut/. 10. (i.) English om= German au, as in foul (lazy) fallt louse ?auö,/. rough rau^ house |)auö, n. mouse fWauö,/. sour fauet loud taut 1 out (ii.) English o?{= German it, as in : auö thousand taufenb enough genug plough ^flug, TO. through burd; ground ©runb, TO. round runb wound SSunbe, f. hound f>unl>, TO. south ©ül)(en) 11. English ozü= German au (it), as in : brown braun cow Äu^,/ brows Stauen shower @(^auer, m. sow @au,/. town (hedge) 3aun, to. 12. (i.) English w= German ait, as in : to endure baucrn, rtcj. I scum ©C^auttt, m. plum Pflaume,/. I thumb 2)auincn, to. to burn (ii.) English m= German e, as in : brennen, /*«//■ ref/. I churl (fellow) ^zx\,m. up to run auf rennen, half reg. (iii ) English M= = German 0, as in : full DOÜ summer ©ommer, to gulf ©off, TO. sun ®onnf,/. murder 2)?orb, TO. to stutter flottern, rey. spur (S^otr, TO. (iv •) English u- = German it, as in : hut f)ütte,/. 1 must muffet'/ aux. thunder tun turf Conner, to. 2:onnf,/. 2:orf, m. to pluck pflJiicfer, reg. German Grammar. 155 IV. Consonant Variations. [The Student is recommended to look up pp. 135-137 in the Grammar.] 1. Vowel-Consonants y, % in English =g in German, as in : wain (carriage) SBagen, m. way 2Öcg, m. yester(-day) geficm y=j (spirans) young jung day S:ag, m. rain SRegen, m. eye Sluge, 11. [said ge=fag=t] honey f)ontg, m. sail ©egel, n. to lay legmen, rerj. to say fag=en, reg. maid «Kagb,/. to slay (hit) fc^Iag^en, irretj nail 5RageI, m. 2, Spirans s, by itself, presents no variations in the two languages, but {a) English s/t= German f^, as in : ash(es) 2lfc|)e,/. bishop Sifcf)Of, m. bush Sufc^, m. fish gtfcf), m. flesh S^Ptftf'' '^• fresh frifc^ marsh 9)?arfc^, m. flask glafc|)e,/. scale ©c^ale,/. scarf ©c^ärpe,/. shade ©(fatten, m. ship shame ©c^am,/. shoe sharp fc^arf shot shear f(|eer»en, irreg. shovel sheath ®4)eibe,/. shower sheep ©c^af, M. to wash to shine fc^ein»en, irreg. rman fd;, as in : scarlet ©c^artac^, m. skifiF scour f4)euer'U, ?-?(/. skirt scum ©ci^aum, m. (c) English s/= German fc^I, as in : to slay (hit) f^(ag»ei1, irreg. \ sUght (bad) fc^Iec^t | Exception: slave = @f la ÖC [Fr. esdavel. to sleep fd;Iaf=£n, irreg. to slumber [d) English s?n = German fc^nt, as in : small fc^mal I smith ©C^mict», m. to smite (throw) fAmcif =en, irreg. I (e) English S7i= German fd^n, as in s?iotü=®(^nee. smut ©C^iff, 11. ©^U^, m. ©cf)Uf, m. ©d;aufef,/. ©d;auer, m. iVClfc^'Cn, irreg. ©c()tff, n. ©cf)ürjc,/. ( = apron) fcf)(umnieroi, reg. ©^mu§, on. 3. Labial Mutes : (a) English h generally = b in German, except in : bolster ^Otficr, n. \ knob ÄllOpf, m. | table Slofel,/ iV^.i?. — English wii = German mm, as in : chamber Äammer,/. I dumb (stupid) biimm thumb ©aumen, to. to climb !(tmmtCl^, 771. ^iih, 71. @cf;ärpe,/ üer=geffcn, lr7-eg. »erraffen, irreg. to shave f(|)aben (rajteren) 7-eg. to shove fc^ieben, ir7-eg. sieve @icb, 71. silver (Silber, ?;. to starve (die) flcrben, m-ej/. to strive jlrebcn, reg. to weave iucben, irreg. shovel twelve ©c|)aufe(,/. gmölf German Gra^nmar 157 4. Dental Mutes : {a) English c? = German t, as in : beard 33 art, m. dip (baptize) taufen, reg. hard ^art to bid bieten, h-reg. ditch (pond) Seic^, m. idle (vain) eitet bladder Slatter,/. to do tun, ij-7-eg. to knead fneten, reg. blade (leaf) Statt, n. -dom =tum loud taut blood Slut, n. door Sure,/. middle «Witte,/. bread ©rot, n. dough Seig, m. need 5?ot,/ bride Sraut,/. dove '3:anii,f. old alt broad breit dream Srauin, m. red rot brood S3rut,/. drink trinfen, irreg. to ride reiten, irreg. cold fait to drip triefen, irreg. saddle ©attet, m. dale Sat, n. to drive treiben, irreg. seed ®aat,/. dance Stanj di-op Sropfcn, m. seldom fetten daughter 3;ocf)ter,/. flood grut,/. side ®eite,/. day- Sag, m. fodder gutter, n. shade ©fatten, m dead tot to fold fatten, reg. spade ©paten, m. deaf taub ford gurt,/ stead natt dear teuer garden ©arten, m. tide (time) 3dt,f. . deep tief to gird gürten, reg. to tread treten, irreg deer (animal) %\iX, n. to glide gleiten, irreg. to wade ivaten, reg. devil Seufet, m. God ©Ott, m. wide tveit dew %!xyx, m. good gut word Sort, n. (b) (i.) English ^= German ff, ^, as in : better beffer kettle Reffet, m. to smite ( ;hrow) fct;meifen, i to bite beiden, irreg. to let taffen, irreg. spit ®^)ie§, m. to eat effen, irreg. lot S0Ö, 11. street ©träfe,/ foot guf , m. nettle 9^effet,/ sweat ©^lüeif, m to forget »ergeffen, irreg. nut 9tug,/ sweet m great grog out auö that taß, bag to hate Raffen, reg. settle (chair) ©cffef, m. water aSaffer, ». hot ^eif to shoot fi^icgen, irreg. white tt)eif (ii.) English ;!= German j (^), as in : cat ^a^e,/. curt furj heart f)erj, n. malt 9}?atj,/, n. mint 2«ünje,/. net 5Re^, n. plant ^flanje,/ salt ©atj, 71. to set fc^en, reg. to sit jt^en, irreg. skirt (apron) ©cbiir^e,/ smut (dirt) swart (black) tell (count) ten tide (time) tin tinder to (at) token toll tongue ©c()mu^, TO. fct)ivarj 5äl;ten, reg. ae^n 3eit-/ 3inn/ n. 3unber, m. 3ei^en, n. 3ott, m. 3unge,/. town (hedge) 3aun, 7n. twelve imif twenty- iwainiQ twig 3i»eig, m. to twitter jttjitfcbern, reg two jwet wart Sarse,/. wheat SBeijen, m. to whet »i^e^en, o-eg. wit m^.m 158 Gei^inan Grammar (c) (i.) English ^A= German t>, as in bath SPfib, n. oath Sib, m. thine bein both bctcc path ^fcib, m. thing 2)ing, n. booth Sube,/. sheath ©c^cibe,/. to think ben fen, halfrcfj. brother ©ruber, m. smith ©(|mteb, m. thirst 2)urft, m. cloth SlUit, n. south ®üb(en), m. this btef(*er, =e, =eö) death Sob, m. that baö, ba^ thorn £!orn, wi. earth erbe,/. thatch S)ac(), n. thou bu feather geber,/. the ber, bte, baö three brei heath ^ictbe,/. there ba, bort throng ©rang, m. hearth |)erb, m. thick bicf through bur^ leather Seber, m. thief £!ief>, m. thumb ©aumen, m. north 9iorb(en), m. thin biinn thunder 2)onner, m. birth father (ii.) English ^/i= German t {it), as in : @e=burt,/. 5Sater, m. mother weather SOTutter,/. Setter, «. worth 2Bert, m. Guttural Mutes : (a) English c/i= German f, as in anchor 2(nfer, m. chamber Änmmer,/. chest Ätfie, /: bench Sanf,/. chapel ÄapeUe,/. chin Ätnn, «. -chafer Ääfer, m. cheese Ääfe, ??i. finch ginf, TO. chalk (lime) Äalf, m. (6) (i.) English , as in : ark Strebe,/. like Ö=teic^ sick ficc^ beck (brook) S5ac^, TO. to make mad;cn, reg. sickle ©tc^ct,/. book Su^, n. milk 2»ifc^,/. spoke (of a ®peid;c, /. to break brechen, irretj. monk 3Wönc|), m. wheel) to cook fO(|en, re(j. oak eic^e,/. stroke ©trei0, TO hark ! ^orc^I to reek (smoke) rauc{)eti, re D[CI C )'G4-10 AW LD 21A-50m.-4,'60 (A9552sI0)476B General Library University of CaUfornia Berkeley A--J,-' ■ » .■ " -:i^«4iS^ ra smj mäm